Home

QDS(TM) User`s Manual - NOVA Research Company

1. ccssseceesseseereees 217 Adding Passwords seenen 217 Removing PDassworde nanna 218 P ssword Scenarios sussana een 218 Special Codes Using Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable 221 Special Codeialueg esgerceseskueeersedeeekeeg deed aaa ada haa aaa aia aaa 221 Changing Special Code Values e 222 Missing Values for Paper Questionnaire Data OMnly ccsseccsseeeeeseeesseesesteeeeeeeees 222 Table of Contents ix Using Special Codes in QDS ExpresSiOn cssecceseeeeeseeeeseesesneeeeeeeeesneeseseeeenseeeees 222 Substitution TOKENS secesestsedtcssccescrratcedesesdstccscadscdmarstadesuncreceiesssicasecendes 225 Substitution Token SYMtax ccccccccesceesceeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeseseeeeeneeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeeseeeescesenseeeeenees 225 Using Substitution Tokens With CAPI ACAS IL ccsecseseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeseneeneneeeeees 225 Using Substitution Tokens in Questions and Information Hemes 225 Using Substitution Tokens as Response Cholces 226 E 229 Understanding Table Element c ssecccesccesseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaesenseeeeeeeseseaeseneenenseeeees 229 Inserting a Table Element secs cca cec once eee sccst ened casensdes sch enncctrunciencsestupeceebscecstnesstencenterees 230 Defining Categories ccceccccsccesseeceeneeenseeeeeseeesceeeenseeeeeeeeescaeseseeeenseaeeseeeeseaeseseenenseeeess 231 Inserting Data Elements Within a Table c csccsseeceseeeseseeeeeeeseseeeeneeeeseneesesnenensee
2. 00n aa Word or WordPerfect determined by what is installed on your machine Margins aaaeeeaa Sets document margin default values are 4 top and bottom 4 left and right Separation between Sets paragraph spacing for the questionnaire default values are 10 points for questions and 4 points for responses Men and Women a a Disabled this feature is not available Hide Numeric Code Values Check this box to suppress display of numeric values for response categories This option is not available for interviewer administered questionnaires Fonts Tab Use the options on the Fonts tab to customize font Question Text settings for the questionnaire file Click Change to Times New Roman 11 pi Change modify settings Default values are as follows Layout Fonts e Information Text Question Text Times New Roman 11 pt Fines New nomen ia pt Change Information Text Times New Roman 12 pt Response Set Response Get Times New Roman 10 pt Times New Roman 10 pt Change Instructions Times New Roman Eer 11 pt bold italic Times New Roman 11 ptBi Change View the sample files First Questionnaire Example EN Qx RTF and First Questionnaire Example EN Self RTF Note that the default name assigned by QDS was retained Hide Numeric Code Values was checked for the self administered form all other Build Options were left at their default settings The Data Entry Module 91 WORKI NG
3. cceceeeeseeeeeeneeenseeeeeenee seas seseeeenseeeeseesesaaeseesneeeneeeeseaeseseeeenseeeeees 75 Inserting an Information Element ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeneeseeeeetaaeeteneeee 75 Information Element Tabs ccccceccceeceeeeeeeececeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeseeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeee 76 Comment Elements ana cneces feces canine Seege eege Ee 77 Inserting a Comment Element 77 Section Header Elements ee vseeageesederee ag eEECeee senceseneeenucteseoseenaeteneencreneeceneezenteeecus 78 Inserting a Section Header 78 Section Header Element Tab 78 Format ElQMent E 78 Preparing to Build Validating Your Specifications ssee 81 Validation Error Messages cccseccesceesseeeeeseeeseeeeeseaeenseeeeeeeeeseaaesasneeeeeeeeseeseneeeenseeeees 82 identifier Variables icc tec avidin SEENEN eee 82 Question Numbers ge siet eee seg egene eae Eer des edie Ea 82 ie le CEET 82 Re 83 GODS LENS Eege eege ee ee 83 DUpliGate ET 83 iv QDS Questionnaire Development System BRANCHING EE 83 Gelee sa cannes ceed sag Sta ec asada avec el ceased neath ca ested aad cad daa cates vasa A deka ope 83 Custom REPOMMS i 2 eesgueg bei gek RE e Ee cdbesscven e aeaeaie aa aaaea aidia iaaii 84 MISCEIANGCOUS ie 2 2deee sts bevachetecgeeat becheaceedesescdeecistan eienenn iodain datana daitan aat 84 Using Your Specifications FUG sc egeegeeesgoeggegeeeueogggegreggegieeeeEuegkeeeeiegkNeeg 85 Types of Interview Dat
4. QDE Enter new interviews pace Verify prior interviews Action Select button for intended data entry mode Enter new interviews default Verify prior interviews or Browse interviews Browse interviews is a read only mode that does not allow modification of entered data C Browse interviews read only Batch Enter Batch Code 94 QDS Questionnaire Development System Once the correct options are selected click Open to begin data entry WESSEN Batches To facilitate data entry verification and management it is recommended that paper forms be entered in groups or Batches of about 10 to 20 Each batch represents a separate data file Typically a specific naming convention will be established for all data files This can be something as simple as a numeric sequence or a certain characteristic of the file itself e g site date interviewer or computer The Batch Code entered on the Data Entry Open screen will be included in the data file name For example if the name of the Data Entry Control File was My Questionnaire DE QDE the data file for Batch 012 would be My Questionnaire DE 012 QPD Enter the Batch Code in the data entry Open dialog Batch box The Batch Code can be any series of letters and or numbers Batch Codes can be as simple as sequential numbers or can indicate an identifying characteristic of the file itself e g site machine keyer ID
5. Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Wem Description of category lf Code Zero branch to Marker lt lt Double click here to add anew code gt gt s Default for element If Don t Know branch same as Default C Code Zero If Refused branch same as Plus special codes Don t Know f Default C Code Zero M Refused f i z mif Not Applicable branch same as EES C Default Code Zero IT Display in reverse order ltem Description of Category On the Nominal Pick One Response Set tab you will see a box with the headings Item and Ge GEES Description of category Inside the box is the text lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt Description and Valua Label Double clicking on this text will open the Code Button Text optional Button File Key Item window which will allow you to input as m information for each category in the response 8 set Specifically you will be asked to input the Pepen ier following Gen Code Value 0aaaaeeeeeeeeeee e Enter a unique numeric value By default QDS will assign 0 to the first category and increment by one for each additional category Audio File 0aaaaaaaeeeaee eenen File name for WAV file see Using Audio on page 145 This is optional and is applicable only for ACASI interviews Description Enter description of the category this will also prov
6. Exporting to SPSS To export your data to SPSS 1 Select FilelExport Interviews 2 Select SPSS System File SAV from the Save as type drop down box 3 Click Options and make desired changes See SPSS Save As Options below 4 Click Save A pop up dialog box will tell you how many interviews were exported to the specified SPSS file SPSS Save As Options After clicking on the Options button from the Save As box the SPSS Options box will be opened The following Label Special Value and Missing data options may be set on the SPSS Options window SPSS Options EN Special Value Recodes Specified Values Recode toe Wi Special Codes Don t Know fF C System Missing Refused Lo C Range Bottom Not Applicable E C Range Top Skipped F C Range Middle E C Specified Values Missing 5 core Include Question Number with Variable Label Check this box to include the question number with the variable label The question number will be added at the beginning of the label The default setting is not checked Special Value Recodes To change how QDS special values are exported select an option from the Special Value Recodes Recode to box Exporting Data 189 Special Codes Select this to have all special responses converted to their special codes as defined in the Design Studio Special responses include Don t Know default 9 7 Refused to Answ
7. Questionnaire Development System Range Functions BOTTOM Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the lower bound of a numeric value Example BOTTOM CIG_DAY 0 where CIG_DAY is equal to the range 0 95 TOP Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the upper bound of a numeric value Example TOP CIG_DAY 95 where CIG_DAY is equal to the range 0 95 MIDDLE Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the midpoint of a numeric value rounding down same as MIDLOW Example MIDDLE CIG_DAY 47 where CIG_DAY is equal to the range 0 95 MIDLOW Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the midpoint of a numeric value rounding down same as MIDDLE Example MIDLOW CIG_DAY 47 where CIG_DAY is equal to the range 0 95 MIDHIGH Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the midpoint of a numeric value rounding up Example MIDHIGH CIG_DAY 48 where CIG_DAY is equal to the range 0 95 String Functions SUBSTRING Sir Skip Len String Expression Returns the substring of the string Str created by skipping the number of characters specified by the second argument Skip and returning the number of characters specified by the third argument Len Example SUBSTRING Dallas 0 1 gt D Note Typo in QDS Help file Example lists function as SUBSTR CONCAT Str1 Str2 String Expression Returns the concatenation of Strings Str1 and Str2 Example CONCAT Dallas CONCAT AT XU returns Dallas TX LEN
8. This will change the settings for all elements in the specifications file Any elements using settings other than the new default will need to be reset manually 4 Click OK Right click on an option to view What s This help for additional information about each default setting Data Security 213 DATA SECURITY QDS v2 4 adds the ability to encrypt collected data and password protect questionnaires so that unauthorized users are unable to view export or modify collected data Selecting Security There are four security options available in the Design Studio No encryption Default Read password Modify password To select encryption go to OptionslInterviews Security from the main menu Interview Options Study Configuration Identifier Variables Applicability Security m Data encryption Read password Modify password E Noenciption Change Add perau a Delete Read password No encryption This is the system default where data are not encrypted A modify password may be optionally added if added the Delete modify password button will be enabled An unencrypted data file contains embedded strings of ASCII text for each response These strings are readable if someone opens a data file with either a text editor or a word processor In the case where a response contains information that uniquely identifies a subject such as a social security number the ide
9. Verifier inputs 1 1 is accepted as the correct value Verifier inputs 2 2 is accepted as the correct value Verifier inputs some other value Require third entry Repeat until the same value has been entered twice consecutively As with partially completed data entry interviews you may also complete a partially verified interview at a later time See Completing a Partially Entered Interview on page 99 Verification Log File As you verify a batch QDS will write out a Log File to record all values changed during verification This file is written out in Rich Text Format RTF and may be reviewed in your word processor The name for the Log File matches the data file name except that the QPD extension is replaced with LOG If desired this file can be used to monitor data entry accuracy or confirm that verification changes are accurate Ea You can view the sample file called First Questionnaire Example DE aa A01 LOG which shows Verifying 01 Verifying 02 Q7 EARLY was changed from 2 Somewhat Agree to 1 Strongly Agree You can see that interviews for respondents 01 and 02 have been verified For interview 02 the value for the variable EARLY has been changed from 2 to 1 The Data Entry Module 103 Browsing in Data Entry If you would like to view previously entered data without the risk of inadvertently changing a response you can choose to browse interviews To open a data file in Browse mode 1 Locate t
10. Cannot Create File QDS is unable to build the requested product because the file cannot be accessed Most likely the file is in use by another application There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error 260 QDS Questionnaire Development System Cannot Create Interview Control File QDS is unable to write to the interview control file you selected There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error If you cannot determine the cause of the problem try creating the file on a different drive Cannot Create Script File QDS is unable to create an audio script file in the directory you selected for audio files Most likely the file is in use by another application There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error If you cannot determine the cause of the problem try changing to a different audio directory by pressing the Options button in the File Save dialog box that appears when you request a Build Cannot Read Installation Options Your local installation options file UserO pts QDO is unreadable There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error In any event the options have not been reset Cannot Validate
11. Focus rectangle displacement It is standard practice to show that a button has the focus i e is currently active by drawing a dotted rectangle inside the button s border For picture buttons you must supply a separate bitmap for the focus state The focus rectangle may be included as part of the bitmap or can be drawn by QDS To have QDS draw the rectangle enter the number of pixels to ACASI 141 offset the focus rectangle from the outside edge of the button Enter 0 zero if you do not want QDS to draw the focus rectangle default 5 Key letter separator 00aaaeeea For interviews with keyboard input text buttons may include a letter code that can be keyed to select the button This key letter precedes the normal text for the button You may indicate here any text that you would like to insert between the key letter and button text The default is a right parenthesis Show Question Numbers For an automated interview it is generally unnecessary to display the question number associated with each question However if you prefer to show the question number on the screen check this box default is unchecked Bitmap Director Enter the directory path for the location of button bitmap files to be used as picture buttons for automated interviews QDS provides standard bitmaps for Yes No Male and Female buttons If you want to use only standard QDS buttons you can leave this as the defaul
12. New Prefix New Integer I Reset Question Number Integer 1 V Page break Text for Heading 3 In the Text for Heading box enter the section title Additional Section Header options are as follows Section Header Element Tab Reset Question Number Prefix Check this box to reset the question number prefix for Data Elements in this section Question number prefixes are alphanumeric strings no more than three characters in length Reset Question Number Integer Check this box to reset the question numbers for Data Elements in this section For example if you wanted to begin numbering again at 1 for the next Data Element enter 1 in the box Page break cccscscssssserssees Check this box to insert a page break in paper questionnaires This option has no effect on computer administered interviews Format Elements Format Elements allow you to insert a page break or reset question numbers without starting a new section Information Comment Section Header and Format Elements 79 To insert a new Format Element 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Choose Format and click OK 3 Select the appropriate options Page break siisii Check this box to insert a page break in paper questionnaires This option has no effect on computer administered interviews Reset Question Number Integer Check this box to reset the question numbers If checked the new question number should be entered
13. e This symbol indicates a reference to one of the sample files Getting Help There are several ways to access help in QDS As with most Windows applications help is available from the Help menu You may also obtain context sensitive What s This help for individual dialog items by right clicking directly on the item for which you want more information The QDS Web site http www novaresearch com includes FAQs Free e mail Technical Support is available at support novaresearch com Ci System Overview As the name says QDS is a Questionnaire Development System It is a complete system for developing administering and managing data collection activities QDS enables you to Produce all materials needed to administer a questionnaire or complete a form from a single set of easily developed and maintained specifications Using This Manual 3 Reuse field tested questions by copying specifications between questionnaires Manage your collected data including reconciling multiple versions Prepare your data with variable names and value labels for export to SPSS SAS MS Access or comma delimited csv ASCII formats QDS provides you with e Rapid development of questionnaires and data collection software data entry CAPI ACASI HAPI Multiple modes of administration from a single set of specifications with no additional specifications or programming including paper questionnaires Compute
14. NOVA Research Company was founded in 1986 and provides professional services in health research education and communications NOV A s business areas include Behavioral Research Studies Software Design Development and IT Support Data Coordination and Analysis Medical Scientific and Health Policy Writing and Editorial Services Health Education and Communication Services Conference and Meeting Planning and Logistics and Publications Support Services For more information about NOVA Research Company s programs and services please visit our Web site at http www novaresearch com or contact NOVA Research Company 4600 East West Highway Suite 700 Bethesda MD 20814 Tel 301 986 1891 Fax 301 986 4931 General Inquiries info novaresearch com Sales Inquiries sales novaresearch com Technical Support Inquiries support novaresearch com Peggy L Young President CEO Paul A Young Executive Vice President Research Director QDS is a registered trademark of NOVA Research Company for its proprietary computer software No material describing such software may be produced or distributed without written permission of NOVA Research Company QDS was developed with funding from the National Institutes of Health provided through Small Business Innovation Research Grants R43 DA10134 and R44 DA10134 Microsoft Word MS Access MS Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT and Windows XP are either trademarks o
15. Test Control File Does all question text fit Does all response text fit Does all Edit Element message text fit Does all information text fit Do all skips work as intended Do all Edit Elements work as intended Review Data Warehouse and Export Data Are correct variables being used for ID Do all automatic variables work as intended Are appropriate special code values being used Appendix G 285 APPEND XG SAMPLE LE Design Studio Files Age QDS Automated Subject ID QDS Automatic Variable Calculations QDS DB Value QDS Displaying Values en Qx RTF Displaying Values QDS Exercise Example QDS First Questionnaire Example en Script RTF First Questionnaire Example History RTF First Questionnaire Example QDS Lookup sample MDB Marker QDS NEXTCAT Example QDS Sample Table1 Codebook RTF Sample Table1 EN Qx RTF Sample Table1 with NEXTCAT Marker QDS Sample Table1 QDS Skip example QDS String Calculation Dates Example QDS Application Files First Questionnaire Example Codebook RTF First Questionnaire Example DE A01 LOG First Questionnaire Example DE A01 QPD First Questionnaire Example DE A02 QPD First Questionnaire Example DE B01 QPD First Questionnaire Example DE QDE First Questionnaire Example En ACASI QAD First Questionnaire Example En ACASI QSI First Questionnaire Example En CAPI LOG First Questionnaire Example En CAPI QAD First Questionnaire Example En CAPI QPI First Questionnaire Example En
16. Toolbar _ Displays the Help screen From the opening screen you can get step by step instructions for using the QDE program and various types of reference information Once you open Help you can click the Contents button when you want to return to the opening screen Displays the copyright notice and version number of your copy of the QDE program The Data Entry Module 97 Entering Data Entering Coded Items Sometimes data entry staff will be able to key directly from the form into the data entry screen For example Male ib Female In the example above it is clear that 2 is the code to be entered However occasionally a form may be designed such that the numeric codes are not included Male In these cases it may be necessary to look up the appropriate numeric code for the circled or checked response To view and or select response codes for coded Response Types Gender Pick one Check all that apply Yes No Rating Scale Response Card 1 Select CodelShow List The Codes window can also be accessed via the Code List toolbar button me Predefined Function Key See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 2 The Codes dialog box will appear and display the numeric values associated with each response for the current data item For example for a GENDER element you might see 2 Female 3 To enter from the Code Value list and return to data entry click on the appropriate code 4 To return to
17. Use markers when skipping larger sections Use markers if you anticipate adding deleting items in the skipped section SEENEN Marker Elements Markers may be used as destination points for branching skip and edit instructions To add a Marker Element 60 QDS Questionnaire Development System 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Marker Marker MNAME Description Enter an optional description here e g End of Demographic Section 2 In the Marker box enter the marker name Marker names must be unique within the questionnaire and must follow QDS variable naming conventions 3 Enter a description in the Description box optional 4 Click OK The file Marker QDS gives an example of the use of a marker Skip Elements Skips that require multiple variables or a complex calculation cannot be implemented using a simple branching instruction In these cases you can use a Skip Element Skip Element Notes To add a Skip Element D I 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Skip Element E 2 In the If text box enter DEE Filling with the expression to be Skip 1 element zl R CHEN S Se Standard Skip Code arker 3 From the Branch to box az Altemate Skip Code select the destination for the skip Oe Skip 1 to 5 M Replace entered values with skip code elements or Skip toa IT Branch if condition evaluates to maybe Marker 4 If you selected Skip to a Marker enter its name in the
18. ACASI on page 137 2 Click Options Go to the Audio tab to refine audio settings p 4 Select the appropriate folder from the Directory for Audio Files drop down box When preparing to administer your ACASI with recorded human voices it is important to remember that in addition to installing the ACASI module and copying the control file s to the data collection station you must copy all WAV files Note These files must reside in the same path directory on the collection stations as that specified in the Audio Build Options Recording WAV Files The actual creation of audio WAV files must be done outside of QDS You can use any sound card or software package that will create a WAN sound wave file Most computers that come with sound cards installed will also come with a sound recording utility For instance if you have a Sound Blaster card you probably also received Creative Labs WaveStudio software for making or ACASI 149 editing audio files You should refer to the documentation that came with your software for instructions on how to create and record WAV files Audio files may be saved in 8 bit or 16 bit formats and various sampling rates are available For voice recordings 8 bit files with low sampling rates are generally adequate If you are unhappy with the sound quality you may want to experiment with other options that produce larger audio files EE Conducting an AC AG Interview To launch
19. Current Version 1 Started 07 12 01 14 15 40 Ended 07712701 14 16 14 Site 1 Subject 1 Other IDs Baseline Status Complete Added to warehouse 07 26 01 14 51 39 Latest data change Shipped from warehouse Deleted from warehouse The Warehouse Manager 159 Going to the Variables tab will show you the variable name question number and variable label and type as well as the data value for each variable in that specific case Interview Details Read Only X Variable Question Variable Label Variable Type Value TODAY Calculated Interview Data Entry Date Automatic Date 07 12 2001 SUBJECT Q1 Subject ID Numeric 1 SITE 02 Site Numeric 1 VISIT Q3 Visit Code Numeric Baseline GENDER Q04 Respondent s Gender Numeric Female DOB Q5 Date of Birth Date 03 03 1965 RACE QG Respondent s Race Numeric White Cauca JOB O Currently have a job Numeric No FULLTIME 08 Works full time 40 hours or Numeric Skipped EARLY Qg like to get up early inthe m Numeric Strongly Agre EXERC 010 try and exercise at least twi Numeric Somewhat Ac DIET 011 try to stick to a healthy diet Numeric Somewhat Ac FRUIT 012 Fruits eaten during past week Check List 110100 SERVING 013 How many servings of fruit a Numeric 2 DOBY Q5Y Year Date of Birth Numeric 1965 DOBM Q5M Month Date of Birth Numeric 3 DOBD Q5D Day Date of Birth Numeric 3 FRUITA 0124 Apples Fruits eaten during Numeric 1 FRUITS 0128 Bananas Fruits eaten durin
20. DECtalk release Although all five versions are included with every licensed purchase of the QDS ACASI Module the default installation installs only the US English ACASI program QSLexe To install the ACASI module for languages other than US English 1 Insert the QDS installation CD Select Custom Installation Select ACASI Multiple Version Select Change St Ee a e Select the language s you would like to install You may deselect US English since it should already be installed This will not uninstall the US English ACASI program it merely prevents it from being reinstalled 6 Select OK 7 Continue with installation Because each language specific text to speech engine is associated with its own copy of the ACASI Module it is important to ensure that the correct program is utilized when starting an interview Audio Files If you plan to record human voices you will need a separate set of audio files for each language QDS requires that you use the same audio file names for each language but store each set in a separate folder By default QDS assumes that you will name each language folder with the same two letter language indicator used by Windows EN for English FR for French etc but you can use other names if you like For example C OD C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio Audios En H Admin C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio Audios Sp C Data Studio L Audios Si En Sp 252 QDS Ques
21. Data keyed from paper form using DE at Site 1 with Batch Code 101 First Questionnaire Site 1 3 QAD Data collected with CAPI at Site 1 visit 3 Note that we renamed the QAD files following data collection so that they would have unique names in this case the names reflect the site and data collection time instance After the cases were transferred to the local warehouse their status changed from Complete to Transferred The data collected in CAPI formats were designated as Version 1 and data collected in Paper Data Entry format were designated as Version 2 The Warehouse Manager assigns version numbers based on the order in which cases are added to the warehouse Because it was the first version added to the warehouse Version 1 was automatically designated as the standard version We then reconciled and converted Version 2 to the standard version Version 1 Because the only difference between versions was the mode of data collection Oe the specifications file was not changed between building the CAPI and the DE control files the versions were reconciled without any prompts See Working With Multiple Versions on page 171 Next we created a new shipment file First Questionnaire Site 1 QTD and selected all cases in our local warehouse First Questionnaire Site 1 QDW for shipment As we transferred our local warehouse cases for shipping their status changed from Complete to Shipped in First Questionnaire Site 1 QD
22. Go to ViewlVersions highlight Version 2 click Details and select the Variables tab It contains the data after they were reconciled and converted to the standard version Version 2 We chose to keep the LINE variable so the final variables are as follows Transportation Study Form Reconciled Variable Label Variable Name Subject SUBJECT Do you take the subway SUBWAY Do you own a Car OWNCAR Do you ever carpool CARPOOL Do you have to pay to park PARK What line do you ride LINE Reviewing Reconciliation Rules To view and print details about your reconciliation select ViewlVersions to open the Questionnaire Versions dialog box Next highlight a version that has been reconciled These are marked with a blue arrow gt to the left of the version number in the list box Version Dated Administration pH 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 OEL 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 Select Details to open the Version Details property sheet Select the Variables tab to view and print a list of variables and their conversion mapping In our example you would view the following for Version 1 Version Details Version Variables Variable Maps To Conversion SUBJECT SUBJECT Identical METRO SUBWAY Name Change LINE LINE Recode Needed CAR OWNCAR Name Change CARPOOL CARPOOL Identical 178 QDS Questionnaire Development System Changing Reconciliation Rules If you would like to change a
23. However if you select the Allow Missing Value for all Non ID Fields Build option you will be allowed to enter a missing value for any item that is not an identifier variable To enter a missing value code select CodelMissing click the Missing toolbar button J or enter a period into the data field The CodelMissing command and button will be enabled only if missing values are allowed A period will be written to the data file for all missing data items Entering Interviewer Comments While entering data you may enter comments for any item by going to CodelComments and entering explanatory text into the Interviewer Comments dialog box Your comments may be exported to a text file from the QDS Warehouse Manager Module to aid in data management Continuing Data Entry in an Existing Batch File You may take a break from data entry and resume in the same batch at any time The data entry application will continually save your work as you go along i e each item is written to the data file as it is entered there is no Save command You may exit the data entry application at any time by selecting FilelExit To continue data entry after a break go to the Data Entry Open dialog box see Opening a Data Entry Application on page 93 The Data Entry Module 99 1 Select the correct folder from the Look in drop down box Select QDS Paper Interview Data Files QPD from the Files of type drop down box Select the QP
24. Note If you do not assign a Batch Code all forms keyed using a single QDS control file will be assigned the same file name Forms keyed on the same machine will be appended to the end of the existing data file il Data Entry Menu Commands File Menu Open Ctrl O Close Print Ctrl P Print Preview Print Setup Exit OP Mincing ennai Use this command to open a new or existing batch of interviews for a specified Data Entry Control File If you open a Paper Interview Data QPD file the corresponding Control File will be opened If you open a Data Entry Control QDE file make sure you indicate the Batch Name for the data file you want If you leave the Batch Name blank a file with a blank Batch Name will be opened or created Shortcut keys Ctrl O Egeter Use this command to close the active data and control files and exit the program Any changes you have made to the data will be saved automatically The Data Entry Module 95 PING anann Use this command to print the list of interviews in the current data file This command presents a Print dialog box in which you may specify the range of pages to be printed the number of copies the destination printer and other printer setup options Shortcut keys Ctrl P Print Preview Use this command to display a list of interviews in the current batch as it would appear when printed When you choose this command the main window will be replaced with a Print Prev
25. Numeric 1 pi m Double clicking on a variable row will open up the detail box for that variable however the data is read only Modifying Data To modify data from within either the source file or the local warehouse go to EditlDetails or you can use the following Keyboard shortcut Ctrl T or Toolbar shortcut To modify a data field 1 Select the Variables tab 2 Double click on the variable to be updated 3 In the resulting window change the numeric code and display value by entering a new numeric value or numeric code in the box labeled Numeric Code entering a new text string in the box labeled Display Value or checking Don t Know Refused to Answer or Not Applicable 4 Click OK 160 QDS Questionnaire Development System Modifying Component Variable Data Component variables are those whose data were entered as two or more separate values which are contained in the subcomponent variables These include data elements with the following response types DEN Month day year Time Of Day sssssssseunssennnennnnsennnnnnn Hours minutes seconds Time Sp n wis seesesscsececccccessizetcsascnees Seconds minutes hours days weeks months years Check Each cccssccssessseeeseenseee Two or more individual check items You cannot modify the main component variable but will need to change the value of the subcomponents Select each subcomponent part that needs updating and follow the sam
26. Renaming CAPI Output Data Files OAI 118 Handheld Assisted Personal Interviews HAPI cccccssssssseeeees 121 Building a HAPI Control File cccsccsseeeeseeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeescaesaseeeenseeesseaeseseeeenseeeees 121 HAPI Te Re e EE 121 Operations Tab DEE 122 Appoarance EE 122 Date mime BEE 123 S mmary Reports Tab isgesccccncisecccdessocesilegsaceccteeseandegeheded des cnaasneteacevdssesautevdeanenevieecees 123 Conducting HAPI InterviewS s ccccsccssseeeeeeceeeeeeesceeeseeeeeeneeeseaeseseeeeeeeeeseeseseaeenseeeees 123 Pocket PC Running Programs ccccccccsceeeececeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseaaeseeeeeseeeeseaaeeeenees 124 Entering Interview Responses in HAP c cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeenneeneeenees 125 Yes No Gender Pick One Hesponses rnnt nnnnnr nn nnnn nnn 126 Check All That Apply Hesponses cee eeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeneeee 126 Rating Scale RESPONSES aissein erain a ae aaaea aaia aaa aaa AE AARAA aiaia aaia 127 Date and Time of Day RESPONSES cccceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeceeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeenaeeesaaeeeenees 127 Open Text Numeric and Time Span cccccccsscccesessececseseeeeseneeesessseeeeseseeeeseaes 128 Entering Special Code Responses in HAPI sccsseceeseeeseesesneeenseeeeeseeseseeeenseeeees 128 Navigating the Questionnaire cctcceseeeenee eects sence eneeeeeeeeeeseaesesneeenseeeeseaeseneenenseeeees 128 Moving to the Next Oues
27. Select OK to save Cancel More About Password Protection Password protection impacts every module in QDS Its purpose is to enhance the privacy of data collected using QDS by preventing unauthorized users from reading exporting or modifying data When using password protection you will be able to define two passwords for a given questionnaire a read password and an optional modify password Important Notes on Passwords You will be able to modify passwords over time Every time you rebuild a control file you will be able to change one or both passwords In order to modify or remove an existing password you must re enter the appropriate password e Passwords will be case sensitive and will allow letters numbers and symbols The length of a password will range from 7 to 127 characters Passwords will be stored in the QDS specifications file interview control files and data files in an encrypted format The plain text of each password will not be stored in QDS It will be up to the user to remember his or her password and to keep it secret If a read password is somehow lost all the data that are protected by that password will be essentially lost The QDS Data to ASCI utility program QDA exe will not be able to generate any text output from a data file unless the user supplies the appropriate read password Inthe Warehouse Manger version data that are encrypted can be added to the same warehouse co
28. Site 1 time 1 First Questionnaire Site 1 2 QAD CAPI Data Site 1 time 2 First Questionnaire v2 DE 101 QPD Data Entry Data Site 1 Batch 101 Note After data collection the QAD files were renamed so that they would have unique file names In this case the names reflect the site and visit First Questionnaire QDW includes the cases from the QAD files and the QPD file In the source data files the Status field reads Transferred indicating that they have been transferred to a warehouse file In the local warehouse the Date In field reads 07 26 01 for the date on which the cases were transferred Deleting Cases From within the Warehouse Manager you can delete cases from both warehouse and data files Select the case to be deleted and go to EditIDelete you may also use the Delete button from the toolbar To select a group of cases to be deleted click on the first case in the group then hold the Shift key down while clicking on the last case in the group If you have enabled modify password protection in the Design Studio you will be asked to supply the password before the record will be deleted The status of each deleted case will be Deleted X It is important to understand that at this point the record has only been marked for deletion not actually deleted you can still view or undelete the case To undelete a case highlight the record s and select EditiUndelete Records marked for deletion can be retained
29. interviews el TEE Used to administer interviews on a Pocket PC device The HAPI program includes all features available in CAPI and is fully integrated into the QDS system Using Microsoft ActiveSync QDS users can install the HAPI program on their Pocket PCs and move HAPI control and data files back and forth between the desktop and handheld devices ACAS I oss sccccesccccceescievescsatsvesccessvecess Used to administer record data for Audio assisted Computer Assisted Self Interviews computer administered interviews with or without audio audio and one without QDS uses the ACASI module to conduct both methods thus the term ACASI will be used throughout this manual to refer to both ACASI and CASI data collection Although ACASI and CASI are separate methods of data collection one with The Data Collection modules create data files in a binary file format that may be converted to a flat ASCII file using the Questionnaire Data to ASCII conversion utility QDA EXE or exported to SAS SPSS or MS Access using the QDS Warehouse Manager Using This Manual 5 Warehouse Manager Module Once data are collected recorded using one or more of the Data Collection modules you may import the data into the Warehouse Manager for data management and export of data for analysis The Warehouse Manager allows you to track the status of collected data and for multisite studies whether each completed questionnaire has been shipped to an
30. or HAPI on a Pocket PC or a self administered instrument ACASI For our short questionnaire we will create an interviewer administered CAPI application ACASI interviews work in much the same way with additional features for self interviews and audio To build the control file go to BuildICAPI Application The Automated Interview Control File box will open Automated Interview Control File Lal Save in O Research Folder si cx ES File name survey En CAPI QPI Save as type Automated Interview Control File SS Cancel Options A default file name will be in the File name box which for our questionnaire is Survey 1 En CAPI QPI QDS File Name En CAPI QPI For the automated interview types QDS gives default names CAPI Sample QDS produces Sample En CAPI QPI HAPI Sample QDS produces Sample En HAPI QPP ACASI Sample QDS produces Sample En ACASI QSI Getting Started 17 Next select the Save button and QDS will ask Would you like to try out your control file now This is a good time to test our interview so we select Yes Our QDS interview opens to the first question which is Subject number Entering Responses You can enter item responses using your keypad mouse or touchscreen The main responses yes no numeric keypad pick one responses will be presented as buttons in the middle part of your screen You will also s
31. skip to a specified marker if no items are checked See Skips and Markers on page 59 To require at least one category select Disallow When the response for your Data Element is a Date you will use this Response Type Key options to review and possibly modify on the Response Set tab include Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Components Format for year H 4 digits C Current Year C Year amp Month Only C 2digits 19 C Fixed at C Year Only C 2 digits 20 a E Allow Don t Know Wear 2097 Earliest date allowed 2098 M Allow Refused Latest date allowed HR Allow Not Applicable Year 2099 F Allow Missing Day Day is Today s Date F Allow Missing Month Month i I Use keypad for ACASI Components aeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae ee Select Full Date to include the year month and day default setting Other options are Year amp Monthly Only and Year Only All Date Elements must include at least the year Data Elements 45 Format for year cere Special Codes aannaaenaaaeee e Allow Missing Day Allow Missing Month Earliest date allowed Latest date allowed Use keypad for ACASI Note If you choose to use a each data component on a single screen Example of Spin Controls Select the appropriate format for entering the year portion of
32. the date 4 digits 2 digits 19 2 digits 20 Current Year or Fixed at If you select Fixed at enter the fixed year in this box The QDS default is a 4 year date Indicate whether Don t Know Refused and or Not Applicable are allowable responses for this item The default setting is not checked Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with an incomplete date that is missing the day of the month In the box to the right enter the day value to be substituted This should be an allowable value 1 28 for all months so that the full date will be valid for analysis Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with an incomplete date that is missing the month In the box to the right enter the month value to be substituted This should be an allowable value 1 12 so that the full date will be valid for analysis Enter the earliest allowable date to be used as the default for date elements To see the format in which to enter this date press the Today s Date button and imitate the style You may leave this field blank for no minimum date or enter CURRENT to make the earliest allowable date the date of the interview Enter the latest allowable date to be used as the default for date elements To see the format in which to enter this date press the Today s Date button and imitate the style You may leave this field blank for no maximum date or enter CURRENT to make the latest allowable date the date
33. you must also enter an expression in the appropriate enabled box 238 QDS Questionnaire Development System The result of the expression will be stored as the value for the automatic variable For example Variable Name Type of data to be stored SUM Numeric Calculation x Variable Label Missing Code sum of 2 2 F Character String Numeric Calculation String Expression 2 2 P H This example creates a numeric variable called SUM that would have the value 4 written out to the data set Automatic variables are most often used to calculate values based on responses to previous questions For instance the following example shows how to calculate the total number of siblings based on responses to questions regarding the number of brothers BROTHER and sisters SISTER Variable Name Type of data to be stored Iw sp Numeric Calculation Variable Label Missing Code Total number of siblings H Character String prese ooo oO Numeric Calculation String Expression BROTHERS SISTERS You can also use any of the built in QDS functions and expressions detailed in Appendix A to define automatic variables Character String To create a character string automatic variable 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Select Automatic Variable Element and click OK 3 Enter a variable name in the Variable Name box 4 Enter a variable label in the Variable Label box Automatic Variables 239 Select Character Strin
34. Applicability Interview Method Applicability may also be based on the Interview Method By default all elements are applicable for all interview types Uncheck the boxes for method s for which the Data Element does not apply Styles Tab The Styles tab controls positioning and layout styles for printed questionnaires These settings do not apply to the screen layout for Data Entry CAPI or ACASI Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Position response set to right of question x Record a response by writing the value M Display list of values Display value list vertically bd Position value labels fto rightofvalues l Position branch instruction fto rightofresponsese H For written values use underscores zl Indentthis data element defaut sl 56 QDS Questionnaire Development System The following options may be changed Position Response Gei Indicate if the Response Set will be positioned to right of question default or below question Record a response by Indicate whether responses will be recorded by circling a value default writing the value or circling a label Include Special Codes in list Indicate whether the Special Codes should be included in the response list default is checked Display value list 000 Indicate whether the value list will be displayed vertically default or horiz
35. B C Z Add a number to the end of the variable name 1 2 3 0 The variable name is 7 characters drop the 7 character add a 1 to the end and continue until a unique name is found Add a letter to the end of the variable name A B C Z Add a number to the end of the variable name 1 2 3 0 If the variable name ends with a character First attempt to add a number to the end of the variable name Start with 1 and continue with 2 3 4 0 until a unique name is found If no unique name is found try adding a letter to the end of the variable name Start with A and continue through the alphabet until a unique name is found If there is no unique name and The variable name is less than 7 characters add a zero to the end and continue until a unique name is found Add a number to the end of the variable name 1 2 3 0 Add a letter to the end of the variable name A B C Z The variable name is 7 characters drop the 7 character add a 1 to the end and continue until a unique name is found Add a number to the end of the variable name 1 2 3 0 Add a letter to the end of the variable name A B C Z Working With Multiple Versions 175 Variable Names are one of the primary tools used by QDS for reconciling versions this is yet another reason it is strongly recommended that you assign variable names rather than use QDS default auto naming for final forms Reconciling To begin the reconciliation
36. B QDS Error MeSSages eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 259 Appendix C QDS File Extensions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 275 lU 275 Other Files Produced Used by QDS sccseseceseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeeeeesesnaeenseeeeeeneess 276 Appendix D Creating Bitmap Files cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 277 How to Create Your Own Bitmap Files ccssscesseeeeeseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeenseeeeeeneess 278 Picture Button Variations cccccccccessseeceessneeecesscneeeeesseeeessaeeeeesseeeessssaeeeensseeeenss 279 Picture Button Folders ccccccecsscecessneceeeeseneeeeeseeeeceseaeeeessaeeeeeseaeeeessseeeenssneeeenss 279 Appendix E Questionnaire Data to ASCII Utility cece 281 Appendix F Testing CHECKIISE wcccccccicccscsiicsncecsescesmecceneccerereerccnencnnne 283 Review Codebook me isreridrrnnriirnieeni ienee nanni ten Aa EEN EENE ENEAN NEENA ETEEN NA TEENE EAEEREN 283 Review Questionnaire eeceecececenceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeecesaeeeeesaaeeeessaeeeessiaeeeessneeeenss 283 Test Control File csc aed Aiieicna catia aindesationaadia eebe es 283 Revia w Dale norii ne inen EEA EATE EE A E 283 Appendix G Sample File secisiiciccisicessncrscersieernchrsvarnenssvernvnrivarieasiivarsebeansnus 285 Design Studio FileS cccssecceeseceseeeenseeeeneeeessaeseseeeenseeeeeeeeesaeseeseeeeeeeaessaesaseaeeeseaeeeenenas 285 Application a UE 285 Ware
37. Description QDW Data warehouse contains warehoused data and reconciliation rules QSR Data receipt file used to confirm receipt of data e g confirmation that a central coordinating location has received data from a field site QTD Data shipment file used to transport data from one warehouse to another e g a field site submitting its data to a central coordinating location QVR Reconciliation file used to export reconciliation rules from one warehouse to another e g a central coordinating location sends standardized rules to all study sites Warehouse Manager Basics Once you have begun data collection you can begin processing data within the Warehouse Manager Opening the Warehouse Manager You can open the Warehouse Manager Module QWM EXE either of the following ways From the Windows Start menu select Programs Questionnaire Development System 2 4 Warehouse Manager e Double click on the Warehouse Manager icon QDW exe in the data folder in your QDS directory typically C Program Files QDS 2 4 Data Creating a New Warehouse To create a new warehouse 1 Select FileINew Warehouse 2 Enter the name for the new warehouse file e g the name of the corresponding control file QDS will add the QDW extension to create the complete warehouse file name For example if you entered My Questionnaire the complete warehouse file name will be My Questionnaire ODW 3 Click Open This will create a ne
38. Development System Spin Control Responses E irvine EOE AEE EEEE Dates Times Time Spans Se Date Time of Day and Time Kon span responses utilize Spin Controls for inputting P ail 3 EIE responses in the CAPI environment Not Month lt lt lt gt gt gt Applicable Each response component has a separate input box with ierg Day el lt gt gt selection buttons to the left and right gt Use the lt lt lt gt and gt gt buttons to scroll through the allowed range for each component The lt and gt buttons scroll though values one at a time down or up respectively The lt lt and gt gt buttons move through the allowable range in larger intervals Numeric values can also be entered directly from the keyboard using the mouse or Tab key to navigate from box to box For months key the corresponding number for the month e g 4 for April and not the name of the month Sometimes you will be required to enter a response for each component other times you can leave blanks This is determined by the settings on the specification file Response Set tab If a special response such as Don t Know is permitted it applies to the entire question That is you can respond Don t Know to the whole question but not to individual components The same applies to Refuse to Answer and Not Applicable Currency Number A Keypa
39. Features to Explore sccssecseseesseeeeseeeeeeeeesceseneeeeeseeeesneeesaeeeeneeeesseeseseaeenseeeenees 20 MUNRVOY e Lu BEE 20 luet ole ER 20 Data Management EE 20 Designing Your Questionnaire The Design Studio Module 21 Opening the Design Studio ecccsecseseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeeaeeeseaeseseeeeeeeeseseaeenseeeeees 21 Via Start ET 21 VE HS EE 21 Creating a Questionnaire ccceeeeetee sees eeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeneeeeneeeeeeaeeeseaeseseeeeeeeesesnaeenseeeeees 22 ii QDS Questionnaire Development System Opening a Preexisting Specifications File 22 Saving a Specifications File 23 Setting Preliminary Information ccceeceeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeneeeeeseeeseseaesnseeeeeeeees 23 Questionnaire Properties ceccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaeesaeesaeseaesnaeeeeesiaeenaees 23 Interview ele te NEE 24 Study Configuration TAD EE 24 Identifier TEE 25 Securty TaD DE 26 Understanding Element s cccsscccsseeeseeeeeeeeeesneeensneeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeaseeeeseeseseaesaseeeeneeeeneas 27 Inserting New EleMent ccscccseeceesceseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeneeeseaeeenseeeeeaeseseaesaseeeeeeeeeseeaeeneeeenees 28 Copying Moving and Deleting Elements sssccseeceeseesseeseseeeeneeeesseeeseseeeeneeeenees 29 Copying and Moving Elements 29 Selten EE 29 Deleting SEI 29 Locating Elements Find And GO To 29 Copying Elements Between QDS Specifications Files a
40. H HAPI v Save curent interview before launching new file 66 QDS Questionnaire Development System 3 Enter the message you would like to display before the second questionnaire begins we have entered a message to indicate we are proceeding to the Exercise survey If no message is desired check the Perform without message box 4 In the Reconciliation box select Launch another control file 5 Enter the name of your second questionnaire without directory or file extension in the Control file name for box under CAPI ACASI or HAPI see example above This second control file must be located in the same directory as the primary control file Do NOT enter the directory or file extension with the control file name QDS will not be able to find the destination file and you will receive an error message 6 If desired enter the name of the additional nonidentifier variable you would like shared with the second questionnaire GENDER in the above screen 7 Select the Save current interview before launching file option box to force an automatic save without seeing the save prompt 8 Select OK to save your Edit Element Shared Variables When you launch the second questionnaire the identifier variables of the current interview are automatically copied to the destination questionnaire An optional shared variable is also copied if it was specifed in the Shared Variable box on the Edit Element tab Identifier
41. ID box Information entered on the Study Configuration tab will be used by QDS to assist you in entering appropriate variables on the Identifier Variables tab For instance in the simplest situation when a single interview will be done at a single site by a single interviewer only one variable is required to uniquely identify each record The variable name for this identifier variable should be entered in the Subject ID box 26 QDS Questionnaire Development System Interview Options Study Configuration Identifier Variables Applicability Security Site ID Variable Interviewer ID Subject ID Subject Gender SUBJECT Additional ID variables needed to uniquely identify an interview Start Date Variable Start Time Variable End Date Variable End Time Variable Cancel pt l If Multiple interviews with the same subject are planned was checked on the Study Configuration tab the Additional ID Variables box is enabled Here you should enter the variable name for other variable s that along with Subject ID will uniquely identify a single interview Often this is an interview date or visit type code e g enrollment 3 month 6 month You can update these settings at any time However it is a good idea to review and confirm these settings prior to finalizing your instrument and beginning data collection Security Tab As of version QDS v2 4 you have the ability to encrypt response data and pas
42. Ife EXER amp C 0 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Skip Instruction 2 Enter the appropriate skip condition remember that the variable names for Table Elements must Branch to include the amp C substitution token Marker x 3 Select Marker in the Branch to box Marker 4 Enter NEXTCAT in the Marker box NEXTCAT The sample file NEXTCAT Example QDS illustrates the use of the NEXTCAT marker This table includes a series of questions about different types of exercises running or jogging cycling aerobics weightlifting any other exercise If respondents indicate that they do not partake in a specific type of exercise the remaining questions for that category will be skipped Automatic Variables 237 AUTOMATIC VARIABLES Automatic variable elements are used to calculate a value to be stored in your data file For example an automatic variable can use the system date time to store the current date and time in your data file automatically i e without manual entry This saves time and ensures accuracy as long as the system date is correct There are several types of calculated values Today s Date cccssssssseeeeteeees Date record was recorded i e interview date for CAPI ACASI data entry date for DE Current Time ccccceseeeseseeeeeeeneeenees Time record was recorded i e interview time for CAPI ACASI time of data entry for DE Elapsed Time cccccssseeessseeeesesees Number of seconds s
43. Local Site Level Data Coordinating Center Data Files QAD QPD QDW QDW Local Shipment Files Central Warehouse QTD Warehouse 7 Receipt Files QSR Export Data Export Data SAS SPSS Access SAS SPSS Access Site Level Data Coordinating Center Collect data Add data to warehouse Create shipment files Send shipment files to coordinating center Receive shipment files Add shipment files to warehouse Generate receipt files Send receipt files to sites Post receipt files Continue adding shipping data as needed Export data from warehouse for analysis as needed 182 QDS Questionnaire Development System Shipping Data When you are ready to send data from a local site to your coordinating center you will start by creating an interview shipment file 1 Select FilelOpen Warehouse to open the local warehouse containing the data to be shipped 2 Select FilelNew Shipment to create the shipment file 3 Enter the file name for the shipment file in the File Name box It will have the extension QTD 4 Click Open 5 Select WindowlITile Horizontally to view the local warehouse and shipment window at the same time 6 Select the Local Warehouse window and highlight the interviews to be shipped You may also select EditlSelect All to select all interviews 7 Select EditlShip from Warehouse 8 You will see these interviews in the Interviews to Ship
44. Name Suffix for this checklist item is A then the corresponding variable will be FRUITA Note that QDS suggests a unique suffix to be assigned to each check 44 QDS Questionnaire Development System Audio File c anaana Description ce eeeeeeeeeee Button Text item but you may change the suggested suffix to any single letter Name of associated Audio File optional Note Do not enter WAV file extension See Using Audio on page 145 Variable label will be exported to SPSS SAS and Access This information will also be used to identify the variable in the Design Studio list view and will be included in the Codebook Text to be displayed on response buttons for an automated interview optional If left blank the Description will be used Click OK when you have completed these options Continue adding Check Each items until your list is complete You may revise and add to this list at any time For Nominal Check Each Response Types you may also want to specify Value if not checked Special Code In none checked branch to Response Set Tab Date Modify the code values in the Value if checked default 1 and Value if not checked default 0 boxes Indicate whether Don t Know Refused and or Not Applicable are allowable responses for this item The default setting is not checked Specify a branching option to skip one or more elements or
45. OR NOT YES amp YES evaluates to YES YES amp NO evaluates to NO YES amp MAYBE evaluates to MAYBE NO amp YES evaluates to NO NO amp NO evaluates to NO NO amp MAYBE evaluates to NO MAYBE amp YES evaluates to MAYBE MAYBE amp NO evaluates to NO MAYBE amp MAYBE evaluates to MAYBE YES YES evaluates to YES YES NO evaluates to YES YES MAYBE evaluates to YES NO YES evaluates to YES NO NO evaluates to NO NO MAYBE evaluates to MAYBE MAYBE YES evaluates to YES MAYBE NO evaluates to MAYBE MAYBE MAYBE evaluates to MAYBE YES evaluates to NO NO evaluates to YES MAYBE evaluates to MAYBE 254 QDS Questionnaire Development System Mathematical and Relational Operators In conditional expressions or calculations you can use any combination of values and the following mathematical and relational operators Operator Description Addition e Subtraction S Multiplication Division Equal to lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to lt gt Not equal to QDS Functions Logic Functions IF Expr Num1 Num2 Num3 Numeric Expression or String Expression determined by type of field to be returned Evaluates a logical expression and returns one value if the expression is TRUE Num ll another if the expression is FALSE Num2 and optionally a third value if the expression evaluates to MAYBE If the third valu
46. Tab key after every field By default this box is checked Prompts before saving data for each interview If not checked default setting all interview data will be saved automatically Note This feature does not work data are always saved automatically Displays a message whenever a verification error occurs By default this box is not checked Allows the data entry operator to enter a missing value code for any field that is not part of the unique identifier If this item is unchecked the operator must enter a valid response for every field By default this box is not checked Replaces previously entered values with a skip code if a response is changed triggering a new skip pattern When a response is changed it can affect subsequent branching paths and may cause previously answered items to be skipped Check this box if you would like those values to be replaced by a skip code Leave this box unchecked to retain previous values The default setting replaces previously entered values This setting will be overridden by settings on individual Skip Elements Assigns function keys to enter responses of Don t Know Refused Not Applicable display the list of available codes and check a value for a check all item Select None if no key is assigned The Data Entry Module 93 DOS Tab These options are not operational this tab will be removed in future releases Operations Tab These options are not operational this
47. WITH PAPER AND PENCIL FORMS USING THE DATA ENTRY MODULE The QDS Data Entry Module is used to perform data entry for forms initially completed using paper and pencil whether self or interviewer administered Building a Data Entry Control File To enter data collected using paper forms you must first build a Data Entry Control File The control file translates information from your specification file into a file that can be used by the Data Entry Module to create a data entry interface for your form To build a Data Entry Control File 1 Select Build Data Entry Application from the Design Studio menu 2 In the Save In drop down box select the folder where you want your file saved The default is the folder where the specification file resides 3 In the File Name box enter the file name for the Data Entry Control File The default is the name of the specification file plus DE QDE 4 Click the Options button to refine settings for your data entry application See Data Entry Build Options below for details 5 Click Save 6 You will then be prompted The requested product has been built Would you like to try out the control file now Click No to return to the Design Studio the control file will still be created Click Yes to test the data entry application QDS will launch the QDS Data Entry Module and open the newly created control file See Entering Data on page 97 Data Entry Build Options Although def
48. a SAS format library program that can be read by either SAS Version 6 12 or 8 1 Select FilelExport Interviews 2 Select SAS Format Library Program XPT from the Save as type drop down box 3 Change the name in the File Name dialog box to indicate that this XPT file is the format library to prevent writing over an existing XPT file 4 Click Save 5 You will immediately see a second Save As dialog box with the selection SAS Format Index Files SAS in the Save as type drop down box 6 Click Save A dialog box will tell you how many records were exported to the specified SAS transport file Gender Check Each Pick One Response Card Set and Special Code Value Labels that were defined in the QDS Design Studio The XPT file can be viewed using the SAS System Viewer The transport file is organized by streaming header records followed by data records As such the format library is a SAS transport data set just like the FirstQ xpt data set It must be converted to a SAS format catalog from SAS The transport or XPT file contains each unique combination of Yes No Converting SAS Transport File to SAS Format Catalog To load data to the format library from the transport file into SAS 1 Execute the XPT formats file by double clicking on the XPT file in Windows Explorer 2 SAS will start and read in the format library 3 Run the appropriate code to write out the data set to your SAS library The following example
49. and high values as well as several other options Low and High Anchots Enter descriptive text labels for the lowest and highest scale points You must use a response card to label interim scale points see Response Cards on page 241 Low Value eneen Enter the numeric value for the lowest scale point This point corresponds to the Low Anchor The value may be positive negative or zero Number of Scale Points Enter the number of points on your scale For example if you want your scale to go from 1 to 10 with possible responses at 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 enter 10 Special Codes A Indicate which Special Codes Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable are allowed by checking the appropriate box es Indicate the value to be used for each Special Code in the box to the right There are several options that will affect how your scale is displayed for automated interviews only These include Vertical ecale For an automated interview the scale can be drawn on the screen in a horizontal or a vertical orientation Check this box to have the scale drawn vertically on an automated interview screen For a paper questionnaire the scale is always horizontal Require OK Check this box to require the respondent to hit Next Question before moving to the next question If this box is not selected 52 QDS Questionnaire Development System QDS automatically will go on to the next question as
50. are using multiple interviewing languages you may want to create different pictures for each language To make it easier for you to maintain and reference these language variations QDS assumes that you keep the bitmap files for each language in a separate folder but use the same file names independent of language For example the Yes bitmap files for both English and French would have the same file names but be stored in separate folders You may also want to vary the pictures slightly for interviewer administered vs self administered automated interviews An interviewer will generally work from a keyboard and will want to be able to press a key e g Y for Yes to enter a response as well as being able to use the mouse For a self administered interview you may want to remove the keyboard and allow only mouse click responses By convention buttons generally have a letter underlined to indicate the corresponding key response Since you may want picture buttons with or without an underlined letter QDS provides you with both for the standard pictures As with different interview languages buttons with and without underlines are given the same file names but kept in separate folders If you construct your own bitmap files you don t need to make a different set for each of these variations You can use the same bitmaps for 16 bit and 32 bit platforms You can use buttons with or without underlines for any mode of administration If you don
51. be an allowable response for most questions Enter the code pattern to be used by QDS to construct special values to indicate responses for each allowable special code Using this pattern QDS can construct a specific numeric value for a numeric Data Element with any number of digits Enter the special value to be used for a date element This value should be outside the normal allowable range for years to clearly indicate a missing value e g 2097 Enter the special value to be used for a time of day element This value should be outside the normal allowable range for hours 0 24 to clearly indicate a missing value e g 97 210 QDS Questionnaire Development System Branching If Refused n on If Not Applicable 0 010010001 Replace entered values Calculations Select this choice if you generally do not want to branch out of the normal sequence after a response of Don t Know This choice can be overridden for individual Data Elements Select this choice if you generally do not want to branch out of the normal sequence after a response of Refused This choice can be overridden for individual Data Elements Select this choice if you generally do not want to branch out of the normal sequence after a response of Not Applicable This choice can be overridden for individual Data Elements When a response is changed by the respondent or data entry operator it can affect the branching paths t
52. be asked How long have you had more than one pet only if they report having more than one pet in Q2 Edit Elements 63 EDIT ELEMENTS In addition to range restrictions set on the Response Set tab there may be additional range checks that require comparing responses to multiple items Edit Elements allow you to implement and address internal inconsistencies at the time of data collection For example if you asked for both the respondent s age and birth date an Edit Element can be used to prompt the user to reenter one or both items in the case of an inconsistency You may also use Edit Elements to directly launch a new interview when an edit condition is met available as of v2 4 For example you may have an introductory screening survey and a second survey to be launched only if certain screening criteria are met a Consistency Checks Edit inconsistencies can be resolved in one of several ways 1 looping back to an earlier response and modifying previously entered data 2 requiring that the user answer additional items 3 taking no action or 4 launching a new control file In most cases you will want a message to accompany the edit check to guide the interviewer or participant through the needed correction You may also opt not to have any message displayed To add an Edit Element 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Edit Element Note The Edit Element must be inserted after the elements to be included in the chec
53. bought any in the past 6 months If No go to next category skip next three questions Were any of those purchased over the Internet If No go to next category skip next two questions How satisfied have you been with purchased over the Internet 0 Not at all satisfied 1 Somewhat satisfied 2 Completely satisfied Would you purchase over the Internet again UE Inserting a Table Element To add a Table Element 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Select the Element Type Table 3 Click OK 4 Enter the Number of elements in Table in that box The shopping example includes six elements four questions plus two skip instructions Remember to include all elements i e not just Data Elements in your count You can change this number at any time 5 Designate whether each element represents a row or column of the table This setting determines how the table will be printed for paper forms The sample questionnaire has one element per row 6 Choose the appropriate button from the Automated Interviews box This setting determines whether elements will be processed by a completing the top row first or b completing the left column first The sample questionnaire uses the column first setting One element per Ce Row C Column Tables 231 The settings for the One element per and Automated Interviews options will determine whether all elements for each category will be processed before moving to the next category or
54. calculations consistency checks formatting and comments In QDS each component of your form is called an element QDS views your questionnaire as a linear sequence of elements By default QDS will go through each element sequentially starting with the first and continuing until it reaches End of Elements QDS supports the following types of elements Data Data collection items questions or data fields Information Text to be presented to the interviewer or respondent 28 QDS Questionnaire Development System SKID ariera Conditional branching instruction Edit cei Consistency check to be performed with a specified reconciliation process Marker aaaeeeaa A destination point for a branch instruction Section Header Instruction to begin a new section of the form questionnaire Formatas iieri Formatting instruction for a paper form Tabler nenni A repeated group of consecutive elements for a set of categories Automatic Variable Value to be entered automatically into the data file e g today s date computed value Comments aaaaaeaana Informational text for the form designer Each element creates a single line in the Specifications File E My Questionnaire QDS English United States Data collected for Subject ID Information to Interviewer Thank you for agreeing to participate in our study Data collected for Gender Skip next element if GENDER 1 Data collected for Numb
55. codes assigned to Yes or No Default values are Yes 1 Don t Know 7 No 0 Refused Not Applicable 9 Branching Option Use this option to specify the path to be followed depending on the response selected Default branching is set on the Data Element tab You may indicate that a skip over a specific number of elements or to a specified marker should be triggered for certain responses Button Use this box to enter the file name for bitmap images to be used for automated interview response buttons Do not include the BMP file extension QDS provides default bitmap picture buttons pictured above for Yes No questions Names for the default buttons Yes No appear automatically in the Button text boxes However you can create your own buttons to use instead of the QDS defaults see Creating Bitmap Files on page 277 for more information Data Elements 39 Key This box indicates a letter that can be pressed on the keyboard to select each button By default you will see the letter Y in the Yes row and N in the No row In automated interviews CAPI ACASI a response of Yes or No may be indicated by pressing the corresponding letter on the keyboard Y or N This option is only available in ACASI interviews if keyboard support has been enabled see ACASI Build Options on page 138 Audio File This box allows entry of the WAV file name see Using Audio on page 145 This is optional and is applicable only f
56. create new buttons to use with Nominal Pick One Data Elements If you plan to make changes to the original button files that came with QDS you may want to make a backup copy of the originals that you could later restore without reinstalling QDS 278 QDS Questionnaire Development System je N How to Create Your Own Bitmap Files You can use any graphics software you like to create new bitmap files We used a combination of Adobe Photoshop and Microsoft Paint to construct the standard files installed with QDS The only absolute requirement is that you provide four files Up Down Focused Disabled for each button and that you follow the proper naming conventions The four bitmap files for a single button must have the same file names except for the final letter which must be U D F or X Here are some tips for creating standard bitmap files For 32 bit use a 150 x 150 pixel size works well For 16 bit use 75 x 75 is better Sixteen colors are sufficient and produce reasonably sized bitmap files The addition of white and dark gray at the border around the buttons helps to create a three dimensional look This gives a similar look and feel to your QDS data collection application as other Windows based software packages For the Up and Focused buttons the white should be on the top and left edges while dark gray should be on the bottom and right edges For the depressed Down button the border should be al
57. elements Response Card Check this box to restrict the Find function to the response card list Go To To access the Go To function select EditlGo 2 x To from the menu bar To use the Go To feature enter the Element Number for the item Elsmentnumber to which you want to go and click Go To The ele Cancel Design Studio 31 Element Number is displayed in the bottom status bar of the Design Studio window Copying Elements Between QDS Specifications Files To copy or move element s between QDS Specifications Files open both files simultaneously within the Design Studio and follow the steps described earlier for copying and moving elements You can toggle between files by using the Window menu item This is particularly useful when you want to reuse a set of questions that you have already defined for QDS Data Elements 33 DATA ELEMENTS Generally most elements in your specifications file will be Data Elements Data elements are used to ask questions or other types of information e g laboratory results and record responses Each data element must be designated as a specific data or Response Type e g numeric or text QDS supports the following Response Types Yes No Date Numeric Rating Scale Gender Time Text Response Card Time Span Pattern Nominal Pick One Local Currency Nominal Check Each Number Once a data element has been inserted EditlInsert a new window will appear Th
58. figure above we entered a Minimum value of 0 and a Maximum value of 996 We also unchecked the Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable boxes so that these options are not allowed for the variable SUBJECT Next we select OK to save this Data Element Unless you change the QDS system defaults you MUST name your Unique Identifier SUBJECT See Setting Prelimina Information on page 23 S survey1 QDS English United States Data collected for Subject number Now our questionnaire contains one Data Element that is listed as Data collected for Subject number where Subject number is the variable label we entered Adding Instructions Information Element Many questionnaires will begin by giving instructions to the participant To add an item that gives information but does not ask for a response we will add an Information Element To add our information item 1 Go to EditlInsert 10 QDS Questionnaire Development System 2 Select Element Type Information 3 Click OK You will now see the Info Element window where we enter information text Info Element Applicability Notes Information to the e Interviewer C Respondent Text In this interview will ask you questions about your opinions Thank you for your participation lt In the above figure we have entered the information that the interviewer should read to the participant in the text box We have also s
59. g a central coordinating location sends standardized rules to all study sites QWM Warehouse Manager QWM EXE Data Warehouse contains warehoused data and reconciliation rules 276 QDS Questionnaire Development System Other Files Produced Used by QDS Extension Produced by Description BMP Available from a wide variety of Graphic file used by QDS when a graphic button will sources be used in place of a text box for a response set item DIC WinDic EXE DECTalk Dictionary LOG CAPI QPI EXE ACASI QSI EXE Interviewer comments log data entry verification log Data Entry and Warehouse Manager QWM EXE MDB Warehouse Manager QWM EXE Access Database RTF Design Studio QDS EXE CAR Rich Text Format paper questionnaires codebooks QPI EXE ACASI QSI EXE change history summary reports and custom HAPI QPP EXE reports SAS Warehouse Manager QWM EXE SAS Format Library program SAV Warehouse Manager QWM EXE SPSS System File TXT QDA EXE Data to ASCII utility ASCII File WAV Available from a wide variety of Audio file used by ACASI when recorded voice files sources will be used in place of TTS XPT Warehouse Manager QWM EXE SAS Transport Data File and SAS Format Library Transport File Appendix D 277 APPEND X D CREATING BITMAP FILES QDS provides a picture button used in automated interviews for responses of Yes No Male and Female These pictures are taken from standard bitmap files BMP that
60. in the Warehouse to allow for later restoration undeletion or physically removed to reduce file size The QDS default setting specifies that deleted cases will be removed when they exceed 50 158 QDS Questionnaire Development System percent of the file size Note Cases are removed once the warehouse is closed and changes are saved You can change this setting by going to ODptions O ViewlOptions and changing the percentage Se in the Remove Deleted Interviews when Remove deleted interviews when they exceed this percentage of the file box Set the percentage to 0 zero to fo always remove deleted interviews from the warehouse Set the percentage to 100 to always retain deleted interviews in the warehouse Set to an intermediate value to remove deleted records once they represent the specified percentage of the file i The case with ID 9 has been deleted from First Questionnaire QDW The me default Remove Deleted Interviews when setting 50 has been retained Viewing Data To view a read only copy of your data select the specific interview and go to View Details You can also open the Interview Details Read Only window by e Double clicking on the interview Keyboard shortcut Ctrl D e Toolbar shortcut S Note It is not possible to modify data using the View command The Interview tab will give information specific to that et Variables interview Original Version 1
61. items and therefore can be considered not applicable Skipped codes are automatically generated when elements are skipped over The number of digits of the special code will be equal to the maximum number of valid digits so that special codes and valid codes do not overlap See Numeric Code Patterns in the QDS Design Studio online help For example if a Data Element has a range of 0 to 100 then the special codes would be 997 for Item Don t Know 998 for Refused to Answer and 999 for Not Applicable and Skipped Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculatio Description of category For a single digit Data Element the code values would be 7 8 and 9 respectively If a pick one item has a range of 1 to 7 the special codes would be 97 98 and 99 to eliminate any overlap between special and valid codes lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt e IV Don t Know E IV Refused ES IV Not Applicable E Plus special codes 222 QDS Questionnaire Development System QDS will automatically update the number of digits for special codes if you change the number of digits for a Data Element Changing Special Code Values The default values may be changed on the Response Set tab to any value that does not overlap a valid value for that element Special code values may also be changed when data are exported from the Warehouse Manager see SPSS Save As Options on page 188 SAS Save A
62. menu 2 Element Type Data will be selected by default 3 Click OK The Data Element window opens where you will enter your question variable name variable label and response type Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Text of Question Subject number Question Number Response Type Question Suffix Increment Question Number Integer Number v Variable Name Variable Label Card SUBJECT Subject number Audio File Name Branch to Marker Audio Interruptible Next element DI Data collected for New Variable Cancel Apply Help Getting Started 9 In the example above we have entered Subject number under Text of Question and Variable Label and SUBJECT for Variable Name Number is selected from the drop down Response Type menu Next we select the Response Set tab where we set response options Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Tag Decimal places For ACASI use v Enforce 0 pit v Range Minimum value Maximum value If zero branch to Marker fo EE Default for element D Value If Don t Know branch same as M Don t Know 9 GG Defaul E Value If Refused branch same as l Refused 39 Defau G Value If Not Applicable branch same as Not Applicable 99 Given E Fern Data collected for Subject number Cancel pp Help In the
63. message if an error is found e g Access file does not exist Table does not exist No match found Strl Full name of database file Str2 Name of table Str3 Selection of record criteria Specifying names of matching identifiers Str4 Name of field whose value is wanted Example DBSTATUS C lookup mdb TblLocations CONCAT ID SUBJ ECT Autos DBCOUNT Str1 Str2 Str3 Numeric Expression Performs a database lookup and returns the number of records that match specified criteria Sr Fully qualified name of database file Str2 Name of table Str3 Selection criteria specifying names of matching identifiers Example DBSTATUS C lookup mdb TblLocations CONCAT ID SUBJ ECT Appendix B 259 APPENDIX D QDS ERROR MESSAGES All version information must be decrypted The proper password must be provided before using these Warehouse Manager functions gt with the proper read password before deleted interviews can be permanently removed gt with the proper read password before data warehouse can be compacted Audio Files Needed The interview control file has been created as requested A corresponding script file was also created in the directory where the recorded audio files will be placed The script file notes which recordings need to be created or updated Available file storage is running low HAP I only Remove large files to free storage memory Backward Branch QDS does
64. not apply QDS SAS Format Program Conventions Special Format Processing for QDS Element Types Yes NO AN Displays unique Yes and No labels and special codes Gender Displays unique Male and Female labels and special codes Check Each Component Displays unique check each labels with special codes Checked is displayed as Yes Unchecked is displayed as No Check each values are grouped together Note Check each composite variables do not have formats Pick One Displays pick one labels and special codes Pick one values are grouped together Pick one response cards are handled in the same manner as regular pick one variables Numeric Scale 0 Displays labeled numeric scale values and special codes Numeric scale items are grouped together Numeric scales not associated with a response card have labels for the minimum and maximum values only scales associated with response cards have labels for all points Automatic Variables Do not have formats Composite Variables Composite dates times and time spans do not have formats Text Vartables Displays formats for special codes Text variables with no special codes defined do not have formats The SAS syntax file contains the appropriate FORMAT statement for the exported SAS format library Format Naming Conventions In the FORMAT statement variables with identical format values are grouped together The format name for a group of variables
65. not yet encountered in the interview will not be calculated and will be empty If an interview is terminated incorrectly the automatic variables may not be calculated even if they were earlier in the interview Automatic numeric date or time of day variable types cannot be modified in the Warehouse Manager We recommend modifying the values in the exported dataset such as in SAS or SPSS Data Correction Log File Optionally you may choose to maintain a data correction log file This file will contain a listing of all edits made to data in the warehouse file Note It will only include changes made after the log file was created To maintain a data correction log file 1 Select ViewlOptions 2 Specify the full path and file name for the log file e g c MyStudy Corrections log 3 Press the Browse button to select an existing file If the File Name box is left blank QDS default setting changes will not be recorded Data correction logs may be created only from warehouse files not source files For our First Questionnaire QDW warehouse you can view the data correction log named First Questionnaire Log The changes we made resulted in the following log Changes made 07 17 01 to G QDS Manual Sample Programs First Questionnaire QDW bas Variable s Changed 1 5 Baseline RACE 1 7 Baseline RACE Identifying Duplicate Cases When you are adding cases to a local warehouse from a source file QDS
66. of the interview For automated interviews date components may be selected by using Spin Controls where the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease each component to the correct value or with numeric keypads where the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Select Use keypad for ACASI to provide keypad rather than Spin Controls as the default for date elements keypad separate screens will be displayed for Spin Controls allow all components to be entered Year Month oe HEI BIE 46 QDS Questionnaire Development System Response Set Tab Time of Day Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Components Format for hour 24 Hour C Hour amp Minutes Only C 12 Hour C Hour Only vedi our i 7 Sale ant E Habe 197 Earliest time allowed Allow Refused Hour 38 Latest time allowed Current Time I Use keypad for ACASI M Allow Not Applicable Hour 199 F Allow Missing Minutes Minutes AR I Allow Missing Seconds Seconds The Response Set tab options for Time of Day responses are similar to those for Dates Components aeseeeeeee eeren Select Full Time if the element will include hour minutes and seconds QDS default setting All Time Elements must include at least the hour Format for hour aaaeeeaa You may select from 24 Hour i e 1 00 p m is represented by 13 00
67. on the Data Element tab you will most likely want to review the settings on the Response Set tab Options on this tab allow you to specify numeric values and valid ranges for each Data Element Specific options vary and are determined by the response type chosen Most options are set with a checkbox or radio button choice For help on a specific option right click to view the context sensitive What s This help The following sections detail the various options for each response type 38 QDS Questionnaire Development System Response Set Tab Yes No Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Allow Value lfYes branch to Marker Button Key Audio File M Yes i Default for element Di ves g es Value lf No branch to Marker Button Key Audio File lv No DR Default for element D No N no Value Branch same as M Don t Know D Ze Default C No Yes Value Branch same as MV Refused D Default C No C Yes Value Branch same as V Not Applicable Rb C Default GG No C Yes Allow Checkboxes indicate whether the specified response is allowed for this element To disallow a response uncheck the corresponding box Both Yes and No must be allowed for Yes No questions Value Enter the value to be associated with each response The assigned values for the Special Codes may be changed to an integer between 0 and 9 but should not match
68. on the appropriate radio button choice at multiple sites at a single site by multiple interviewers by a single interviewer Design Studio 25 Interview Options Study Configuration Identifier Variables Applicability Security Interviews will be conducted C ata single site by multiple interviewers C by a single interviewer F Subject ID Variable may be duplicated at different sites F Multiple interviews with the same subject are planned Cancel Check the appropriate checkboxes Subject ID Variable may be duplicated at different sites Check this box if the same range of Subject ID numbers will be used at multiple sites Multiple interviews with the same subject are planned Check this box if each Subject ID may be assigned to multiple records Identifier Variables From Options Interviews select the Identifier Variables tab to indicate which variable s will be used as the Unique Identifier for your data collection instrument The Unique Identifier consists of one or more variables that uniquely identify a gt gt particular interview or data collection instance By default QDS expects at least one variable to be designated as the Subject ID The Variable Name for this item should be entered in the box labeled Subject ID on the Identifier Variables tab The default Subject ID variable name is SUBJECT You will notice that the variable name SUBJECT is already entered in the Subject
69. only in the first nonstandard version triggering the message Variable LINE is not in the standard version Discard it Click No and the variable LINE will be appended to the end of the standard version Subjects who completed Version 1 will have data for the variable LINE Subjects who completed Version 2 will have a System Missing value for the variable LINE Click Yes and the variable will not be included in the standard version We chose to respond No and keep the LINE variable Weare prompted with the Equivalent Do these two variables have the same meaning dialog box for our variables METRO Version 1 and SUBWAY Version 2 They are considered Possibly Equivalent because their original creation time was the same and the Response Sets are identical the variable name and question text were changed In this study we wish the SUBWAY question to be equivalent to the METRO question so we select Yes In the reconciled version the data for METRO from Version 1 will be merged into the SUBWAY variable and the METRO variable will be dropped Select OK e The PARK variable is in the standard version 2 but was not in the first version The QDS reconciliation process will automatically keep this variable PARK will have a System Missing code for interviews that were not conducted in Version 1 Working With Multiple Versions 177 You can view the warehouse file following reconciliation in Example Transportation Reconciled QDW
70. passwords Modify passwords are designed to prevent unauthorized modification of data This password will only be required for data editing or deleting interview records within the Warehouse Manager module Modify passwords may be added at any time and coupled with any encryption type none default or read password Questionnaire designers have the option of using both read and modify passwords or only one Data Security 215 Using Passwords To add a read or modify password 1 Go to Options Interviews Security 2 Select the Add button under Read or Modify Password Read Password Data Encryption must be selected to add a Read Password 3 Enter your password and confirm Passwords are case sensitive and allow letters numbers and symbols Length ranges from 7 to 127 characters 4 Select OK to save Changing Passwords To change a read or modify password 1 Go to Options Interviews Security 2 Select the Change button under Read or Modify Password 3 Enter your old and new passwords and confirm 4 Select OK to save Add Password X po Po DE JI Cancel Modify Password 216 QDS Questionnaire Development System Deleting Passwords To delete a read or modify password 1 Go to Options Interviews Delete Password ES Security Password 2 Select the Delete button under O Read or Modify Password Enter the password you wish to delete 3 4
71. process select ViewlVersions from the Warehouse Manager menu Select the nonstandard version that you wish to reconcile to the standard and click Details Versions with a blue arrow gt next to them have already been reconciled to the standard A window will open saying This version is not the current standard and has not yet been reconciled to the standard Reconcile now Click Yes QDS will then walk through both versions of the questionnaire prompting you as necessary to define the rules for reconciling the nonstandard version to the standard If you are not ready to reconcile click No Reconciliation Example Now that we have reviewed QDS s reconciliation rules it may be easiest to understand the process with an example In Versions 1 and 2 of our example transportation study we have survey forms with the following specifications Transportation Study Form Version 1 Transportation Study Form Version 2 Variable Question Variable Question SUBJECT Subject ID SUBJECT Subject ID METRO Do you take the Metro SUBWAY Do you take the subway LINE What line do you ride OWNCAR Do you own a car CAR Do you own a car CARPOOL Do you ever carpool CARPOOL Do you ever carpool PARK Do you have to pay to park We have created a separate sample file for each version so that you can view the specifications for each see Example Transportation v1 QDS and Example Transportation v2 QDS The example source data fi
72. produce this message Otherwise the problem is most likely a missing operator For example X gt 3 Y would cause this error See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Expected a Variable The item noted in the message is neither a variable name nor a valid constant and was found ata position where only a variable or constant is permitted See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Expected an Operator The most likely cause of this error is a missing operator but other types of improper expressions can also produce this message For example A B would produce this message if a logical expression is required See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information File seek failed on control file HAPI only Operating system error File Transfer Error In the Edit Launch feature errors will result when the destination file is not properly defined Verify that the file name and shared variables were correctly specified Errors include Destination file is undefined Destination file was not found Unable to open destination file Variable x from source file does not match any variable in destination file gt Response data from source file is not valid for variable x VVVV Forward Reference Calculation The expression specified for this element includes a reference to a variable that is co
73. soon as the respondent selects a scale point Place anchors Indicate if labels for the low and high anchors should be placed Above right of scale or Outside scale If Above right of scale is selected for a horizontal scale the anchors are placed above the endpoints for a vertical scale the anchors are placed to the right of the endpoints If Outside scale is selected the anchors are placed to the left and right of a horizontal scale or above and below a vertical scale Show tick marks Indicate if where tick marks should be drawn along the length of the scale Options are 1 For all points 2 Coded points only response cards only and 3 None Show numeric values Indicate if where numeric values should be displayed along the length of the scale You can choose 1 For all points 2 Coded points only response cards only and 3 None Response Set Tab Text Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Maximum number Maximurn approximate of characters to number of characters to If blank branch to allow display on screen Defaut for element o Marker clf Don t Know branch same as I Allow Blank Response r Convert all letters to f Default C Blant upper case M Allow Don t Know z Remove leading If Refused branch same as M Allow Refused spaces Default Blank Bypass key ly E E EES verification lf Not Applicable branch same
74. specifying the allowable range for a time of day element Data Format Error The data record for this element is not formatted correctly There may be physical damage to a portion of the file Try validating the file to learn the extent of the damage Running a disk checking utility may help You may want to return to your most recent backup of this file In any case this element is being restored to the default values for all items Deleted Response Card This Data Element is associated with a response card that is not no longer part of this questionnaire There are four possible explanations 1 The response card was renamed 2 The response card was deleted 3 The specifications file was damaged and the response card was lost 4 This element was copied from another questionnaire but the corresponding response card was not copied H explanation 1 applies select the new name for the card H explanation 4 applies and the specifications file that provided this element is available copy the needed response card H either of the other explanations applies and you have a backup copy of the specifications file available you may be able to copy the needed response card s from the backup Discard Error While trying to copy the specifications file discarding all Undo Information QDS encountered a damaged portion of the old file A reliable copy cannot be made and QDS is abandoning the attempt You sho
75. the Design Studio The first step is to open the Design Studio Like many Windows applications the Design Studio may be opened through the Windows Start menu or by double clicking on the Design Studio execution application QDS EXE directly from Windows Explorer Via Start Menu Select ProgramsIQDS v Design Studio from the Windows Start menu where corresponds to the version of QDS installed on your computer examples in this manual refer to version 2 4 Via File Icon Double click on the Design Studio program Ka QDS Design Studio icon QDS EXE in the QDS Studio Die View Help directory c Program Files QDS olal Hl SS x amp E 2 4 Studio 22 QDS Questionnaire Development System Once the Design Studio has been opened you will see a window titled QDS Design Studio with a menu bar with File View and Help options Creating a Questionnaire Whenever a new questionnaire is started the first step is to create a specifications file The specifications file will contain all details of the questionnaire question text variable names variable labels valid ranges skip instructions consistency checks etc To create a specifications file 1 From the Design Studio menu select FilelNew 2 Enter the file name for the specifications file in the File Name box QDS specifications files automatically receive the file extension QDS For example if you enter First Questionnaire Example in t
76. the Design Studio later Select No to continue working in the Design Studio Skip Too Far A branching instruction in this element skips over more elements than follow this in the questionnaire If you intend to skip to the end of the questionnaire consider using a marker Substituting Standard Bitmap There was a problem with the requested bitmap file and QDS is Substituting the Standard Picture button Either the requested bitmap file could not be found or itis invalid H the named bitmap file could not be found it may be that the wrong folder was specified To change folders press the Options button on the dialog box for saving your product file To change the name of the bitmap file update the specifications for all Data Elements that reference this button or use the Global Changes command H the named bitmap file is invalid it was not written in standard BMP format Try opening the file with a graphics program such as MS Paint and resaving itas DMR Substituting Text Button There was a problem with the requested bitmap file and QDS is Substituting a text button in its place Either the requested bitmap file could not be found or it is invalid H the named bitmap file could not be found it may be that the wrong folder was specified To change folders press the Options button on the dialog box for saving your product file To change the name of the bitmap file update the specifications for all Data Elemen
77. the last rename Rename all audios cc eeeeeeeeeeee This option will assign a new audio file name to all Data and Information Elements You can suppress audio for any given text by typing No Audio in the Audio File Name box on the Data Element Information Element or Edit Element tab When audio is suppressed in this way the ACASI control file assumes that the question is intended for staff use and allows keyboard input Script Files Each time you build an ACASI control file QDS creates a script file The script file is designed to help in the creation and management of voice recordings It is built directly from the specifications file and contains the exact text to be recorded If you plan to use TTS exclusively you may ignore the script file Text corresponding to items from the Response Set tab for Data Element are not included in the script file This is a current limitation that should be corrected in a future release For now audio files for response items including response cards must be managed separately As part of the ACASI Build process you will be prompted A script file has been produced Would you like to open the RTF document now If you select Yes QDS will open the script file using your default word processor The default name for QDS script files is lt Specifications Filename gt En Script RTF The script file contains three columns Status File and Text For each item the Status column shows the sta
78. to this question is the category with code value Zero Select Default for Element to branch as specified for this element on the Data Element tab To skip over a specified number of elements when the response is Zero select Skip n Elements To branch to a specified Marker Element after a Zero response select Marker and enter the Marker ID in the box to the right Response Set Tab Nominal Check Each Use the Nominal Check Each Response Type when you want to allow the respondent to choose more than one answer from a list of possible options Data Element Probes Applicability Styles l Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Item Description of category lf none checked branch to Marker lt lt Double click here to add anew check item zz Default for element If Don t Know branch same as Default C None checked lf Refused branch same as Default CN hecked Value if E M Don t Know i ai SE checked value iha P M Refused p If Not Applicable branch same as e Ze checked 7 NatApelicable D Default None checked Nominal Check Each Response Types are somewhat different from other Data Element types discussed so far because they will output multiple variables to the data file Data Elements 43 Each checklist item will have its own variable in the output data file The variable s value will indicate whether or not it was checked default 1 checked and 0 not checked The resulting
79. value recorded in the box to the right will be recorded for the value unit Minimum Allowable Value Enter the shortest time span that will be considered a valid response This value is expressed in terms of the value unit For example if 2 is entered as the minimum and Years is the value unit a time span of at least 2 years must be entered But if 2 is entered and Months is the value unit the minimum time span is 2 months Maximum Allowable Value Enter the longest time span that will be considered a valid response This value is expressed in terms of the value unit For example if 2 is entered as the maximum and Years is the value unit a time span of no longer than 2 years must be entered But if 2 is entered and Months is the value unit the maximum time span is 2 months Use kevpad AA For automated interviews time span components may be selected by using Spin Controls where the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease each component to the correct value or with numeric keypads where the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Select Use keypad to provide keypad rather than Spin Controls as the default for Time Span Elements Note If you choose to use a keypad separate screens will be displayed for each component Spin Controls allows all components to be entered on a single screen Enforce Range Check this box to prevent a span outside the allowable rang
80. view the probe tap 2 to open the Probe dialog box When complete tap OK in the upper right hand corner to proceed with the interview Adding Comments As with CAPI interviews it is possible for the interviewer to add his or her own notes during the course of the interview When you would like to add a note tap next to the Clear button to open the Comments dialog box Enter text via the input panel When complete tap OK in the upper right hand corner to proceed with the interview Saving HAPI Interviews HAPI automatically saves each interview as it is completed Unlike CAPI and ACASI there is no message box asking if you wish to save the interview Interrupting a HAPI Interview To end an interview before it is complete tap InterviewlEnd HAPI will save all responses entered up to that point and set the status of that interview to incomplete Resuming a HAPI Interview To resume an interrupted interview 1 Tap InterviewlResume which will launch the Open dialog box 2 HAPI will display a listing of all the control files QPP currently on the Pocket PC 3 Tap the desired control file to display the Interview List dialog box The interview list contains the identifier variable s interview status start date and time and end date and time 4 Tap the desired case to resume the interview starting from the last question answered during the previous session 130 QDS Questionnaire Development System 5 A dia
81. will alert you to any cases in your source file that duplicate those already existing in your warehouse During the transfer process you will be prompted with a Replace Interview dialog box that asks whether to overwrite a duplicate case A case is identified as a duplicate when the identifier s of that case exactly match the identifier s of a case already in that source file or warehouse If you elect not to overwrite a duplicate case the warehouse will display a status code of Duplicate A for both cases For example in First Questionnaire QDW you can see that we have a duplicate case for Subject ID 1 Site 1 collected at baseline When we copied the second 162 QDS Questionnaire Development System instance of this case from our source data file to our local warehouse a QDS dialog box popped up which displayed the choices Yes Yes to All to replace all duplicates or No If you select Yes the case currentl Replace interview x y d being added will replace the case Replace interview ID Recorded already in the warehouse The status F bn 3 02 05 05PM for the replaced case will change to Deleted With the same interview ID recorded bagean If you select No the case currently being added to the warehouse will be added without replacing the duplicate Yes Yes to All No already in the warehouse Both cases will be marked with a status of Duplicate If we modify data in a duplicate case such
82. 12 Hour will include an a m p m indicator or Fixed Hour formats If you select Fixed Hour enter the fixed hour in this box Special Codes A You may choose Allow Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable by checking these boxes default setting is not checked Allow Missing Minutes Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with incomplete times that are missing the minute s In the box to the right enter the minutes value to be substituted This should be an allowable value 0 59 so that the full time will be valid for analysis Allow Missing Seconds Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with incomplete times that are missing the second s In the box to the right enter the seconds value to be substituted This should be an allowable value 0 59 so that the full time will be valid for analysis Earliest time allowed Enter the default minimum value for Time Elements You may leave this field blank for no minimum time or enter CURRENT to make the earliest allowable time the time of day at that point in the interview Latest time allowed Enter the default maximum value for Time Elements You may leave this field blank for no maximum time or enter CURRENT to make the latest allowable time the time of day at that point in the interview Data Elements 47 Use keypad for ACASI For automated in
83. 4 RACE Respondent s Race Value 2 White Caucasian European OSRJOB Currently has a job Value 1 Yes Q6 FULLTIME Works full time 40 hours or more per week Value 1 Yes Q7 EARLY I like to get up early in the morning Value 4 4 Q8 EXERC I try and exercise at least twice a week Value 11 OS DAE I try to stick to a healthy diet Value 2 2 Q10 FRUIT Fruits eaten during past week Value 1100101 Cli SIDD S Specify other fruit s eaten during past week Value Blueberries Q12 SERVING How many servings of fruit ate yesterday Value 4 4 Report File Names The complete file name for each report contains the prefix text specified on the Summary Reports tab plus the interview identifiers defined on the Options Interview Optionslldentifier Variables property page With identifier variables of SITE SUBJECT TODAY and VISIT the resulting file name for the example would be First Questionnaire v2 en CAPI I 100 06 03 2003 Baseline RTF where 1 SITE 100 SUBJECT 06 03 2003 TODAY and Baseline VISIT The report files are saved into the same folder as the CAPI QAD data files CAPI 111 Conducting CAPI Interviews To launch your CAPI Application 1 Locate your CAPI control file using My Computer or Windows Explorer The default control file name is specification file name En CAPI QPI 2 Double click on the control file 3 Your CAPI application will open to the first screen of t
84. Because question numbers are generated renumbered only when specifications are validated changes made to question numbering are visible only after revalidating specifications Select Tools Validate from the List View or select the Validate button from the toolbar Data Elements 37 Audio File Name The Audio File Name box is used to enter the file name for a manually recorded WAV file for the question To suppress audio for an element enter No Audio This is an instruction to QDS not to use the text to speech engine for this item This option is applicable only for ACASI applications Audio File Names are limited to 8 characters and may not contain blanks or the following characters lt gt l Do not enter the WAV file extension as part of the Audio File Name See Using Audio on page 145 for more information on working with WAV files and other audio options Audio Interruptible Check this box to allow the respondent to enter a response before the entire question has been read If the box is not checked the respondent will be prevented from answering until the question has been read in its entirety This option is applicable only for ACASI applications Branch To The Branch to box specifies the element to be processed following a Data Element By default QDS will proceed to the next item in sequence However you can use this option to specify an alternate order Response Set Tab After entering information
85. D file from the list box that contains the correct Batch Code Select the Enter New Interviews radio button Click Open You will see a blank New Interview data entry screen N Oy Se 5 Begin data entry Completing a Partially Entered Interview If data entry is stopped in the middle of an interview the partial record is written to the data file with a status of Partially Entered form status can be seen in the status bar at the bottom of the data entry window Interview 1 of 1 Partially entered i To complete data entry 1 Follow steps for Continuing File 2 Select InterviewlSelect Index Identifier s Steis Interview 1 85 Fully verified 3 From the Interviews dialog box 2 7 Partially verified right select the interview you 3 a Partially entered would like to complete Click OK 5 Complete data entry You will return to the incomplete interview at the item where you left off Viewing Editing Previously Entered Interviews While in the process of data entry you may navigate between records with the following commands Interview Next Interview Go to next record Interview Previous Interview Go to previous record Interview Last Interview Go to last record in current data file Interview First Interview Go to first record in current data file Interview Select Interview Shows a list of all records in current data file
86. DHIEDDS EE 106 Operations Tab BEE 106 Appearance Tab BEE 107 Spin Gontrols RT EE 108 Summary Reports Tab seesinane anii eE E a AA Eaa a EAE Ea aa 109 Conducting CAPI IntervieWS ssssssusssunenunenunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnn nunn nn NENNEN 111 CAP Open Didlog BOX wiss isrdeceiu dike Mossi aiaei ir adain atate 112 CAPI Menu Commande a ra EEEE EEEIEE AEE E 112 Entering Interview Responses in CAPl ssssssunssunseunneunnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana 113 YES NO EE 113 GOnder RESPONSE EE 113 Nominal Pick One Response Cards 113 Nominal Check Each Response Cards 113 Spin Control Responses Dates Times Time Gpams 114 C rency N MDET geegent n eer Seege Gegen dek dE 114 Scale RESPONSE EE 115 Toxt OSD OMS esiis a E A E Ce extgacceevesavncee 115 Entering Special Code Responses in CAPI cssccsseceeseesseeseseeeeeseeeeeseseneenenseeeees 115 Interviewer COMMents sssssssnseunseunneunreunnnunnnnunnunnnuunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen nnmn 115 te 116 Saving CAPI INterviews 2 occ r cess deepal ence teed ca raara aaa enana Aaaa aaa Aaaa Aa Haea eaaa aaa 116 Interrupting a CAPI IntervieW sssnssssnssunnennreunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nann 116 Resuming a CAPI Interview ssnsssnssunseunneunsuunnununnnunnuunnuunnnnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 116 GAPI Data File scciccccsscccetccecccis EENS eaaa aaaea aaaea diaaa iadaaa 117
87. Files on page 277 Key This box indicates the letter that can be pressed on the keyboard to select each button By default you will see the letter M in the Male row and F in the Female row In automated interviews CAPI ACASD a response of Male or Female may be indicated by pressing the corresponding letter on the keyboard M or F This option is only available in ACASI interviews if keyboard support has been enabled see ACAS Build Options on page 138 When creating new bitmaps it is standard to underline the keyboard shortcut Audio File This box allows entry of the WAV file name see Using Audio on page 145 This is optional and is applicable only for AC ASl interviews Determines Gender Applicability Data Elements may be specified as applicable only for men or only for women This option is described in the section on the Data Element Applicability tab Because it is possible to have more than one Data Element with a response type of Gender it is necessary to indicate which gender variable should be used to determine gender applicability Note Checking this box indicates that this element should be used to determine gender applicability This is necessary even if you have only one gender element in your questionnaire Response Set Tab Nominal Pick One The Nominal Pick One Response Type is used for Data Elements that require the selection of a single response from a predefined set of categories Data Elements 41
88. GTH String Numeric Expression Returns the length number of characters in a string expression Example LENGTH Dallas returns 6 Appendix A 257 Database Lookup Functions DBVALUE Str1 Str2 Str3 Str4 Numeric Expression or String Expression determined by type of field to be returned Looks up values from a preexisting database and returns the value of a specified field The returned value is stored ina QDS automatic variable and becomes part of QDS data file Strl Full name of database file Str2 Name of table Str3 Selection criteria specifies name of matching identifiers Str4 Name of field whose value is wanted Example DBVALUE c lookup mdb TblLocations CONCAT ID SUBJ ECT StreetAddress c lookup mdb Name and full path location of Access file TblLocations Name of the Access table to be used for lookup D Name of MS Access match field must include equal sign SUBJ ECT Name of QDS match field Note only argument not in quotes StreetAddress Name of the ACCESS field to return and store This function looks in the TblLocations Table of the MS Access database lookup mdb for a record where ID matches the value of the QDS variable SUBJ ECT If a match is found the value of the MS Access field StreetAddress will be returned to QDS If no match is found an empty string is returned DBSTATUS Sitr1 Str2 Str3 Str4 String Expression Performs a database lookup and returns an error
89. ISallavy IntETVIEWEr Geert oo Operations Tab The Operations tab allows you to refine input settings Three options are enabled for HAPI which are akin to the CAPI options see CAPI Build Options on page 106 Replace entered values with skip code Disallow resumption of completed interviews Pause between screens default 100 milliseconds Appearance Tab E C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio Bitm HAPI 123 The Appearance tab options modify the Pocket PC screen Font size questions Set font size for Question and Information text items default 10 Space for Questions 2 The white box shows the portion of the screen that will be devoted to the question box Use the left mouse button to drag and resize the box Letter codes separator Check the letter codes box to start each text response for a pick one or check each Data Element with a letter for selecting that response Enter the letter code separator in the box The default is so that A B is displayed Show Question Numbers Check to include the question number with the text for every question Default is unchecked Bitmap Director Enter the directory path for the location of button bitmap files to be used as picture buttons for automated interviews Browse button Click this button to select a directory for button bitmap files by browsing the directory s
90. Marker box 5 Click OK Additional skip options Filling with Select the Standard Skip Code default or Alternate Skip Code button When the skip condition is true the Data Elements that are skipped will be set to a generated Skip Code QDS allows two Skip Codes Standard and Alternate to distinguish between reasons for skipping The values used for the Standard and Alternate codes are defined on the Special Codes tab in Options Data Defaults Skips and Markers 61 Replace entered values When a response is changed by the respondent or data entry Branch if operator it can affect the branching paths that follow Previously entered values might now be skipped Leave this box checked to replace previously entered values by the skip code Uncheck the box to retain values The default setting Replace entered values with skip code is checked This option overrides a similar global Build option maybe With QDS calculation of a logical condition may evaluate to TRUE FALSE or MAYBE An evaluation of MAYBE can be treated as TRUE or FALSE Check this box to treat a MAYBE evaluation as TRUE Leave the box unchecked to treat MAYBE as FALSE default not checked The following example can be found in Skip Example QDS 1 Respondent s ID Number __ ID 2 How many pets do you have If Q2 is not greater than 1 then skip to Q4 3 How long have you had more than one pet ____Months__ Years Respondents will
91. Missing Date Time Variable The variables specified for Start Date Time or End Date Time on the Options Interviews Study Configuration tab were not found in the specifications file You must delete the date time variables on the Study Configuration tab or change the variable name on the Study Configuration tab or the Data Element tab so they match Missing Interviewer ID The variable specified for Interviewer ID on the Options Interviews Study Configuration tab was not found in the specifications file You must delete the Inteviewer ID variable from the Study Configuration tab or change the variable name on the Study Configuration tab or the Data Element tab so they match Missing Site ID The variable specified for Site ID on the Options Interviews Study Configuration tab was not found in the specifications file You must delete the Site ID variable from the Study Configuration tab or change the variable name on the Study Configuration tab or the Data Element tab so they match Missing Subject ID The variable specified for Subject ID on the Options Interviews Study Configuration tab was not found in the specifications file You must delete the Subject ID variable from the Study Configuration tab or change the variable name on the Study Configuration tab or the Data Element tab so they match Multiple Empty Conditions QDS allows multiple rules for handling skipped Data Elements when performing calculations but they mu
92. N BC These special response options will be visible on each screen however they will be grayed out if they were disabled for an item in the Design Studio file Navigating the Questionnaire In the Pocket PC environment you will need to learn how to move through your HAPI questionnaire correct responses add comments or display probes Moving to the Next Question For questions that display a list of responses such as a Pick One Element the program automatically moves ahead to the next question once you have made your selection For questions where you may select more than one enter open text or enter numeric responses tap gt located at the bottom of the screen to move to the next screen after each response is complete Moving to the Previous Question To review a previous response tap Note that this arrow always takes you back to the Data Element screen that immediately precedes the current one It does not go back to a previous Information Element screen HAPI 129 Correcting Responses To clear a previously entered response tap the Clear _ button This is located on each Data Element screen below the response area Displaying Probes If the questionnaire designer added a probe additional information to help clarify the current question to an item on the Data Element Probes tab the Probe button will be enabled and will look like vw For items where no probe exists the lightbulb will be grayed out To
93. Options To access Build options for your ACASI Module 1 Go to BuildIACASI Application 2 Click on Options You will now see the Build Options box with the following tabs Operations set input options Appearance set screen formatting options Spin Controls set options for entering Date and Time Elements Audio control audio settings and Summary Reports interview data report options Build Options x Operations Tab Operations Appearance Spin Controls Audio Summary Reports The following options are enabled and can be modified T Support keyboard input m Function keys for ACASI applications J Restrict use of Refuse to Answer Don t Know E SI M Replace entered values with skip code Refused F8 e I Disallow resumption of completed interviews E I Disallow interviewer comments Sg FFs Je Pause between screens Eat password o milliseconds l Cancel Support keyboard inpult Specify whether to allow keyboard input By default this box is not checked for ACASI interviews requiring input using a ACASI 139 Restrict Refuse to Answer Hide disallowed buttons Replace entered values Disallow resumption Disallow Interviewer Comments Pause between screens Exit password We recommend mouse or touchscreen This option is overridden i e keyboard support is alw
94. Printing Warehouse Information To print a full listing of your source file or local warehouse cases go to FilelPrint or FilelPrint Preview Your printout will give you the name of your file and a listing of all your cases with their interview status version number collection date and time and interview ID s Saving Files To save your source data or local warehouse file go to FilelSave to save your file under the same name or FilelSave As to save a copy under a different name You will be prompted to save every time you close a data or warehouse file as well as when you exit the Warehouse Manager therefore closing any open file Save and Compact The Save and Compact feature eliminates unused portions of the warehouse file that sometime occur as a result of reconciliation and conversion procedures To run this feature go to FilelSave and Compact QDS will save the file under the same name Note In order to use this function read passwords for all versions even versions that have been deleted must be supplied Working With Password Protected Data 167 WORKING WITH PASSWORD PROTECTED DATA Adding Read Passwords in the Warehouse Manager If a read password was defined in the Design Studio it will be necessary to supply it before data can be viewed or exported from the Warehouse Manager When QDS data files that have been read password protected are opened within the Warehouse Manager the interview data will be di
95. Qx RTF First Questionnaire Example En Script RTF First Questionnaire Example En Self RTF Warehouse Manager Files Example Transportation En CAPI QAD Example Transportation v1 QDS Example Transportation v2 QDS Example Transportation Reconciled QDW Example Transportation Unreconciled QDW First Questionnaire Central QDW First Questionnaire Site 1 1 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 2 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 3 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 QDW First Questionnaire Site 1 QTD First Questionnaire Site 1 Receipts Posted QDW First Questionnaire Site 2 1 QAD First Questionnaire Site 2 2 QAD First Questionnaire Site 2 QDW First Questionnaire Site 2 QTD First Questionnaire Site 2 Receipts Posted QDW First Questionnaire v2 DE 101 QPD First Questionnaire v2 QDS First Questionnaire LOG First Questionnaire MDB First Questionnaire QDW First Questionnaire SAV FirstQ XPT FirstQf XPT FirstQf SAS Transport MDB Transport SAV Transport XPT SAS Format Convert SAS Version 2 4 Sample Files Survey1 QDS Edit Example QDS Edit Launch Exercise Survey QDS First Questionnaire Report QDS Edit Example En CAPI QPI Exercise Survey en CAPI QPI First Questionnaire Report En CAPI QPI First Q Report 21 RTF SAS Format Convert v24 sas
96. S extension e g My First Questionnaire Design Studia c 1997 98 NOVA Research Company 24 QDS Questionnaire Development System Questionnaire will be used as the questionnaire title on study documentation and paper questionnaires 3 You may also enter a version code author s name and if applicable copyright information This information is not required and may be left blank Interview Options Interview options are used to define study configuration data security and specify variable s that will be used as the unique identifier for your questionnaire For example Will there be one site or many Will there be multiple interviews with the same respondent These parameters may affect how you define your unique identifier Will your collected data need to be encrypted or password protected Options for data security are set here To set up interviewing and study options 1 Select Options Interviews 2 Choose applicable options on the Study Configuration Identifier Variables Applicability and Security tabs Interview options specified will be used by the QDS Warehouse Manager to conduct data management activities e g identifying duplicate cases im In the sample file First Questionnaire Example QDS all interviewing options have been left at their default settings Study Configuration Tab From Options Interviews select the Study Configuration tab to define how your study will be conducted Click
97. S op Q Di Di D FRUIT FRUIT FRUIT FRUIT FRUI FRUIT FRUIT ERVING ERVING ri bi OD Om Pp proc freq run The sample files FirstQf XPT and FirstOQf SAS contain the exported SAS format library file and program in SAS format Default settings were used to create these files The sample file SAS Format Convert QDS v24 SAS contains a full syntax example for importing the sample SAS data set and SAS formats The following SAS error message s sometimes occur when running the PROC FORMAT statement ERROR Format name is invalid Observation ignored ERROR Format name 0000 is invalid Observation ignored They do not cause any problems with the resulting format library and can be disregarded 194 QDS Questionnaire Development System Special Code Formatting Special codes defined in the Design Studio for elements will have the following formats Don t Know ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeees Don t Know Refused ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees Refused Not Applicable 0 0 ee Not Applicable Skipped AA No format applied In cases in which both Not Applicable and Skipped apply and are assigned the same numeric code in the Design Studio the label Not Applicable is displayed Missing neeesser No format applied If the SAS Save As Options are changed to recode special values to something other than Special Codes default setting these format labels do
98. Sample En ACASI QAD data files to reflect the date site and data collection computer The renamed file Sample En ACASI 030105 A 1 QAD would indicate the CAPI data file was closed on March 1 2005 at Site A on computer 1 See Working With Collected Data on page 153 to learn how to work with data files in the Warehouse Manager CAPI 119 The sample data files illustrate how you might develop a naming convention for your files Data File First Questionnaire Site 2 1 QAD First Questionnaire Site 2 2 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 3 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 1 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 2 QAD Description Data collected at Site 2 Time 1 Site 2 Time 2 Site 1 Time 3 Site 1 Time 1 Site 1 Time 2 A QAD file that has been renamed can be opened at a later time to add new interviews or to resume a prior interview From the CAPI Open dialog box select QDS Automated Interview Data Files QAD from the Files of type drop down box and then select a specific QAD file from the list box Choose the appropriate radio button to Begin a new interview or Resume a prior interview and select Open HAPI 121 HANDHELD ASSISTED PERSONAL INTERVIEWS HAPI With the Handheld Assisted Personal Interview HAPI Module you can conduct interviews on a Pocket PC device available QDS v2 3 and above It includes all features available in CAPI and is fully integrated into the QDS system Using Microsoft ActiveSy
99. See Skips and Markers on page 59 for tips on the use of Marker Elements as destinations points TE Launching Another Interview For the CAPI HAPI and ACASI modules you can launch a second questionnaire with the Edit Element Launch another control file option When an edit expression evaluates TRUE QDS terminates the first questionnaire and automatically starts the second specified questionnaire You may want to have a first questionnaire ask screening questions and only proceed to the second questionnaire for eligible participants Any identifier variables from the first questionnaire are automatically copied to the second questionnaire You can also optionally designate one nonidentifier variable to be copied to the second questionnaire To add an Edit Element with the Launch another control file option 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Edit Element 2 In the If text box enter the condition to be checked by the Edit Element In the example below we entered EXERTIM gt 3 Number of exercise times was greater than or equal to 3 Edit Element Notes IF Ge gt 3 Display message SS proceed to the Exercise Survey Audio File Name T Audio Interuptibe p Perform without message Reconciliation Number of Marker Launch another control file bd 1 element Y m Control file name for Shared variable CAPI Exercise Survey en CSPI GENDER 3 Perform if condition evaluates ti 4 CASI E maybe
100. Text of Question box enter the question as it should appear on the form or screen The text entered into this box will appear as the question text in a paper interview or be displayed on the screen for an automated interview CAPI ACASD Basic formatting bolding italicizing or underlining may be applied to any portion of the question text by selecting that portion with your mouse and selecting EditIBold EditlItalic or EditlUnderline or by selecting the appropriate formatting buttons from the Design Studio toolbar 4 B U To include a line break press Ctrl Enter Variable Name In the Variable Name box enter the data element variable name Variable names must begin with a letter be no longer than 8 characters and contain only letters digits underscores and or Substitution Tokens This ensures compatibility with output file requirements e g SAS SPSS Examples of valid names GENDER INTDT NAME DOB LAST30 MM_YY Examples of invalid names INTERVIEWDATE 30DAYS MM YY By default QDS assigns each variable the name V amp Q Once the questionnaire is built the V amp Q Variable Name will assign a variable name consisting of the letter V and the question number e g V23 See Substitution Tokens on page 225 for more information Although QDS assigns default variable names we strongly recommend that you assign your own unique variable names prior to finalizing your questionnaire Because the default variable names
101. There are two possible causes for this error The specifications for the element noted in the message may have been updated by a newer version of the Design Studio which would have been noted in an error message immediately prior to this one If no such message appeared the element specifications have been corrupted and must be restored Cannot Write Options Your local installation options file UserO pts QDO is unavailable There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error In any event the file has not been updated Choose a Card Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight the response card Choose a Language Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight the appropriate interviewing language Clipboard Copy Error While trying to copy the selected elements to the clipboard QDS encountered a damaged portion of the specifications file No elements have been copied Try validating the specifications to learn the extent of the damage To repair the damage you might try exiting QDS and running a disk checking utility Or you may want to return to your most recent backup of this file Clipboard Error The most likely cause of this error is insufficient memory Try exiting and restarting QDS then repeat this operation If the problem persists contact the QDS vendor Select About QDS under the Help menu for instructions on how to contact the vendo
102. Variables When you launch a second questionnaire the identifier variables of the current interview are automatically copied to the destination questionnaire Nonidentifier variables The nonidentifer shared variable is specifed under Shared Variable on the Edit Element It can be any variable previously defined in the questionnaire except for Automatic Today s Date type Automatic Current Time type or the subcomponent of another variable Requirements In order for shared variables to be copied they must have the same name and consistent response sets QDS will copy a response from one interview to another only when the second questionnaire contains a variable gt With the same variable name as in the first questionnaire gt With the same response type as in the first questionnaire Edit Elements 67 gt With a valid response set in relation to the first questionnaire variable s response set gt That is NOT an automatic type variable For example if the Subject ID is 1000 and the Subject ID field of the second file has a range of 1 to 100 the response will not be copied Also if the shared variable contains a Don t Know and the corresponding variable in the second file doesn t allow Don t Know the response will not be transferred Destination variables in the second questionnaire can be any type of Data Element but cannot be automatic If the shared sending variable is Automatic Numeric then the receiving var
103. W Working With Multiple Sites 185 Finally we sent our shipment file First Questionnaire Site 1 QTD to our data coordinating center Site 2 At Site 2 we initially created a new local data warehouse called First Questionnaire Site 2 QDW Next we added the following data files to this warehouse First Questionnaire Site 2 1 QAD Data collected with CAPI at Site 2 time 1 First Questionnaire Site 2 2 QAD Data collected with CAPI at Site 2 time 2 Note that we renamed the QAD files following data collection so that they would have unique names in this case the names reflect the site and data collection time instance After we transferred all cases to the local warehouse First Questionnaire Site 2 QDW their status changed from Complete to Transferred in the QAD files All these cases were in the same version Next we created a new shipment file First Questionnaire Site 2 QTD and selected all cases in our local warehouse for shipment As we transferred our local warehouse cases for shipping their status changed from Complete to Shipped in First Questionnaire Site 2 QDW Finally we sent our shipment file First Questionnaire Site 2 QTD to our data coordinating center Data Coordinating Center At the data coordinating center we first created a new local warehouse called First Questionnaire Central QDW Next we added the following shipment files to this one warehouse First Questionnaire Site 1 QTD S
104. a Collection Products ccsssccccsecsesceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeesneeenseeeeesees 85 Default Naming Conventions ccsseccceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeseseaeenseeeeeeeeseseaeseseneeeeeeeeas 86 Building Study Documentation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeneees 87 B ildinga CODCD OOK ives aic chicas Se a nteccce anane amaaa ennaa aaeain aeaa Anea aeS Seakan aeaa aaaea 87 Building a Change History File ccceeccesecessseeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeeeeeesenaesnseeeeeneeneas 87 Building a Printable Questionnaire s sssssuuneuunnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 89 Questionnaire Build Options ceccceecceeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaaeseaeenaeeseeeeiaeenaees 89 Working with Paper and Pencil Forms Using the Data Entry Module esvertteuertugsettuktetEuEAEKEAEEEbSRSEEKEAEAEKESEREEENRE 91 Building a Data Entry Control File cccccscssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesnaeenseeeesenesesnaeseseeeeneeeeeeas 91 Data Entry Build Options ccccscssseeeeeeeeeeeeee sce seeseeeeeeeeeseaesasaaesaseeeeeeeeseseaesaseeeeeeneeeeas 91 Windows Mac Tab 92 DOS Vea BEE 93 Operations Tab 93 Opening a Data Entry Application cecccscesesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesceeseseeeeneeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeneas 93 Data Entry Open Dialog BOX iizcccsctevccnctesscecessanecevinsaccneeteaceuncensadtesheadeesnveeceeussasevceneans 93 e 94 Data Entry Menu CommandsS scccsteceseeeeeeeee
105. a single export file The value table uses five fields to express the value of a variable Value Get A code indicating whether a value has been set and the type of value Value A single normal response value was entered DK The special value Don t Know was entered Refused The special value Refuse to Answer was entered NA The special value Not Applicable was entered Skipped This variable was skipped by a branching instruction Empty This variable was never reached or was not in the source version Numeric Code The numeric value or code representing this response Text Display A text description display of this response Range Bottom The lower limit of the QDS range for this value Range Top The upper limit of the QDS range for this value Save As Options Relational Database Relational Database Options x M Include Interviewer Comments table M Include Hits table T Include empty value rows const After selecting MS Access Relational Database from the Save As box the Options box will open The following options may be set Include Values table Check to include a table of data responses entered for each question of each interview The default setting is checked Include Interviewer Comments Check to include a table of interviewer comments entered for each interview The default setting is checked Include Hits table 00000 Check to include a tab
106. ame Folder name For CAPI and ACASI this name is used to create a subfolder that will reside under the folder that contains the current control file For HAPI this name will be used to create a subfolder under the My Documents directory on the Pocket PC Prompt to view report If checked the user is prompted to view the report immediately after it has been generated Header text This is an optional field that contains text for the document header Header alignment Choice of paragraph alignment in document header The default is left justified Footer text This is an optional field for text for the document footer Footer alignment Choice of paragraph alignment in document footer The default is left justified Orientation Portrait or landscape orientation The default is portrait Contents Tab You will type in the body of your report on the Contents tab Report content can include open text variable response data including automatic variables substitutions tokens page breaks and formatting In the example below we have specified that some demographic question responses will be listed out on the first page and some health variable responses will be listed on the second page See Substitution Tokens in Reports on page 72 Custom Reports 71 Report Element Contents Fonts Applicability Notes Insert new page Contents Demographics Gender
107. ame gt which is duplicated in Element Warning Element redefines Variable lt Variable Name gt Information in Element may be lost Note This warning is only issued for Automatic Variables Branching Element branches over count Elements past the end of the questionnaire Element branches to an undefined marker lt marker name gt Element branches to Marker lt marker name gt which is earlier in the questionnaire Element loops back count Elements past the beginning of the questionnaire Element loops back to Marker lt marker name gt which is later in the questionnaire Edit Launch Warning Element does not specify a control file for the x language Element references a variable s that cannot be shared across questionnaires 84 QDS Questionnaire Development System Custom Reports Element has no report details for the x language Element requires prior collection of ID variable s to form unique file name Warning element may require prior collection of ID variable s to form unique file name Element contains a substitution form that is invalid for automatic variable s Miscellaneous Element has been corrupted and cannot be processed Please delete it Element is gender specific but gender has not yet been ascertained Element may not reset Gender Applicability established in Element Element produces an improper Variable Name lt Variable Name gt The name must begin wit
108. ame gt with a Response Type that is not appropriate for a Subject ID There is no Data Element for the Interview Date Time Variable lt Variable Name gt There is no Data Element for the Interview ID Variable lt Variable Name gt There is no Data Element for the Site ID Variable lt Variable Name gt There is no Data Element for the Subject ID Variable lt Variable Name gt Question Numbers Beginning at Element the Question Numbers are out of sequence but locked Element resets the Question Number Integer to a number already used Element resets the Question Number Prefix to prefix which is also set in Element Languages Card lt Response Card name gt has no translation for the lt language name gt language for response item Element has no character string for the lt language name gt language Element has no information text for the lt language name gt language Element has no message text for the lt language name gt language Element has no question text for the lt language name gt language Element has no translation for the lt language name gt language for response item Table Element does not have lt language name gt language translations for all category labels Validating Your Specifications 83 Tables Element Element type is not allowed inside a Table Note Element type can be section header subject ID gender Element checklist info Element edit Element marker Elem
109. amp GENDER Date of Birth amp D0B Race amp RACE Health Results amp EARLY amp EARLY Formatting Options for formatting include Select the Insert new page button to insert a hard page break into your report The break will be inserted at the location of the input caret in the Contents field In the example above a page break is inserted before the Health Results section The main menu commands Editl Bold talic and Underline may be used in the Contents box e To insert a line break enter Ctrl Enter e To insert a tab enter Ctrl Tab Fonts Tab The Fonts tab defines the font names and font sizes used in the report Fonts can be specified for six categories of text Header Footer Free text Question text Probe text Response text and Comments text In addition you can specify a font style bold italics or underline for Response and Comments text Header text Probe text Times New Roman 14 p Change Times New Roman 12 pt Change Footer text Response text Times New Roman 10pt Change Times New Roman 11 pt Change Free text Comment text Times New Roman 12pt Change Times New Roman 11 pt Change Question text Times New Roman 12 pt Change 72 QDS Questionnaire Development System Applicability Tab Applicability can be specified for gender and for interview method this option has no impact on paper questionnaires and the Data Entry Modu
110. an ACASI interview 1 Locate the ACASI control file QSD in My Computer or Windows Explorer The default control file name is the Specifications Filename En ACASI QST 2 Double click on the control file 3 Your ACASI application will open to the first screen of the questionnaire Unique Identifier Lk Foi Cl Lei aas El D I Note the ACASI screen is the same as the CAPI screen however there is no menu bar and there is an additional button at the bottom right Repeat the Question 150 QDS Questionnaire Development System shortcut on the desktop is a good method for keeping the interview process You may also create a Windows shortcut for the ACASI control file Placing a as simple as possible ACASI Open Dialog Box Alternately it is possible to open your interview through the Open dialog box in versions prior to 2 4 it was necessary to use the Open dialog box to begin the CAPI Application The ACASI Open dialog box is similar to the CAPI Open dialog box and displays the following LOOK EE Displays the control file location File name uci eet eee eet ete ete Displays the control file name Files Of type ceccccccceceteteeeees Displays QDS ACASI Control Files QSI Begin a new interview Select to start a new interview default Resume a prior interview Select to resume a previously interrupted interview If necessary navigate to the c
111. and allows selection of a particular case Data entered using the QDS Data Entry Module are written out to QDS Paper Interview Data QPD Files There is no limit to the number of interviews that may be stored in a single QPD file or to the number of QPD files that may be created for a single questionnaire 100 QDS Questionnaire Development System QDS File Names for Data Entr Data Entry Module QDE EXE Data Entry Control Ee QDE Data Entry Datatile QPD Deleting Undeleting Interviews If you need to delete an interview go to InterviewlDelete Interview This will delete the current interview as displayed on the status bar at the bottom The entered items for this interview will now appear grayed out and the status bar and dialog box will display Deleted To undelete a deleted interview navigate to the record you wish to undelete and select InterviewlUndelete Interview Test the Data Entry Module using the First Questionnaire Example DE QDE Data Entry Control File Double clicking on the control file in Windows Explorer My Computer will open the Data Entry Open dialog box Default file name and build options were used Verification of Data Entry When conducting data entry from paper forms it is not mandatory but is highly recommended that you perform double keying also known as key verification The process involves a second keying of data during which values are compared with those entere
112. and b is the Suffix The Prefix may initially be set as one of the QDS Data Defaults and may be omitted or changed using Section Header Elements The default prefix is Q The Integer is determined automatically by QDS starting with 1 and continuing sequentially The default sequential numbering may be overridden using Section Header or Format Elements The Suffix is optional If a suffix is specified the first character must be a letter Question Suffix You may optionally enter a question suffix to be appended to the question number integer For example to number a question Q24a rather than Q24 enter a in the Question Suffix box A new suffix may or may not indicate a new integer For instance the letter a inserted into the Question Suffix box of the Data Element following Q28 may correspond to Q28a or Q29a QDS assumes that you want Q28a but allows you to override this assumption using the Increment Question Number Integer option see below Increment Question Number Integer Check this box to force QDS to increment the Integer for that element For example to achieve the following sequence Q1 Q2a Q2b check the Increment Question Number option on the Q2a to increase the question number integer between the first Q1 and second Q2a element If this option is not checked the question numbers Q1 Qla and Q1b will be assigned Question Number This box displays the current question number including Prefix and Suffix
113. and click the Standard _Deveconsie button Click OK OK DE If you go back into Cancel_ ViewlVersions you will see that the bull s eye has moved to the new Standard version WEE Understanding How QDS Defines Reconciliation Rules Now that a standard version has been selected define the rules for reconciliation There are many types of changes you might make once data collection has begun that would result in substantively different versions you might add and or delete items reword a question or add new response categories for an item During reconciliation QDS will evaluate the differences between versions and prompt you for some decisions Working With Multiple Versions 173 QDS will always try to find the best possible match for each variable The criteria used by QDS to determine whether a variable in a nonstandard version matches a variable in the standard are Creation Time The date time that the element was inserted into the Design Studio Note Internal information accessible only to QDS Variable Name The variable name from the Data tab on a Data Element Question Text The question text from the Data tab on a Data Element Response Type The Response Type from the Data tab on a Data Element Code List The code list from the Response tab on a Data Element Reconciliation Rules Comparison Criteria 6 indicates a match between variables in standard versi
114. are related to the question number e g the default variable name for Question 1 would be V1 if the question order is changed or new questions are inserted variable names will change accordingly This can cause confusion because identical variable names could correspond to different data items in each version of your questionnaire For instance Data Elements 35 Version 1 Version 2 Q1 Subject ID eessen v1 Q1 Subject ID eeeeeeeeee Vi Q2 Gender esseSNEESRENeen v2 Q2 Geel cecceeceeceereeeeees v2 Q3 AGG i scciceniccsicccesscccersstecsterses V3 Q3 Race Ethnicity V3 Q4 Age isccsiecsiccsecseccccrieisecevics V4 In the example above the Race Ethnicity item was inserted between the Gender and Age questions causing the question numbers and variable names to adjust accordingly The result is a variable named V3 in both versions but in Version 1 V3 contains Age information and in Version 2 it contains Race Ethnicity data Often variables are named to reflect item content For example the interview date variable might be named INTDT You can see how this eliminates the problems in the previous example Version 1 Version 2 Q1 Subject ID SUBJECT Q1 Subject ID SUBJECT Q2 Gender e GENDER Q2 Gender GENDER Q3 Age issis AGE Q3 Race Ethnicity RACE Q4 Age een AGE Variable Label The Variable Label box is used to enter a descriptive label for the data element Variable labe
115. ariable calculation you may refer to them as follows Don t KNOW ssssiesne DK Refused to Answer REF Not Applicable NA Dkipoped SK Missing a single period Special Codes 223 For example if you want to skip over some items in your form if the response to VARI is equal to Don t Know or Refused to Answer you would enter the skip instruction as VARI DK or VARI REF where VARI is a previously created Data Element See Skips and Markers on page 59 for more information on branching and skip instruction elements Substitution Tokens 225 SUBSTITUTION TOKENS You may sometimes want to display the response to an earlier question or the result of a calculation QDS allows you to do this through the use of substitution tokens Substitution tokens may be used in Data Element question text Information Element text and Edit Element instructions Substitution tokens are required within QDS tables See the next section Tables on page 229 for more information Substitution Token Syntax A substitution token always begins with an ampersand amp this indicates to QDS that a substitution needs to be made The following are valid substitution tokens QQ ee Inserts the Question Number for the current Data Element Reie Boegen Inserts the Question Number Prefix for the current Data Element AN ooon Inserts the Question Number Integer for the current Data Element EEN Inserts the Question Number Suff
116. ary 1 Open the WinDic program WinDic EXE located in c Program Files QDS 2 4 Admin 2 Select FilelNew 3 Create anew file named USER_US TAB USER_US TAB is the filename QDS expects for a custom dictionary created or edited using any text editor It is recommended that you use the WinDic program as the text editor This will allow you to test the pronunciation as you go Source files are simple text files with a file extension of TAB and may be 4 Enter the word to be defined 5 Enter a space followed by the phonemic string enclosed in square brackets See the QDS Design Studio online help for a complete list of phoneme codes under the topic DECtalk Dictionaries For example a sample source file for a study of sexually transmitted diseases might include ti windic C Program Files QDS v2 Admin User_us tab OF x File Edit Translate Language Help Pronounce Word Previous ID ay diy HIV eych ay viy STD ehs tiy diy Gonorrhea gaon or iyaall 6 To check phonemic strings place the cursor on the line to be tested and select Pronounce Word 7 Correct your phonemic strings as needed and save your updated source file ACASI 145 8 Move to the next line of the source file and repeat steps 4 through 7 until all words have been defined 9 To create the Custom Dictionary File select Filel Compile Dictionary 10 If there are any problems with your source file e g a pho
117. as Hide response p Enable keyboard for Default Blank password ACASI Use a Text response to record open ended text For text fields the primary options to specify on the Response Set tab are 1 Maximum number of characters to allow and 2 Maximum approximate number of characters to display on screen in an automated interview Other text options are Allow Blank Hesponse AA Check if a blank response is allowed Default is unchecked i e a response is required Allow Don t know Check if a response of Don t Know is allowed Default is checked i e Don t Know is allowed Allow Reiused AAA Check if a response of Refused is allowed Default is checked i e Refused is allowed Allow Not Applicable AAA Check if a response of Not Applicable is allowed Default is checked i e Not Applicable is allowed Data Elements 53 Hide response password Use this option if you do not want the value entered to be visible on the screen The default is unchecked i e response will be visible as it is entered Convert all letters to upper case Check this box to automatically convert the entire text response to uppercase Default is unchecked Remove leading epaces AA Check this box to automatically remove leading spaces For example if this box is checked a response entered as Sunday would be written out as Sunday the three leading blanks have been removed Default is checked Bypass ke
118. as the default for date elements You may leave this field blank for no minimum QDS Default Settings 207 Latest date allowed Enforce range date or enter CURRENT to make the earliest allowable date the date of the interview ger Enter the latest allowable date to be used as the default for date elements You may leave this field blank for no maximum date or enter CURRENT to make the latest allowable date the date of the interview ree Check this box to prevent a date outside the allowable range for a Data Element to be entered If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range dates but they will be allowed Times Data Elements Styles Standard Codes Numbers Text Dates limes Standard Components m Format for hour Full Time 24 Hour C Hour amp Minutes Only C 12 Hour Hour Only C Fixed Hour i J Allow Substitute Earliest time allowed IT Missing Minutes IT Missing Seconds F Use keypad for ACASI Standard Components Format for hour Allow Missing Minutes Substitute Missing Minutes Allow Missing Seconds Minutes D Seconds po Latest time allowed pannan M Enforce range EAER All time elements must include at least the hour Optionally they may also include the minute s or minute s and second s Select Full Time if most time elements will include the hour minute and second Te The hour co
119. at have already been converted to the standard to their original version Therefore it is very important to make sure that your rules are correct before converting IS Converting Cases to the Standard Version Once you have completed the reconciliation process and backed up your warehouse and checked your rules you must still convert the cases to the standard The reconciliation process merely tells QDS how to convert from one version to another it does not actually conduct the conversion process To convert a version to the standard highlight the case s to be converted from the local warehouse and select EditiConvert to Standard Version It is strongly recommended that you back up your warehouse data and carefully review your reconciliation rules before actually converting data to a standard version Once cases are converted you CANNOT undo the conversion Working With Multiple Versions 179 Remember only standard versions are included in data exports from the warehouse This may include cases that were originally conducted using the standard as well as those conducted using older versions that have been converted to the standard This restriction is necessary so that the resulting database will have a single structure that can be read by other database programs such as SAS and SPSS See Exporting Data on page 187 Converting Multiple Versions to the Standard As you progress in data collection for your study it is possible th
120. at you will go through several different versions of your QDS instrument You will most likely be adding data to your local warehouse as you go along When you expect to have more than two versions of your data we recommend that you reconcile convert versions sequentially as you go through data collection 1 Reconcile convert Version 1 to Version 2 2 Reconcile convert Version 2 to Version 3 Note This includes cases originally collected with Version 1 which have already been converted to Version 2 3 Reconcile convert Version 3 to Version 4 Note Includes cases originally collected with Versions I and 2 which have already been converted to Version 3 When forms are reconciled and converted using this procedure it is easier for QDS to track subsequent changes to each version EH Exporting Reconciliation Rules If you are conducting a multisite study it is recommended that you define one set of reconciliation rules for use at all sites to ensure that everyone is using the same set of rules Because reconciliation rules can be complicated for lengthy questionnaires sending a printout of your rules and asking everyone to follow them is a less than ideal solution It is not necessary to do this Once you have defined reconciliation rules you can export them from one warehouse to another i e you can define them at a central location and export them for distribution to each research location Once the reconciliation rules have be
121. ate and time of day you will enter your response using the soft input panel with any method your device supports For dates you will see a blank template that you need to follow for input For example fg QDS HAPI I find it difficult to find time for regular physical exercise Agree or disagree Strongly Agree Strongly Disagree ee pS DRA B Interview Tools 2 gt E Zig QDS HAPI When did you start to experience these symptoms Month Day Year Interview Tools 2 gt For the above example 08 10 1950 would be a valid response HAPI will not allow you to enter invalid characters or out of range responses 128 QDS Questionnaire Development System Time of day provides a similar input For example Hour Minutes Seconds where 12 20 00 would be a valid response Open Text Numeric and Time Span As with date and time questions you will enter any free text or numbers with your preferred input options Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer or Transcriber Entering Special Code Responses in HAPI The HAPI module offers the same special code options as other QDS interview modules Don t know Refuse to answer and Not applicable These are entered by tapping the D R or N as follows H A EE Don t know Nr BE Refuse to answer BEE Not applicable All three special response buttons are located on the bottom left hand side of the HAPI screen D B
122. ault settings work for most situations the Data Entry Build Options allow you to refine settings relating to missing values verification and data entry screen navigation To access the Data Entry Build Options 1 Select Build IData Entry Application 2 Click on Options The Data Entry Build Options window has Operations DOS and Windows Mac tabs Available options are described below 92 QDS Questionnaire Development System Windows Mac Tab Operations DOS Windows Mac r Function keys Don t Know Tab automatically when a Fo M field is filed Refused r Prompt before saving Fo changes Not Applicable Show message upon Fl e verification check erification che GE r Allow a missing value for Ei e all non ID fields Check mark E Replace entered values EE e with skip code ij QDS is currently available only for Windows The following options are available on the Windows tab Display all code values Tab when filled Prompt before saving Show verification message Allow a missing value Replace entered values Function keys Displays a list of codes and code values for each field When unchecked the code values are available on request By default this box is not checked Note This feature does not work codes are available only upon request Automatically proceeds to the next field once the current field has been filled If this box is not checked the operator must press the
123. aved into the same folder as the control file QPI and data file QAD 20 QDS Questionnaire Development System Other Features to Explore There are other QDS features that you will want to explore further in this manual Survey Design Data Encryption ccsssseesseseeees Add automatic encryption or read modify data password Response Carrds ss cccesseeeeees Create response sets to be used repeatedly Table Elements sssccsssesseee Repeat series of questions for multiple categories Edit Elements sccsssseeessseeeees Use internal consistency checking launch another interview file Marker Element 0ssssessesees Use destination points for edit and skip elements Automatic Variables 00 Calculate variables to store in your data file Customized Report Elements Select variables formatting and add text for a custom RTF report Summary Reports ccseeees Generate a list of all collected data in an RTF report Multiple Languages ssssse Create your survey in multiple languages from one design file QDS supports characters from the Roman alphabet using the MS Sans Serif font QDS does not support Cyrillic Greek or Asian character sets at this time Interviewing Handheld device cccssssse Create interviewer administered surveys for the Pocket PC with the HAPI module AUdIO VO CE ieee Use computer generated voice or recorded WAV fil
124. ay be instances in which you will want to conduct interviews in more than one language Although it cannot translate for you QDS provides you with an easy to use interface for entering translations Each questionnaire you create with QDS has only one specification file regardless of the number of languages into which it is translated The advantage is that any changes e g range restrictions skip patterns need be made only once Because they are built from the same specifications you do not need to worry about whether the English version of your questionnaire is using the same rules as the Spanish as long as your translations are accurate they will always match determined by your Windows system settings If your system language is set to something other than English United States that is the language that will appear The default language displayed by QDS e g English United States is The process is simple Create your specifications file as you would for any single language instrument Once the specifications have been reviewed and tested add languages and translations as necessary Separate control files questionnaires will be built for each language Languages Not Supported by QDS QDS supports characters from the Roman alphabet using the MS Sans Serif font QDS cannot display Cyrillic Greek or Asian character sets We hope to add this ability in future releases of QDS EH Entering Translations Translating E
125. ays enabled for items with the keyboard support option checked on the Response Set tab and elements with No Audio entered for the Audio File name Check this box to disable the Refuse to Answer bution for all questions during an ACASI interview The button can be re enabled by simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse buttons in the upper right corner of the ACASI screen Default setting is not checked Check this box to hide buttons for disallowed Special Codes i e Don t Know Refused to Answer or Not Applicable If this option is not checked buttons for disallowed codes will appear grayed out i e not enabled Default setting is not checked Leave this box checked to replace previously entered values with a skip code if a response is changed that triggers a new skip pattern When a response is changed it can affect subsequent branching paths and may cause previously answered items to be skipped Uncheck this box to retain prior values The default setting is to replace previously entered values This setting will be overridden by settings on individual Skip Elements Check this box to prohibit access to completed interviews Interrupted incomplete interviews can still be resumed but once an interview has been completed the user will not be able to reopen it using the ACASI program Check this box to disable the Interviewer Comments keyboard commands Ctrl C and F2 during an ACASI interview Disabling this feature w
126. b dictates how Special Codes Don t Know Refused Not Applicable should be handled when using this Data Element in a calculation or a conditional test For each Special Code there are three choices Data Elements 57 TAA g o EE Evaluate as if this Data Element had a value of zero Allowable range Evaluate as if this Data Element had an unknown value somewhere within the allowable range Limited range A Evaluate as if this Data Element had an unknown value somewhere within a more restricted specified range The default value for Don t Know and Refused is Allowable range and the default value for Not Applicable is Zero These instructions affect only the value used in performing internal calculations and do not alter the value stored in the raw data for this interview If Skipped Tab The If Skipped tab specifies how a Data Element will be interpreted for internal calculations and tests if it is skipped during the interview due to a branching instruction Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set When skipping this data element treat the SKIPPED code as IT Maximum if T Don t know if IT Refused if M NotApplicable if T Missing if There are six choices for how a skipped question will be evaluated Minimum Maximum Response of Don t know Response of Refused Response of Not Applicable Missing In QDS a missing value is treated as within the all
127. c and select Continuously 4 All files stored on your handheld device s My Documents folder including the QDS subfolder QDSv2 will be copied to this folder on your PC Once each Pocket PC has been configured to synchronize files you will only need to cradle the device to start the synchronization process Removing HAPI To remove HAPI from your device place the Pocket PC in the cradle and perform the following steps 1 2 3 4 Start Microsoft ActiveSync Select ToolslAdd Remove Programs from the menu bar From the Add Remove Programs dialog box clear the check next to NOVA Research QDS HAPI 2 4 Select OK Uploading HAPI Data Synching Handheld to Laptop Desktop Use the following steps to synchronize data between your Pocket PC and a laptop desktop PC 1 Place the Pocket PC into the cradle 2 If your device is password protected a password box will appear Enter the password for the Pocket PC 3 The device and laptop will begin synchronizing gt The QAD file and any reports RTF will be copied to the synchronization folder These will retain their original names gt If the QAD file filter is enabled the renamed file will be copied to that specified folder see QAD File Filter on page 131 4 When the Pocket PC has completed synchronizing the ActiveSync icon will be green and the message Synchronized will be displayed Information type and Status are listed below 134 QDS Ques
128. can be produced or updated using basic graphics software such as ClarisDraw Adobe Photoshop Paint Shop Pro or Microsoft Paint If you want to create your own versions of these picture buttons there are a few basic rules you need to follow Each button requires a set of four bitmap files One file shows how the button looks in its normal Up state A second shows how it looks when depressed A third shows how it looks when it has the focus The fourth shows the button when it is disabled and not selectable By convention the focus state usually looks the same as the normal Up state but with a dotted rectangle drawn inside the border For QDS the set of four bitmap files must all share the same file name except for the final letter which indicates the state U for Up D for Down F for Focused and X for Disabled The Yes button supplied with QDS uses files YES U BMP YES D BMP YES F BMP and YES X BMP Up Down Focused Disabled YES U BMP YES D BMP YES F BMP YES X BMP You may want to alter the appearance of these buttons depending on interview language mode of administration or operating platform The bitmap files supplied with QDS store these variations in separate folders keeping the same file names in each folder When you create an automated interview control file you can specify the folder to use for that product You can if you like change the appearance of the standard buttons using your favorite graphics package or you can
129. cations file 1 Select Options Data Defaults 2 Locate the options you would like to change and make desired changes 3 Click OK The Data Default settings tell QDS what values options to use when adding new elements to your form changing these default values will not change the specifications for any existing Data Elements Time Spans Special Codes Branching Calculations Data Elements Styles Standard Codes Numbers Text Dates Times There are eleven tabs under Options Data Defaults Data Elements Styles Standard Codes Numbers Text Dates Times Time Spans Special Codes Branching Calculations On each tab change the QDS preset defaults using the drop down check and text boxes Right click on an option to bring up the What s This help box for additional information about each default setting Tab options are as follows 202 QDS Questionnaire Development System Data Elements Data Elements Styles Question Number Prefix fe Variable Name va Audio File Name Prefix Question Number Prefix Variable Name Audio File Name Prefix Lock Question Number Integers Response Type Audio Interruptible Standard Codes Numbers Text M Lock Question Number Integers Response Type Yes No T Audio Interruptible Enter the default Question Number Prefix for all Data Elements The Prefix is a short string e g Q to precede the integer component of each automatica
130. cccecesseceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeesseneeeessseeaeeesseeaeess 183 Exp ning D la sorer E A AEA E 187 Exporting to SPSS ose ncvcstacessets cecccc ceceeenceeseneceenneuedete ewaneteencude diac renuczeenncdvederseniisvaneevenuetvis 188 SPSS Sav As Options wi siceeede dialed idnda inate 188 Exporting to a SAS Transport File ccccsccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaesesneeenseeesseaeseneenenseeeees 189 DAS Save e e e INTE 190 Converting SAS Transport Files to SAS Data Files cece eeeeeeeesseeseeeneeeneeeaes 191 viii QDS Questionnaire Development System Exporting to SAS Format Library Program ssscccseceeeseeesseeenseeeeeeeeesseeseseeneeseeees 192 Converting SAS Transport File to SAS Format CGatalog anneer nenenenn 192 Special Code Formatting EE 194 QDS SAS Format Program Conventions ccccscccsseeceseeeeeeeeesseeseseeeeeeeeeesnaeeeseeeeeenees 194 Special Format Processing for QDS Element Tvpes nee eer ereere 194 Format Naming Comventions 194 Exporting to MS Access Flat Database ccssecceseeseeeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeenseeeeeeeees 195 Bue 196 Save As Options Flat Database cccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeesaeeseeneees 196 Exporting to an MS Access Relational Database ccsssseceeeseeeeeenseseeeenees 197 Save As Options Relational Database cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteaeeesaaeeseeeeee 198 Exporting the Interviewer Comme
131. ck Save 5 You will then be prompted Would you like to open the RTF document now If you click Yes QDS will launch your default word processor e g Word WordPerfect and open the newly created Change History File Building Study Documentation 89 Ifyou respond No you will return to the Design Studio but the Change History File will still be created SSE EES SSS Building a Printable Questionnaire Even if you plan to conduct the bulk of your data collection via computer assisted interviewing you will most likely still want a paper copy of your interview This can be useful for reference when the power is out or if you do not have access to a computer for any other reason To build a paper questionnaire 1 Select Build Questionnaire Interviewer or Build Questionnaire Self Admin from the Design Studio menu 2 In the Save In drop down box select the folder in which you would like your file saved Default is the folder where your QDS file resides 3 In the File Name box enter the file name for your questionnaire file Default name for Interviewer Administered questionnaires is the name of the Specifications File plus en Qx RTF for Self Administered the name of the specification file plus en Self RTF 4 Select the Options button to refine settings for your questionnaire See Questionnaire Build Options below for details 5 Click Save You will then be prompted Would you like to open the RTF docu
132. code writes out formats from FirstQf XPT to a format library using the CNTLIN option in the SAS format procedure Convert SAS Transport File to a SAS Format Catalog libname library c QDS my data proc format library library cntlin FirstoOf run longer than 8 characters the generated format data set is truncated to 8 characters For example if the full SAS format XPT file name was FirstQformats XPT the truncated name should be referenced in the code cntlin FirstQfo In general it is simpler to limit SAS data set names to 8 characters or fewer If the name specified in the File Name box for the SAS format XPT file is Exporting Data 193 You can assign these formats to your SAS data set using the FORMAT statement imbedded in your SAS code or as a separate operation The SAS syntax file generated by the Warehouse Manager contains the FORMAT statement for that format library it was saved into the same location as the XPT file Format names sometimes but not always correspond to the variable names see ODS SAS Format Program Conventions on page 194 This example assigns formats to the FirstQ SAS data set Note that the appropriate library data and set statements were added as well as the SAS frequency procedure to verify the contents of the FirstQ data set Write out formats to SAS dataset libname demolib c QDS my data data temp set demolib FirstQ FORMAT VISIT VISIT D
133. control file QDS will check to see if a data file with the corresponding file name already exists Ifthe file C Research Folder First Questionnaire En CAPIL QAD already exists the new interview will be appended to the end of the existing data file Ifthe file does not exist a new data file named C Research Folder First Questionnaire En CAPI QAD will be started QDS File Names for CAPI CAPI Modull 1ccescseseseeeeeeees QPI EXE CAPI Control File cseceeeeee Ob CAPI Data File 1ccesceeceeeee QAD CAPI Report File ccsseseeee RTF Data files can be distinguished from report files by looking at the file extension CAPI data files end with the QAD extension CAPI report files end with the RTF extension Renaming CAPI Output Data Files QAD We recommend that you rename your QAD data file and back it up to another location on a regular basis After renaming your QAD file QDS generates a brand new QAD file and adds the next interview to the new file One possible renaming scheme is to use the date and location computer if applicable to indicate when and where the file was closed Until you move or rename your data file interviews will continue to be appended to the end of the current QAD file As soon as the current QAD file is moved or renamed the next CAPI interview will create a new QAD file For example on a weekly basis you could rename your C Research Folder
134. conventions make it easy for you to keep track of which data collection and documentation files are associated with each Specifications File Note You cannot change the file extensions e g QDE QPI QST of the control files The sections that follow examine each product individually starting with the paper forms the Codebook Change History and Paper Questionnaires Building Study Documentation 87 BUILDING STUDY DOCUMENTATION Building a Codebook The Analytical Codebook lists question numbers variable names variable labels code ranges and item length Once you have started analysis the Codebook will be an invaluable tool Variable Names Contents of Variable Name box on Data Element tab Variable Labels 00 000000000100 Contents of Variable Label box on Data Element tab Code Hanges Numeric ranges from Data Element and Response Set tabs Item Length cee eeeeeeeeeee For numeric variables code range e a range of 1 to 100 will have a length 3 from Data Element and Response Set tabs for Text Elements length is set on the Response Set tab To build your Codebook 1 Select BuildlCodebook from the Design Studio menu 2 In the Save In drop down box select the folder in which you would like your file saved Default location is the folder where the Specifications File resides 3 In the File Name box specify a name for the Codebook File Default file name is the name of your specifications file na
135. d received by the Data Coordinating Center The Warehouse Manager facilitates reconciling multiple versions of your questionnaire to one standard version and allows export of QDS questionnaire data to SPSS SAS or MS Access database formats for analysis and reporting retaining variable names and labels Recap In short the general process is to Create a specifications file using the Design Studio Build a control file from Design Studio Collect data using your control file in conjunction with one or more Data Collection modules Export data for analysis using the Warehouse Manager Now let s learn more about getting started and creating a questionnaire using the QDS Design Studio Module Getting Started 7 Getting Started We would like to briefly introduce you to the QDS system and walk you through creating your first data collection instrument using QDS For this introduction we will design a short set of questions for a questionnaire and build a CAPI interview E In the sample file Survey1 QDS you can see the final version for the steps ES outlined below Designing a Questionnaire Creating Specifications File Opening the Design Studio Module The first step to creating our questionnaire or Specifications File is opening the Design Studio Module QDS EXE Go to Programs Questionnaire Development System 2 4 Questionnaire Design Studio from the Windows Start menu The Design Studio Modu
136. d Response is used to enter a numeric value within a specified range The range is specified on the Response Set tab in the Design Studio If a value entered is outside the allowed range an error window will be displayed Press OK to return to the keypad and enter a new value If the Enforce Range box has not been checked on the Response Set tab you will be allowed to override the range In these instances a warning message will still be displayed however you will be given options to accept or reenter the value If the Enforce Range button has been checked you will be required to enter a value within the valid range in order to continue Decimals may or may not be permitted again this is determined in the specification file on the Response Set tab If decimals are not permitted the decimal point button at the lower right will be disabled grayed out If negative values are permitted use the key to change the sign of the value you have entered Press the Clear button to erase any value you have entered and start over CAPI 115 Scale Response Scale Responses consist of a linear scale with a fixed number of points displayed vertically or horizontally Text is displayed at each end of the scale describing the extreme endpoints anchor points of the scale Specifics regarding the display and labeling of intermediate points and display and keyboard entry of numeric values are set on the Response Set tab in the specification fil
137. d during the first keying The second keyer should be a different individual from the first The operator performing the second keying or verification cannot see the previously entered values Any discrepancies detected during verification must be resolved before the operator can move on to the next item in the data file This process helps ensure accurate keying from the paper form to the data file During the verification process the data entry operator is not shown values keyed during the initial data entry If the value entered by the verification operator matches the value on file the Data Entry Module continues to the next field When a discrepancy is detected the operator must read and enter the value again If the newly entered value now matches the value on file the process continues If the newly entered value matches the value entered during verification the value on file is changed If the newly entered value matches neither the verification operator must continue reentering the value until it matches the original value or until the same new value is entered twice in succession The Data Entry Module 101 It is highly recommended that you select the Show Verification Message Build Option When this option is selected a message window will pop up whenever a verification discrepancy is encountered Because this window requires acknowledgment from the user user must select OK to continue it limits the possibility that a verifie
138. data entry without selecting a value click Ese or the Close Window button Entering Check Each Items For Check Each Response Type items you may enter the appropriate numeric value default is 0 not checked 1 checked or click the Check toolbar button Gel You may also view values for checked not checked using the CodelShow List command as described in the previous section 98 QDS Questionnaire Development System Entering Special Code Responses There are three ways to enter a Special Code e Don t Know Refused to Answer or Not Applicable in the Data Entry Program Select CodelDon t Know Refused Not Applicable Missing e Click appropriate toolbar button D RENT Select appropriate Function key The Function key assigned to each Special Code is specified in the Data Entry Build Options Default values are F8 Don t Know F9 Refused to Answer and F10 Not Applicable Only Special Codes that are allowed based on Data Element Response Set tab settings will be enabled You do not need to record skip codes for correctly bypassed questions The Data Entry Module will automatically fill items skipped as a result of branching and Skip Elements with S Special codes are displayed in the Data Entry program as follows D Don t Know P Refused to Answer N Not Applicable S Skipped Missing See Entering Missing Values below Entering Missing Values By default missing values are not allowed
139. defined Function An unknown function is being referenced See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Undefined Marker This element branches to a Marker Element that is not in the questionnaire To correct this error 1 Correct the marker ID in the branch instruction 2 Change the branch instruction to Next or Skip or 3 Add a Marker Element with this ID Undefined Variable Calculation The expression specified for this element includes a reference to a variable that is notin the questionnaire To correct this error 1 Change the expression to reference a different variable 2 Add anew Data Element to create the variable or 3 Change the variable name of the Data Element that creates the variable you want Undefined Variable Substitution The substitution token references a variable that is notin the questionnaire To correct this error 1 Change the substitution form to reference a different variable 2 Add anew Data Element to create the variable or 3 Change the variable name of the Data Element that creates the variable you want Unexpected Character The character noted in the message is not allowed in QDS expressions See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Unmatched Parentheses A right parenthesis was found with no matching left parenthesis The problem may be a mixing of braces and
140. defined on the Options gt Interview Options gt Identifier Variables property page When you enable reports for a CAPI interview QDS produces an RTF file containing question number variable name variable label and response including applicable value labels for that individual interview You will have a separate report file for each CAPI interview If you also select the option Prompt to View Report a message box will pop up after the interview has been saved reading Interview Data has been written to the file First Questionnaire Example En CAPI 100 RTF Would you like to open the document now If you select Yes the report will open in your default word processor The sample below contains the report generated from the First Questionnaire Example survey where the subject ID was 100 Note that the subject ID 100 appears in the file name following the prefix The question number appears in the first column followed by variable name and variable label The response and corresponding value label appear beneath the variable label if there is no value label the response value appears again In the following sample the value chosen for GENDER was 2 with the value label of Female 110 QDS Questionnaire Development System First Questionnaire Example En CAPI 100 RTF Q1 SUBJECT Subject ID Value 100 100 Q2 GENDER Respondent s Gender Value 2 Female Q3 DOB Dake oss Etage Value 09 12 1940 Q
141. dify Pa na This is a short descriptor to appear beside the value For example a question about the respondent s income might have a tag of INCOME The text entered in this box will appear beside the response box on the interview screen The Tag is optional and may be left blank UNIS oea Select the appropriate unit The specific units listed are determined by Windows based on the system locale For instance for the US you may select Dollars or Cents Special Codes You may choose to allow Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable by checking these boxes default setting is checked In the box to the right you may modify the value to indicate the Special Code Minimum Allowable Value Enter the smallest amount to be allowed for this Data Element Maximum Allowable Value Enter the largest amount to be allowed for this Data Element For ACASI use For automated interviews the numeric responses may be entered using Spin Controls or a keypad With Spin Controls the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease the displayed value until it is correct With a keypad the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Enforce Range n Check this box to prevent an entry outside the allowable range for a Data Element If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range items but they will be allowed If zero branch To You can specify a branching option to skip on
142. dio A sound card and speakers or headphones are required if you intend to use audio Conventions Used in This Manual Some standard conventions are used throughout this manual to make it easy to follow and understand Ea This symbol indicates a definition This symbol highlights additional information SE This symbol indicates a tip or trick 2 QDS Questionnaire Development System Menu Commands Menu items are indicated by a vertical pipe I followed by the option s to select For example FilelNew indicates that you should select the option New from the File menu Many QDS commands are available via drop down menus keyboard commands and toolbar buttons In this manual we will generally use the drop down menu Mouse Commands E Le EE Click the left mouse button once Double Click cceeceeeeeeeees Click the left mouse button twice Right Click Click the right mouse button once Drag and Drop eee Use the mouse to select one or more items hold the left mouse button down and move the item s to another part of the screen or window Sample Files Throughout this manual we refer to sample files to help illustrate certain actions These files are posted on NOVA s Web site at http www novaresearch com They are also included on the QDS installation CD and will be written to C Program Files QDS Sample Files during installation where corresponds to the version number e g 2 4
143. ds a QDS control file for administering an ACASI Audio assisted Computer Administered Self Interview interview In an ACASI interview respondents read are read the questions directly from EH the computer and enter their answers directly into the computer Codebook A Builds an RTF file containing question numbers variable names variable labels code ranges and item length for each item in your specifications file Change History Builds an RTF file documenting changes that were made to your QDS Specifications File Individuals administering the survey collecting data or performing data entry need access only to the control file and the corresponding data collection module They do not need to have access to the Design Studio or Design Specifications File Default Naming Conventions QDS employs default naming conventions for each data collection documentation product The list below shows default file names for a specifications file named Sample QDS Codebook s sssusssunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Sample Codebook RTF Change History c csscseseeeeees Sample History RTF Questionnaire Interviewer Sample EN Qx RTF Questionnaire Self Admin Sample EN Self RTF Data Entry Application Sample DE QDE CAPI Application ccssseeeens Sample EN CAPI QPI ACASI Application ccseeeee Sample EN ACASI QSI You can rename QDS files However keep in mind that the QDS naming
144. e For any of these variations responses may be entered by selecting the appropriate position along the scale using either the mouse or touchscreen You may also enter an appropriate numeric code using the keyboard Text Response Text responses may be entered using the keyboard or displayed buttons The blank key on the screen enters a single space Two sets of buttons are available for text responses one that displays letters only and a second that displays numbers and punctuation Press the Alt key to toggle between the two sets of buttons For response types that expect only a single button selection yes no pick one gender CAPI will automatically proceed to the next screen For other response types numeric check each open text you will need to select Next Question to proceed Entering Special Code Responses in CAPI The buttons for Special Codes Don t Know Refused to Answer CR and Not Applicable appear along the right edge of the screen for every question in a CAPI interview These buttons are enabled only if the Special Code is designated as allowable on the Response Set tab for that element Refuse to Answer You do not need to record Skip Codes for bypassed questions The CAPI program automatically fills items skipped as a result of branching and Skip Elements with the appropriate Skip Code Not Applicable EH Interviewer Comments While in the CAPI Module you may enter comments at any point in the in
145. e JOB Currently have a job FULLTIME Works full time 40 hours or EARLY like to get up early in the m EXERC try and exercise at least twi DIET try to stick to a healthy diet FRUIT Fruits eaten during past week SERVING How many servings of fruit a DOBY Year Date of Birth DOBM Month Date of Birth DOBD Day Date of Birth FRUITA Apples Fruits eaten during The Warehouse Manager 165 Part Of aiiis If the variable is a component part of a composite variable this item is the name of that composite variable Checklists dates times and time spans all have composite and component variables Pafta If the variable is a component part of a composite variable this item identifies which part is represented el seis kien A list of all code values and code labels defined for this variable At the bottom of both the Version and Variables tabs there is a Print button which will allow you to print the displayed information For the standard version in your warehouse file you will see an additional tab called Identifiers Version Variables Identifiers Site ID Variable Subject ID sie SUBJECT Additional ID variables needed to uniquely identify an interview MISIT This tab gives information on the Site ID Variable Name Subject ID name and any additional ID Variable s needed to uniquely identify an interview Clicking on the Change button will allow you to change your Identifier Variables
146. e for a Data Element to be entered If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range time spans but they will be allowed Time span variables write out multiple variables to the final data file The value of the time span response converted to the specified value unit is written out to a variable with the Data Element tab Variable Name Additionally separate Variables are written out with the values entered for each selected component For example for a Time Span response named TIME with Months and Years selected and Months designated as the value unit a response of 2 months and 1 year will result in the following variables being written to the data file TIME 14 TIMEY 1 and TIMEM 2 Data Elements 49 Response Set Local Currency Data Element Probes Applicability Styles l Calculations if Skipped Notes Response Set Tag Minimum amount For ACAL use gq Enforce f Spinner x Range Units Maximum amount If zero branch to Marker Dollars Hp Default for element m lf Don t Know branch same as lt p S D M Don t Know 97 Default C Zero Value lf Refused branch same as MV Refused 8 GG Default C Zero lt ta o lt rlf Not Applicable branch same as KR NotApplicable 99 C Default gros When the response for your Data Element is in Currency use this Response Type There are several options on the Response Set tab to review and possibly mo
147. e Type can be set to response card LIKELY This will automatically enter the responses associated with this response card on the Response Set tab for the current element without having to re enter the categories You can also copy response card s from one QDS specification file to another Note In order to select the response card type you must already have defined your response card Once you have created a response card you can select it as many times as you like as a Response Type for a Data Element Adding Response Cards To add a response card 1 Select ToolslResponse Card Card list Renove Copy Close 2 Click Add 242 QDS Questionnaire Development System 3 Enter a unique name for the card in the Card box Card Description i follow QDS variable Ge naming conventions SEKR e Pick one C Check all that apply C Numeric scale 4 Enter a description of the card in the Description box optional 5 Check the Physical Card box to include a message to the interviewer respondent to refer to a physical card e if the contents of the card will be printed and handed to a respondent during the interview Wem Description of category lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt Cancel 6 Choose the appropriate Response Type from the Selection type box Pick one Check all that apply or Numeric scale 7 Double click where indicated in the Description of catego
148. e a Category description amp TXT amp ALT or amp LBL Variable Name must include the Category Suffix amp C Question Suffix must include the Category Suffix amp C Failure to meet these requirements will result in a validation error It is recommended but not required that a category description amp TXT amp ALT or amp LBL be included in the variable label Tables 233 Adding a Data Element Data Elements within a table are inserted and defined in the same manner as Data Elements outside a table The only additional requirement is that Data Elements within a table include the required substitution tokens discussed above To insert a Data Element within a table 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Data Element 2 Enter the Data Element information including the required substitution tokens The screen shot below shows one of the Data Elements from the sample table Note amp SIXMO is a substitution token for a variable outside the table You may not use variables from the current table as part of a substitution token in a Table Element Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Text of Question Have you bought any amp TXT in the past 6 months thatis since amp SIXMO Question Suffix EE Question Number Response Type AC Number Integer fazac Yes No M Variable Name Variable Label Card Buvsec Bought in last 6 mo amp LBL Audio Fi
149. e a few additional items to consider before initiating the Build process Verify that the correct language is displayed in the Interview Language box on the Design Studio menu bar Tf not 1 Select LanguagelSelect and choose the language in which you need to build your questionnaire 2 Select the appropriate product from the Build menu e g BuildICAPI Application 3 Notice that QDS has added a two letter code to the default file name indicating the language associated with that control file e g Demo Fr CAPI QPI instead of simply Demo CAPI QPI If you wish you may change the output file name However it is strongly advised that you include some indication of the language in the file name 4 Click Save If you have paper interviews in multiple languages you can produce separate data entry applications for each language or you can enter data for all languages using the same application It will work either way and is a personal choice Working With Multiple Languages 251 Special Considerations for Building ACASI Control Files Text to Speech Engines If you plan to use DECtalk Text to Speech see Using Audio on page 145 you will need to have the appropriate version of the ACASI Module installed There are five versions of the ACASI Module each with a language specific text to speech engine US English UK English Latin American Spanish Castilian Spanish and German A French engine will be included in the next
150. e all Special Responses converted to their special codes as defined in the Design Studio Special Responses include Don t Know default 9 7 Refuse to Answer default 9 8 Not Applicable default 9 9 Skipped Exporting Data 197 default 9 9 and for paper interviews only Missing default 9 9 This is the default setting NUD ersun Select to have all Special Responses converted to a null field Range Bottom Select to have all Special Responses converted to the minimum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Top Select to have all Special Responses converted to the maximum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Middle Select to have all Special Responses converted to the midpoint of the allowable range for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Specified Values Select this to have all Special Responses converted to the values specified in the boxes to the right for numeric and text variables The suggested values in the boxes may be modified After you have finished updating and reviewing your options click OK Click the Save button to re create your file for export Data for all standard version interviews will be copied to the file The export file will include a single table with one field for each variable and one reco
151. e is omitted a result of MAYBE is treated like a result of FALSE Example IF 3 lt 5 x y returns x IF VAR gt 20 High IF VAR gt 10 Moderate Low You can specify multiple conditions by nesting an IF field inside an IF field Example In this example special rates are offered only to residents of California and Washington If the State field specifies any other state no additional text is printed because no alternative text has been specified in the second IF field IF STATE CA 10 Discount Available IF STATE WA 15 Discount Available Numeric Functions TRUNCATE Numeric Numeric Expression Returns the integer portion of a numeric value Example TRUNCATE 34 56 returns 34 Appendix A 255 Date Time Functions AGE Date1 Date2 Numeric Expression Calculates and returns a numeric age based on a birthdate Datel and a reference date Date2 Arguments must be either QDS full date variables automatic variables computed using DATEY MD or automatic variables of type Today s Date Arguments may not be string expressions dates entered directly into function e g AGE 10 17 1991 TODAY automatic variable string expressions Te 9 LONGDATE TODAY Example AGE DOB TODAY NOTE Age is not correctly calculated if reference date is birthdate e match on month and day Age is not incremented until day after birthday For example a clien
152. e modify procedures as for regular variables After you have completed changes to one or more subcomponent parts the main component value will be updated For example if you had a date variable for Date of Birth called DOB you will have the subcomponents DOBY DOBM and DOBD for the year month and day If you needed to correct the data for year and day you would change the values on DOBY and DOBD and the value for DOB would be updated accordingly Note Subcomponent parts are located at the end of the variable listing not directly after their corresponding main part iy In First Questionnaire QDW you can view the date of birth component zy variables DOBY DOBM DOBD and FRUIT check each variables FRUITA FRUITF at the bottom of the variable listing Modifying Automatic Variable Data Most automatic variables can be modified in the same fashion as other variables however it is not possible to change the value of a numeric type automatic variable If you attempt to make a change you will receive the message below when you click OK This is a feature we hope to add in a future release aN The Numeric Code is not valid for this variable It is also not possible to modify the values of automatic date or time of day variables if they were never calculated however you can update an automatic text variable that was never calculated The Warehouse Manager 161 If an interview is interrupted the automatic variables that were
153. e name En ACASI OST Click on the Options button to refine settings for your application See ACAST Build Options on page 138 Click Save 6 A dialog box will pop up A Script File has been produced Would you like to open the RTF document now 7 Click Yes to view the Script see Script Files on page 147 Click No to continue 8 You will be prompted The requested product has been built Would you like to try out the control file now QDS C The requested product has been built Would you like to try out the control file now 138 QDS Questionnaire Development System 9 Click Yes to try out your ACASI Application Click No to return to the Design Studio The control file will still be created 10 If you select Yes QDS will launch the ACASI program and open the newly created control file 11 You will go immediately to the first screen of the interview Continue reading to learn how to enter data The next section ACASI Build Options explains how to customize your ACASI screens in several ways including modifying font size changing space allotted for questions setting whether or not to display question numbers on the screen and changing keyboard mouse navigation options Options unique to ACASI include the ability to restrict the respondent s access to Refuse to Answer choices hide disallowed special response buttons control support for keyboard input and specify exit passwords ACASI Build
154. e or more element s or skip to a specified marker if the response is equal to zero See Skips and Markers on page 59 50 QDS Questionnaire Development System Click OK when you have completed these options Response Set Number Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations f Skipped Notes Response Set Tag Decimal places pounds f Minimum value Maximum value f fe Value M Don t Know 97 Value MV Refused 98 lt o D M NotApplicable 99 For ACASI use Enforce Spinner M Range If zero branch to Marker Defautt for element X rlf Don t Know branch same as Default C Zero If Refused branch same as Ge Default C Zero L mif Not Applicable branch same as C Default Zero The following options are available for numeric responses Decimal places AAA Special Codes Minimum value aaaaanaa0aanannenaaa Maximum value Enforce Range If zero branch to A short descriptor to appear beside the value For example a question about how many times the respondent did x might have a tag of TIMES This descriptor will appear beside the response blank on the data collection screen The Tag is optional and may be left blank The number of decimal places to be used for this Data Element The default setting is zero Indicate which Special Codes Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable are allowed by checking the appropriate bo
155. e the Change History document you will no longer be able to request that document If you select Cancel QDS will cancel your Save a Copy As request and will not change the discard option Constant Needs Ending Quote The expression includes a string enclosed in quotation marks buta matching pair was not found It may be that you used different types of quotation marks at the beginning and end of the string For example X NONE would produce this message See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Corrupted Element The specifications cannot be validated because this element cannot be read from the specifications file To fix the problem you can 1 Open the element Element View and restore its Specifications 2 Copy the element from an earlier version of the file or 3 Delete the element Corrupted Installation Options Your local installation options file UserO pts QDO has been corrupted or was written by a newer version of the Design Studio than the one you are running now The options have been restored to the system defaults provided as Factory Settings distributed with the QDS software Corrupted Options The Options settings for your questionnaire have been corrupted There may be physical damage to a portion of the specifications file Try validating the file to learn the extent of the damage Running a disk checking utility may help You may want to retu
156. e those values to be replaced by a skip code Uncheck this box to retain prior values The default setting is to replace previously entered values This setting will be overridden by settings on individual Skip Elements Disallow resumption 000 000 Check this box to prohibit access to completed interviews Interrupted incomplete interviews can still be resumed but CAPI 107 Pause between screens Function kees Appearance Tab The Appearance tab is used to refine settings related to the appearance of the screen once an interview has been completed the user will not be able to reopen it using the CAPI program This option determines the length of time a Data Element will remain on screen after a response has been entered default 500 milliseconds If zero is entered the screen may be cleared before the interviewer has time to verify the value entered Assigns Function keys to enter responses of Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable Select None if no Function key is assigned Operations Appearance Spin Controls Font size questions Font size buttons fi 4 X fi 4 X Space for Questions Shape of Standard Buttons Text 5 Focus rectangle displacement F Show Question Numbers l Key letter separator Directory for button bitmap files C Program Files QDSv2 Studio Bitmap32 En Keye Browse settings may be overridden by QDS in order to fit These settings apply to e
157. e your data once per day for data management purposes If possible keep all devices cradled when not in use to ensure that the devices are synchronized and their batteries remain charged La Wan HAPI 135 Warnings Regarding Synchronization The order in which you perform file management activities is very important If synching is not done in the correct order you can inadvertently delete your QAD data file For example if you conduct data management in this order ActiveSync will delete your data file from your device 1 Synchronize 2 Conduct additional interviews 3 Delete or rename your QAD file on your desktop 4 Place the device back in the cradle to synchronize again The QAD file will be deleted because removing the QAD file from the desktop is the most recent event and ActiveSync always keeps the device in sync with the desktop If you utilize the QAD file filter option this type of situation can be avoided since data files will always be renamed and copied to a separate folder location If you have difficulty synching you can also manually copy files from your device to the desktop 1 Open ActiveSync and click the Explore button 2 Open your QDS data folder default is QDSv2 3 Open your desktop Windows Explorer 4 Copy files from the ActiveSync data folder window to your desktop Explorer window as you would copy other files 136 QDS Questionnaire Development Sy
158. earliest date allowed is set to 01 01 1950 and the latest is 01 01 1980 We are allowing responses of Don t Know or Refused Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Components Format for year e Full Date e 4 digits C Current Year C Year amp Month Only 2 digits 19 C Fixed at C Year Only 2 digits 20 Earliest date allowed 12097 Iw Allow Don t Know Year 01 01 1950 v Allow Refused Year 2098 Latest date allowed Allow Not Applicable Year 01 01 1980 F Allow Missing Day Day Today s Date Allow Missing Month Month M Use keypad for ACASI QDS also supports several additional response types Gender Check all that apply Time Span Years Months Days Hours Minutes Seconds Time of Day Open Text Numeric Rating Scale Skip Instructions Often in your survey you will want to skip over one or more items based upon a response s to earlier questions In QDS this is accomplished by adding Skip Elements To briefly explore this QDS feature we will add two additional questions to our short questionnaire gt How many pets do you own gt How many of your pets receive regular veterinary care Since our new questions should only be asked if our participant reported owning a pet we would like to skip these for non pet owners To add our skip instruction 1 Highlight the Element directly below where you would like to insert your s
159. ed as underscores _____ three sided boxes __ __ __ or four sided boxes 000 Display list of values 0 If responses will be recorded by circling a code the numeric value associated with each code may be omitted from the paper questionnaire Check here to include numeric values Include special codes in list If responses will be recorded by circling a code the special codes Don t Know Refused to Answer Not Applicable may be omitted from the paper questionnaire Check here to include special codes Hide numeric code values For a self administered interview you may not want the respondent to see the numeric values assigned to code categories Click here to hide numeric values 204 QDS Questionnaire Development System Standard Codes Button Key Minimum Code Numbers Enter defaults for Yes No Gender and Check All questions To use the standard Yes No Male Female bitmaps leave the default settings as is To use a nonstandard picture provide a set of bitmap files and enter the appropriate file name excluding the final letter in this field See Creating Bitmap Files on page 277 for more information Determines keyboard shortcuts that may be assigned to Yes No and Male Female buttons for automated interviews For instance the default setting Y for Yes allows the interviewer to type the letter Y to select the Yes button De
160. ed in the list Invalid Code Pattern This is nota valid form for a code pattern You may not leave a code pattern blank even if you do not intend to include this type of special code in the questionnaire Invalid Currency QDS expects all monetary values to be entered in a form appropriate to your locale The form for your locale is determined by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel Invalid Date QDS expects dates to be entered in a form appropriate to your locale The form for your locale is determined by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel To see what today s date looks like in the required form press the Today s Date button Invalid Date Format The Format for year selection conflicts with the range of dates you have specified You need to change the Format for year the Earliest date allowed or the Latest date allowed so that all three are compatible Invalid Date Range You have specified an impossible range of dates Make sure that the Latest date allowed is a later date than the Earliest date allowed Invalid Date Time QDS expects dates and times to be entered in a form appropriate to your locale The form for your locale is determined by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel To see what the current date time looks like in the required form press the Current Date Time button Invalid File Name QDS uses only short old style file names limited t
161. ed to answer with an incomplete time span that is missing the number of lt unit gt This option applies only if lt unit gt is one of the selected subunits and not the longest selected unit Enter the value to be substituted for the lt unit gt component of the time span when not provided Value untts eeen Select the units to be used to express the combined Minimum Allowable Value Maximum Allowable Value components of time span elements This must be one of the units of time that are allowed If the selected value units are not the shortest of the allowed units of time there may be a fractional value to be truncated or rounded Enter the shortest time span value in the chosen value units to be the default minimum for a valid response Enter the longest time span value in the chosen value units to be the default maximum for valid response Enforce Range c Check this box to prevent a span outside the allowable range Special Codes Time Spans V Refused M Not Applicable M Skip T Alternate Skip Allow Special Code Code Pattern cc cece Year Value cccecceceeeeeeeee eee Hour Value for a Data Element to be entered If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range time spans but they will be allowed Special Codes Branching Numbers Dates Times Code Pattern Year Hour mm 2 a Check this box if the specified special code will
162. ee several buttons on the right hand side of each Data Element screen The special response buttons on the top right side will be enabled for Don t Know Refuse to Answer and Not Applicable when they are allowed for that item The buttons to go to Previous Question and Next Question are on the bottom right An ACASI interview will also display a Repeat the Question button Cd ops Computer Assisted Personal Interview C Documents and Settings loris My Documents QDS Survey1 survey1 En CAPI BAX Interview Tools Help Subject number 1 2 3 Clear 4 5 6 7 8 g 0 Click on responses to each question and continue until you reach the last item Build options for CAPI ACASI HAPI control screen appearance audio exit passwords and summary reports To change these select the Options button on the Automated Interview Control File box Ending Your Interview After you have completed your questionnaire QDS will ask Do you want to save the data for this interview Select Yes if you want to save your data see the following section Where s My Data If you select No the data entered in this current interview will not be saved Next you are asked Do you want to continue with another interview If you respond Yes QDS immediately goes to the first screen for a new interview of that 18 QDS Questionna
163. eeeeeeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeeseeseseaeenseeeeseeees 137 AGASI B ild Gptong esoe ege NEEN 138 Operations TAD cesieiedscsescecebecsthecdsberen coats cnesteseellecesheneueadestadensedeesheshuesisleneasadbeduenbaae 138 ele lee RT WEE 140 Spin GContr ls Tabiatni dsdeehedeesdieebeeskibesscadacdadeehienseeatatienebeewiuaies 141 tee BE EE 141 Summary Reports Tab 142 Text to Speech or Recorded Audio Files sccsseecceeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeenees 142 Using DECtalk Text to Speech cseccccececeeseesseeeeeeeeeeseceseesesneeeeeeeeeseeseseaeenseeeeseeenss 143 Creating a Custom Dictionary ccccccseeeeeeeee sete eeneeeeneeeeeeeeseseaeeaseeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeeeeeess 144 JEE TL UI E 145 Naming Audio TEE 146 gfe 01 a capper rete eer E E E E A E 147 Location of Audio Files sinnini anaien aiana Ea aE ERa ES 148 le elei KA e ET 148 Conducting an ACASI Interview cccsecceseeeseeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeseneeeeeeneseseaesnseeeeeeneess 149 ACASI Open Dialog Box 150 Entering ACASI Responses c ccssecesseeeeeseeesseaeeneeeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeeesaesaseaeenseaeeeeeenss 150 Saving ACASI IntervViewS ccsecceseeecsseeeeseeeeeeneeseaeseseeeenseeeeesaesaseeesaseeeeneeeessaeseaeneneaes 150 Interrupting an ACASI Interview ccccecceceeeesteeenseeeeeeneesceseseeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeensneeeeeneeas 151 Resuming Prior ACASI Interviews ccccccssccssseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeenseeeeseeeseseaeenseeeee
164. eees 232 Substitution Tokens in Table 232 Adding a Data Element 233 Excluding Categories From Tables ccccccccceeseeceeneeceeeeeceeeeseaaeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeees 234 Variable Names in Tables cccccssccecsesseceseeeeeeeceeeaeeececaaeesssesaeeeseeaaeeesseseeeeseaaes 234 Question Numbering in Tables 2 2 cssccsscesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneneeseeeseenseeeseeesseenees 235 Skips Within Tables ege deed 235 ND AEE RRE 235 A tom tic Variables iiniiiiniiniinimiimuniniimnuninimananiindiinniads 237 Gharacter ln E 238 Numeric Calculation ssania nanninannan ENNEN e 239 Sting EXPOS SION E 239 Creating an Automated Subject Variable s ssssesseesseesseesne enteen nennstnnsnnnsennnennnne 240 Response GOS EN 241 What Is a Response Card csecccseeecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseseeeenseeeeseaesaseaeeaseaeseneeeseaesaseenensaees 241 Adding Response Cards csseccsseeesseeeeseeeenseeeseeseseaeenseeeeneeeeseaeseseeeenseeeeseaesaseeeenseees 241 Editing Response CaN EE 242 Removing Response Cards 242 Copying Response Cards ccssseceeseseceenseeeeeeenseseeeenseeeeeenseaeeeenseseeeseeseeeenenseseenens 242 Response Card Response Tab SettingS cccsccsseccssecessseesseesesneeenseeeesseeseseenenseeeees 243 Working With Multiple Languages ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 Languages Not Supported by QDS scccseeceseeeesteeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeseseeeenseeeeseaeseseeeenseeeee
165. eesneeeneeeeeneeeeseaesesaeeeaseeeeseneseseaeseseeeeeeeeeneas 94 Fle et ee eg 94 Interview Mem 95 Code MENU iecccsdisen il needed bended ii Aires es id inetd kala 96 elle ME EECH 96 Entering Dat suns chet Peds ee ES 97 Gleef BCEE 97 Entering Check Each Hems siiin asina i 97 Entering Special Code Hesponses 98 Entering Missing Values scenes seaeeeseaeeseaeeeseaeeesaaeeteaeeseeeeee 98 Entering Interviewer Comments 98 Continuing Data Entry in an Existing Batch File 98 Completing a Partially Entered Interview cccccccesceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeseeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeaees 99 Viewing Editing Previously Entered Interviews sssssssessiessresrnsrrnesrnssrnssrnnennsns 99 Deleting Undeleting Interviews ssssessesiiesirssirssrrssrrssrnsrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnsrnnnns 100 Verification of Data Entry ccceecceesceesseeeesneeeeeeeeecaeseseeeenseeeeseaesaseeeenseeeeeseeeseeseneeeeenees 100 Verifying an Interview Batch cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeneaeeseeeeess 101 Verification Log File 102 Browsing it Data ERIENGeeereeeeeceeCe EEN ee 103 Data Entry Application Data Files cccccsscssseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeeeeeeas 103 Computer Assisted Personal Interviews CAPI sssseeeeeeeeeeees 105 Building a CAPI Control File ccseccsseeeeeseeeseeesenseeeeeeeeescaeseseeesnsneeeeeeeseseeeensneeeeseaess 105 Table of Contents v GAPI EOUlOH
166. egory Suffix amp C is appended to the Data Element variable name to produce a unique variable name for each category In the example table the question Have you bought any amp TXT in the past 6 months that is since amp SIXMO is assigned the variable name BUY6 amp C The resulting variables and names for this Data Element are Variable Name Category Category Name in Data Element Tab Label Suffix Data set BUY6 amp C Furniture A BUY6A BUY6 amp C Clothing B BUY6B BUY6 amp C Toys CG BUY6C BUY6 amp C Books D BUY6D BUY68 amp C Electronics E BUY6E Tables 235 Question Numbering in Tables Similar to variable names the category suffix amp C is appended to the question number to produce a number for each category In the table example the question Q2 Have you bought any amp TXT in the past 6 months that is since amp SIXMO has the resulting question numbers Data Element Category Final Question Number Category Label Suffix Question Number Q2 Furniture A Q2A Q2 Clothing B Q2B Q2 Toys C Q2C Q2 Books D Q2D Q2 Electronics E Q2E Skips Within Tables As with Data Elements Skip Elements within a table work in the same manner as Skip Elements elsewhere in your specifications file However table variables referenced in a table Skip Element must include the amp C category suffix For example This causes the test to be evaluated based on the value of NET amp C for the current category For example during the first pa
167. elected the Interviewer radio button which indicates that the information will be viewed by the interviewer for a CAPI or HAPI interview For a Self Administered interview ACASI you will select the Respondent radio button so that the participant will read isten to the information text To save the element we select OK Adding a Yes No Question Data Element With Yes No Response Type One common type of question you may add is one that asks for a yes no response Our questionnaire will first ask Do you own any pets We will add this question in the same way we added our Subject number 1 Go to EditlInsert 2 Element Type Data will be selected by default 3 Click OK Again we will enter our Text of Question and Variable Label We entered PETS for Variable Name On the drop down Response Type menu we selected Yes No Getting Started 11 Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Text of Question Do you own any pets Question Suffix e Question Number Response Type a Number Integer Yes No X Variable Name Variable Label Card PETS Do you own any pets Audio File Name Branch to Marker F Audio Interruptible Next element bad Data collected for New Variable OK Cancel Apply Help As before we next select the Response Set tab For the yes no response type we can change the values of yes and no however we have kept th
168. en established you can export them via the FilelExport Reconciliations menu option The Export Reconciliations step will produce a version reconciliation file QVR containing all reconciliation rules from the current warehouse This file can then be shipped to other sites and applied to those warehouses 180 QDS Questionnaire Development System Applying Reconciliation Rules To apply Reconciliation Rules created elsewhere to your Warehouse 1 Open the Warehouse Manager 2 Open the warehouse FilelOpen Warehouse 3 Open the version reconciliation file QVR Select FilelOpen From the Files of type drop down box choose Version Reconciliation Files QVR Select the QVR file you wish to add and click Open Your warehouse now has the same set of reconciliation rules that were defined by the person who sent you the QVR file You will still need to convert all nonstandard cases to the new standard However you will not need to go through the process of defining the rules for reconciliation Working With Multiple Sites 181 WORKING WITH MULTIPLE SITES When you are working on a study in which you plan to collect data at individual sites and then send your data to a coordinating center for processing QDS can help by tracking shipments and generating receipts In a multisite study in which the Warehouse Manager is being utilized at both the site and central levels the data flow may look something like
169. ender Applicability setting that allows QDS to know which variable will be used for gender applicability Data Elements 55 Applicability Table Categories By default all Table Elements apply to all table categories see Tables on page 229 for an explanation of elements and categories in tables You may exclude specified categories for any element in your table by choosing one of the following options in the For Elements in Tables box All Table Categories Select this option to indicate that this element is applicable for all table categories Exclude from categories Select this option to indicate that this element should be excluded from one or more table categories List the categories for exclusion for example B E F For help creating this list select Tools Tables Categories This provides a list of categories and allows you to build the list by double clicking on the category to be inserted Category suffixes may be separated using spaces or commas Include only in categories Select this option to indicate that this element should be included only for a subset of table categories List the categories for inclusion for example B E F For help creating this list select Tools Tables Categories This provides a list of categories and allows you to build the list by double clicking on the category to be inserted Category suffixes may be separated using spaces or commas
170. eneess 151 ACASI Data Aa 151 Renaming ACASI Output Data Files OAI 151 Working With Collected Data The Warehouse Manager seen 153 Warehouse Manager Overview ccsseccsseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeenseeeeseaeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeessaeseseenenees 153 Warehouse Manager Basics 1 ss ccssscsseeeeeeeeseeesesneeenseeeeseaeeeseeeenseeeeeseeesneseneeeeesens 154 Opening the Warehouse Manager 154 Creating a New Warehouse sense saeeseaaeeeeaeeseeeeess 154 OPENING A EI 155 Table of Contents vii Warehouse Status Code 155 Adding Datta EE 155 Deleting Cases use EEERNEEE REENEN eege te cgutedaateedbeseeenbivela edad ayeebdesibeads 157 VIGWING Delta EE 158 Modifying Datel sasicecsscccbedees sec deekedueeeg vale sank cesuhcundidie vances cusnansdaeeabieshedeauadiadessstdyenes 159 Modifying Component Variable Data 160 Modifying Automatic Variable Data 160 Data Correction LOG Flesini annaia aka ea AA A Eaa Ea 161 Identifying Duplicate Cases ccccccccecceceessneeeeessneeeeesceeeeessaeeeeseaeeeeessneeeessseeeenees 161 RESUME er EEN 162 Sorring CASCS TT 163 Viewing and Printing Database Characteristics ccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeees 163 Printing Warehouse Information 165 Saving e 165 DAVE ANG Ke eu e 165 Working With Password Protected Data cccccccsseseeesseeesseeeeeeeeeeees 167 Adding Read Passwords in the Warehouse Managet sssccsssecceseeeseseesseeeneeeees 167 Adding Modify Passwords i
171. ent or Table Element Element branches over count Elements past the end of its Table Element branches to Marker lt marker name gt outside its Table Element defines a Table that has no Data Elements Element is inside a Table but the Question Number Suffix does not include the required amp C token Element is inside a Table but the Variable Name does not include the required amp C token Element is inside a Table The Question Text for all languages must include a amp TXT amp ALT or amp LBL token Element is not in a Table but the Audio File Name includes the amp C token Element is not in a Table but the Question Number Suffix includes the amp C token Element is not in a Table but the Question Text for one or more languages includes a amp TXT SALT or amp LBL token Element is not in a Table but the Variable Name includes the amp C token Element is not in a Table Applicability should be reset to All Table Categories Element specifies a Table applicability criterion for a non existent category lt category name gt Marker NEXTCAT may only be used in a Table Code List Element has an empty code list Element has too many codes for a checklist Warning Element has too many codes for a CAPI or ACASI interview only first 24 will be used Duplicate Names Element defines Marker lt marker name gt which is duplicated in Element Element defines Variable lt Variable N
172. ent had entered Joe as the name of his or her best friend this question would be displayed as How long have you been friends with Joe You can build a CAPI or ACASI control file from the Displaying Values QDS specifications file to view the results on screen Note In a paper questionnaire this question would be written as How long have you been friends with Response to Q3 Tables 229 TABLES Understanding Table Elements Table Elements are used for questions that will be repeated for each of a set of categories For example if you want to ask a series of questions for each of several categories clothing books furniture etc Have you bought any clothing in the past 6 months Were any of those clothing purchased over the Internet How satisfied have you been with clothing purchased over the Internet Would you purchase clothing over the Internet again Have you bought any books in the past 6 months Were any of those books purchased over the Internet How satisfied have you been with books purchased over the Internet Would you purchase books over the Internet again It would be nice not to have to write out each question x times once for each category This is exactly what a Table Element does QDS tables are composed of Categories and Elements Categories represent the categories for which the questions will be repeated in the example above the categories are clothing books etc Elements represent
173. ential path from the first element in the specifications file to the last one item at a time Sometimes however you will want to skip one or more items based on responses to previous items In addition to the Conditional Branching Instructions specified on the Data Element Response Set tab Skip Elements provide another way to control the flow of your questionnaire With paper questionnaires skip instructions are written for the interviewer or respondent Automated forms CAPI ACASI Data Entry perform skips automatically Data for the skipped elements are recorded with the specified Skipped Value default of 9 9 9 9 is an example of a code pattern see Numeric Code Patterns in the QDS Design Studio online help You can use Skip Elements to skip a specific number of elements 1 to 5 or to move to a specific fixed point in the questionnaire To skip to a specified location you must use a Marker Element Marker Elements serve no purpose other than to mark a spot in the questionnaire as a destination point for a Skip Element Just as you can tell someone either to get off the subway in three Ip stops or to get off at a specific station you can tell QDS to skip a specific number of elements or skip to a specific marker If you have only a short distance to go it s easy to count stops If you have a long way to go it s easier to look for a specific destination The same rationale works in deciding when to use a marker
174. ently locked however by the Data Default options When the integers are locked QDS is unable to resolve any duplicate or out of sequence numbers that may result from changes to the specifications There are two ways to correct the problem 1 Unlock the question numbers by resetting the check box on the Data Defaults Options tab 2 Add a question number suffix to each Data Element that causes a problem Read Error The data record for this element is not formatted correctly There may be physical damage to a portion of the file Try validating the file to learn the extent of the damage Running a disk checking utility may help You may want to return to your most recent backup of this file The settings for this element will be restored to the default values Required Field You have left a required field blank When you press the OK button in the message box QDS will highlight the field in question You must enter a value in this field before moving on to a different element or a tab Resetting to Check Boxes P ick A Code Scale This Data Element is associated with a response card that is notin the current specifications file There are four possible explanations 1 The response card was renamed 2 The response card was deleted 3 The specifications file was damaged and the response card was lost 4 This element was copied from another questionnaire and the corresponding response card was not copied H
175. enu Commands The CAPI Menu at the top of the each screen provides the following commands Interview New Interview Begin a new interview Interview End Interview End an interview prior to completion You may resume later InterviewlComment Enter an interviewer comment Keyboard shortcut Ctrl C InterviewlEvnt AAA Exit interview prior to completion You may resume later Keyboard shortcut Alt F4 Tools Add Passworde Add the password specified in the Design Studio This must be provided prior to launching an interview see Data Security on page 213 Tools Remove Password Remove a password that was previously added Help For this Question If available view additional information for this item text specified on the Data Element Probes tab This item will be unavailable if no Probes text exists for this item Keyboard shortcut Ctrl Q CAPI 113 Help General Help Retrieve general help on the CAPI program Keyboard shortcut Ctrl H Entering Interview Responses in CAPI CAPI responses can be entered using the keyboard mouse or if available touchscreen The exact configuration of the screen will change slightly depending on the type of item being displayed For example a Yes No Response Type will display the Yes and No buttons A Pick One Response Type will display a button for each possible response Yes No For a Yes or No question the response area has two butt
176. er default 9 8 Not Applicable default 9 9 and Skipped default 9 9 This is the default setting System Missing Select to have all special responses converted to SPSS System Missing Range Bottom Select to have all special responses converted to the minimum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Top Select to have all special responses converted to the maximum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Middle Select to have all special responses converted to the midpoint of the allowable range for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Specified Values Select to have all special responses converted to the values specified in the boxes to the right The suggested values in the boxes may be modified with one exception You cannot modify the specified value for Missing These data will always be exported to SPSS with a value for missing After you have finished updating and reviewing your options click OK Click the Save button to re create an SPSS system file SAV Data for all standard version interviews will be exported Variable names and labels will be included as will value labels a The sample files First Questionnaire SAV and Transport SAV contain data Bz from the examples in SPSS format Default settings we
177. er of pregnancies End of Elements Inserting New Elements To insert a new element Now Elemo E 1 Select EditlInsert or click the Insert Element button from the toolbar C Information 2 Select Element Type C Skip Instruction 3 Click OK Edit Instruction New elements are inserted before C Marker the current item C Section Header Each Element Type is described in detail in later chapters Format Table C Automatic Variable C Comments Design Studio 29 Copying Moving and Deleting Elements It is easy to copy or move any element or group of elements from one part of a specifications file to another Elements may also be moved and copied from one questionnaire to another This can be a great time saver when you have similar data collection items in different forms Field tested questions can be reused by simply cutting and pasting Once you have copied an element you can edit the parts that are different such as Variable Name Label and Question Text Copying and Moving Elements To copy an element or group of elements 1 Select element s to copy To select more than one element click on the first element in the group and while holding down the Shift Key click on the last element in the group Select EditlCopy to cut instead of copying select EditlCut 3 Highlight the element just below the point at which you would like the copied items inserted and choose EditlPaste N
178. er the password QDS will alert that all passwords have been removed M See the Working with Password Protected Data on page 167 section for how to manage passwords in the Warehouse Manager Password Scenarios The following scenarios describe how users will use passwords in QDS In this example Stacy is the study designer Laura is a data manager at another site and Joe is an interviewer who works with Laura iL First Stacy will enter a read password into the Design Studio and then rebuild her HAPI application control file A Next Stacy will email the control file to Laura and then let her know via email or telephone the read password associated with the current control file SR Laura will then copy the control file to one of her Pocket PC s running HAPI 4 Next Laura will launch HAPI and tap on function Tools Add Passwords The program will prompt Laura for the name of the control file and the read password defined for that file Once Laura enters the correct password HAPI is ready to run the control file If Laura fails to enter the correct password the program will issue an error message and subsequently tapping on Interview Begin will also display the error message 5 After successfully entering the password Laura can give J oe the Pocket PC and he can administer interviews using HAPI without any knowledge of the password 6 Once J 0e s data is synched with Lauras PC and copied to a warehou
179. es include Don t Know default 9 7 Refused default 9 8 Not Applicable default 9 9 and Skipped default 9 9 This is the default setting Missing CL Select to have all special responses converted to SAS System Missing Range Bottom Select to have all special responses converted to the minimum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Top Select to have all special responses converted to the maximum allowable value for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Range Middle Select to have all special responses converted to the midpoint of the allowable range for the corresponding variable as defined in the Design Studio Specified Values Select to have all special responses converted to the values specified in the boxes to the right The suggested values in the boxes may be modified with one exception You cannot modify the specified value for Missing These data will always be Exporting Data 191 exported to SAS as a value for missing The default specified values for SAS will be enabled when the Specified Values radio button is selected After you have finished updating and reviewing your options click OK Click the Save button to re create your file for export Data for all standard version interviews will be copied to the file Variable names and labels will be inc
180. es with the ACASI module Data Management Data to ASCII utility eee All QDS packages include the QDA utility which converts QDS data files to text files Warehouse Manager 000 Use this module to manage view edit and export QDS data Reconciling Data cscsssseeees Reconcile multiple survey versions in the Warehouse Manager module Exporting Data ccsesssneseeeeees Export QDS data to other software packages SAS SPSS MS Access for analysis Design Studio 21 DESI GNI NG YOUR QUESTIONNAIRE THE DESIGN STUDIO MODULE All QDS applications begin in the Design Studio The Design Studio module is the QDS design development interface the place where questionnaire specifications are input While we discuss the Design Studio in terms of questionnaires QDS can be used to design and implement many types of data collection instruments including clinical trial forms laboratory data forms and diagnostic assessment forms QDS views each data collection instrument as a linear sequence of data components These components are called elements in QDS and may include Questions or Data Input Fields Data Elements Instructions Information Elements Skips Skip Elements Consistency Checks Edit Elements Calculated Created Variables Automatic Variable Elements Formatting Administrative Elements Section Headers Comments and Format Elements 5 gt gt gt e ST Opening
181. ese as No 0 and Yes 1 We have unchecked the Not Applicable box The Don t Know and Refused boxes are checked so that these are allowable choices We selected OK to save Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Allow Value IF Yes branch to Marker Button Key Audio File IV Yes H Default for element D bes g Value If No branch to Marker Button Key Audio File Iw No fo Default for element z No N Value r Branch same as MV Don t Know H e Default C No C Yes Branch same as e Default C No C Yes m Branch same as Default G No C Yes Cancel deel Help Now we have three elements in our questionnaire Data collected for Subject number Information to Interviewer and Data collected for Do you own any pets Data collected for Do you own any pets We will now add three more items to complete our survey gt What is your favorite color choose one gt Date of birth gt Thank you for completing our survey 12 QDS Questionnaire Development System Pick One Question Data Element With Nominal Pick One Response Type For our next choose one type question we insert a new Data Element and enter Text of Question and Variable Label as What is your favorite color The Variable Name entered is COLOR Under Response Type we select Nominal Pick One Next we select the Response Set tab to ente
182. explanation 1 applies you can select the new name of the card H explanation 4 applies and the specifications file that provided this element is still available you can still copy the response card you need H one of the other explanations apply copy the response card s from the most recent backup To resolve the problem at least temporarily the Design Studio is changing the Response Type for this Data Element You can change it back to response card later after you restore the corresponding card Response Card Needed You have not yet defined any response cards for this questionnaire You must create a response card before you can selectit as a Data Element Response Type Script Has Been Built You have requested an automated interview that uses audio files QDS has prepared a script you can use to record those audio files The scriptis in a Rich Text Format RTF file that can be opened with your word processing software Y ou will note in the script that one or more audio files need to be created or updated as labeled by the following status indicators Appendix B 271 No Name You have not yet assigned a file name in the Specifications No File The named file was not found New Name The fe name has changed since the last script New Test The text to be recorded has changed since the last Script Select Yes to open the script file now switching to your word processor and return to
183. for more information on using the various input options We will highlight the unique attributes for entering data in HAPI see also Conducting CAPI Interviews on page 111 126 QDS Questionnaire Development System Yes No Gender Pick One Responses For question types where you need to select one button simply tap on the desired response and the program will proceed to the next screen What is the highest grade in school you completed When the list of responses extends over several screens you will see the More Choices instruction Tap and to view the entire list and select your Postgraduate response College graduate Some college Elementary school More Choices lt v DRA B Interview Tools 2 gt E Check All That Apply Responses For questions where you may select more than one response a white box is displayed next to each choice For example L Bananas L Apples L Grapes L Pears Tap into each box to check or uncheck it As with pick one items when the list is too long to fit on one screen tap az and e to view the entire list and select your response HAPI 127 Rating Scale Responses Rating scales responses in HAPI are similar to those in CAPI Because of the small screen it may sometimes be necessary to shorten category labels so they are more readable To record a response tap on the selected number on the line Date and Time of Day Responses For both d
184. for the same variable name Rename one of the variables Element Not Allowed in Table The only element types allowed within a table are Data Elements except check boxes Skip Elements Edit Elements Automatic Variable Elements Check box Data Elements are prohibited because they are too difficult to arrange in matrix form for a paper questionnaire If you need to include check boxes in the table use a series of yes no questions instead Information Elements are excluded for a similar reason gt gt gt gt Expected or Lists one or more items enclosed in braces are used to test for membership or nonmembership in the list The list ended without a closing brace The problem may be a mixture of braces and parentheses For example 264 QDS Questionnaire Development System X 1 3 5 would produce this message See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Expected a Comma A function reference has an invalid argument list The problem may be a missing operator or a missing comma For example DAYS DATE 2 would produce this message See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Expected a Right Parenthesis If the expression includes a reference to a function e g DAYS 10 then the problem may be that the right parenthesis at the end of the argument is missing For example MDY 10 15 98 lt DATE would
185. g from the Type of data to be stored drop down box Enter the string expression in the Character String box Click OK EH Numeric Calculation To create a numeric calculation automatic variable 1 eae e Select EditlInsert Select Automatic Variable Element and click OK Enter a variable name in the Variable Name box Enter a variable label in the Variable Label box Select Numeric Calculation from the Type of data to be stored drop down box Enter a numeric value in the Missing Code box QDS will use this value if the numeric calculation cannot be evaluated to a single value The default value is 1 Enter a calculation in the Numeric Calculation String Expression box Click OK One common numeric expression is to calculate age based on the date of birth a previously collected Data Element named DOB and today s date a previous automatic variable of type Today s Date named TODAY which is written as the QDS function AGE DOB TODAY in the Numeric Calculation box In the sample file Age QDS you can view this example See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for a full listing of QDS functions and their syntax EH String Expression To create a character string variable 1 Ste SS P 6 7 Select EditlInsert Select Automatic Variable and click OK Enter a variable name in the Variable Name box Enter a variable label in the Variable Label box Select String Expression fro
186. h a letter and is limited to 8 characters Element references a Variable lt Variable Name gt which has not yet been collected Element references an undefined Variable lt Variable Name gt Element references the text Variable lt Variable Name gt where only a numeric Variable is permitted Text for Element includes a substitution for an undefined Variable lt Variable Name gt The specifications for Element cannot be read Restore this Element before validating The text for Element substitutes the value of a Variable lt Variable Name gt that has not yet been collected The trial version of QDS cannot process more than 10 questionnaire Elements Trial version only Using Your Specifications File 85 USING YOUR SPECIA CATIONS FALE In QDS you may create or Build several products from a single specifications file For instance you can build control files for data entry CAPI and ACASI administration as well as a paper questionnaire and an Analytical Codebook All QDS products Questionnaires Codebooks Change History Reports and Control Files are created through the Design Studio Build menu The ability to build multiple control files can be very useful even when you anticipate using just one mode of administration for most data collection For example although you may choose to administer an ACASI interview Audio assisted Computer Administered Self Interview to most respondents you may desire t
187. h report will contain this prefix text plus the interview identifiers defined on the Options gt Interview Options gt Identifier Variables property page The report formats for CAPI and ACASI are parallel See Summary Reports Tab on page 109 for more information Text to Speech or Recorded Audio Files If you plan to conduct computer administered self interviews you will want to consider how or if you want to use audio The text of each question and other information for the respondent can be read aloud using the built in Text To Speech engine DECtalk or recorded audio files WAV Unless otherwise specified QDS will automatically use the default Text To Speech TTS engine When deciding whether to use the built in TTS engine recorded audio files or a combination there are a few issues to keep in mind Using the TTS engine allows question text to be built at run time i e at the time of data collection through the use of Substitution Tokens Although you can display substitution text when using recorded audio ACASI 143 files a generic version of the question must be used for recording the question For example if a previous question asked the date of the respondent s last visit to the doctor Variable Name LASTVIS you could use a Substitution Token to insert the response to that question in a subsequent question Since your last visit 6 10 02 how many times have you However the recorded audio fi
188. h specifications file data collected via different methods e g Data Entry and CAPI using control files built from the same specifications file may be added to the same local warehouse You may also combine data collected from different versions or different languages of your same specifications file see Working With Multiple Versions on page 171 4 Select the data file to add 5 Click Open You will now see the empty Warehouse window as well as a new Data window containing the data for the file you selected The status bar across the top of the Source Data window displays the following fields for each data record or case LTC Complete Incomplete Duplicate Deleted Resumed Transferred Shipped etc VGrsiON ienien ents Version number for form Recorded 0naneeeeeeeeeeeeee eene Date and time of automated interview or data entry Subject ID iieis Based on variables specified in Interview Options in the Design Studio Select the case s you would like to copy from the source file to the warehouse If you enabled read password protection in the Design Studio you will be asked enter your password before the interviews are copied See Data Security on page 213 for more information To select all interviews in your source file go to EditlSelect All To select a group of interviews click on the first case in the group then hold the Shift key down while clicking on the last case in the group You can rearrange the list
189. hat follow For example it is possible that questions that were previously applicable and asked answered should now be skipped Check this box if you would like previously entered values to be replaced by a skip code Leave this box unchecked to retain prior values The setting on this tab sets the default for Skip Elements and Build Options QDS Default Settings 211 Treat aS Zero wiciscsiiscssssciciisiesssscsasi Treat as Allowable range Treat as Limited range Select this choice if you generally want to substitute a value of zero for a Don t Know response when performing an interim calculation This choice can be overridden for individual Data Elements Select this choice if you generally do not want to substitute any value for a Don t Know response when performing an interim calculation This choice can be overridden for individual Data Elements Select this choice if you want to substitute a specified value or limited range for a Not Applicable response when performing an interim calculation The specified range is entered in the box to the right To specify an exact value enter that value in both the From and To boxes Changing Data Defaults for Preexisting Elements To change data defaults for existing specifications 1 Make the change s to the Data Defaults as described above 2 Select ToolslGlobal Changes 3 Check any categories for which you wish to apply the revised data defaults
190. he Pocket PC device If a subfolder is specified on the Report Element tab then it will be located within that subfolder Reports in the example below File name prefix Folder name Fist Q Report Reports N Custom Reports 73 If our file name prefix is First Q Report and our identifier variables are SUBJECT 12 VISIT 1 SITE A then our report will be named First Q Report 12 1 A RTF You will have a separate RTF report file for every interview Report Element Errors Due to the nature of customized reports the following development scenarios will produce validation errors or warnings e The user references variables in a substitution token that do not exist or have not been defined validation error The use of amp var amp var or amp var forms with automatic variables These forms only apply to Data Elements validation error The Report Element precedes the Subject ID element validation error The Report Element precedes data collection of an identifier variable that is not the Subject ID validation warning Note that this identifier will not then be included in the file name Viewing Reports in ACASI CAPI and HAPI Reports can be viewed during the actual interview itself or at any later time by opening the RTF file If the Prompt to view report checkbox was checked in the report design a prompt box will appear at that point in the interview QPI Du Report file C My S
191. he Data Entry Control File QDE icon using Windows Explorer Double click on the icon You will now see the Data Entry Open dialog box Select the correct folder from the Look in drop down box Select QDS Paper Interview Data Files QPD from the Files of type drop down box Select the QPD file from the list box that contains the correct Batch Code Select the Browse interviews read only radio button 8 Click Open You will now see the data entry screen and all the entered responses but they are grayed out and cannot be changed You may navigate to specific interviews by going to InterviewlSelect Interview va eo SE Data Entry Application Data Files Each partially or completely keyed verified interview will be written to a Paper Interview Data File QPD that is saved into the same folder as your control file These files can be brought into the QDS Warehouse Manager Module for further processing and export see Working With Collected Data on page 153 Each new Batch Code prompts the creation of a new data file where the full file name is the control file name Batch Code QPD For example Control File Batch Code Output Data File s First Questionnaire Example DE QDE A01 First Questionnaire Example DE A01 QPD A02 First Questionnaire Example DE A02 QPD B01 First Questionnaire Example DE B01 QPD CAPI 105 COMPUTER ASSISTED PERSONAL INTERVIEWS CAPI Building a CAPI Control File Before yo
192. he File Name box the complete file name will be First Questionnaire Example QDS 3 Select the path drive directory where the specifications file will be saved from the Look in drop down box The default location is the Studio subdirectory of the QDS folder c program files QDS 2 4 Studio 4 Click Open The Design Studio will now display a new window with the name of your questionnaire in the title bar and a single line reading End of Elements Once a Specifications File has been opened created additional menu items Edit Window Language Options Tools and Build are available in the main menu bar of the Design Studio amp QDS Design Studio File Edit View Window Language Options Tools Build Help lar hd Ex ele lt j E 2 My Questionnaire QDS English United States End of Elements Opening a Preexisting Specifications File To open a preexisting specifications file 1 Select FilelOpen 2 Select appropriate folder from the Look in drop down box 3 Select appropriate file e g First Questionnaire Example QDS 4 Click Open Design Studio 23 Saving a Specifications File To save with same file name and location 1 Select FilelSave To modify file name or location 1 Select FilelSave a Copy As 2 Enter or modify file name in the File Name box 3 Select appropriate location in which the file should be saved from the Look in drop down box 4 Click Save By default QDS retains a
193. he date and time the control file was created the file size the file type and the file s storage location on the device You can use the scroll bar to see all of the file information Tap the name of the questionnaire control file in this example either CHIVES En HAPI or Demo En HAPI This will bring you to the first screen of your interview AF QDs Hari a qx 3 45 Open Folder All Folders e Type QDS HAPI Control 7 opp v 2 If HAPI is already running the QDS HAPT splash screen opens To open your control file and start the interview tap InterviewlBegin This launches the Open dialog box as in the above example Tap the name of your questionnaire control file to begin your interview If a HAPI interview was already in progress you will go to the last screen entered Pocket PC Running Programs On your Pocket PC device it is often necessary to check and see what programs are already running this is not obvious as is the case with a desktop Tap StartlSettings System tab and then select the Memory icon to open the Memory settings Tap the Running Programs tab to display a list of all programs that are currently running on the Pocket PC HAPI 125 If QDS HAPI is currently running you will see QDS HAPT listed in the Running Program List If you wish to stop QDS HAPI or any other running program select its name in the list and tap the Stop button ActiveSync Alternatively
194. he longest text response to be allowed Responses longer than this limit will be truncated in the data file of characters to display Enter the approximate size in number of characters of the longest text response to be displayed on the screen Responses longer than this limit will be scrolled The size is approximate because the width of an average sized character will be used to determine size of the display field Allow blank response Check this box if most text fields are optional Upper case Remove leading spaces Check this box to force all entered text to be converted to upper case Check this box to automatically remove blank spaces from the beginning of text responses 206 QDS Questionnaire Development System Dates Data Elements l Styles Standard Codes l Numbers Text Dates m Standard Components Format for year Gi F 9 4 digits C Current Year C Year amp Month Only C 2 digits 19 4 C Fixed at C Year Only C 2 digits 20 Allow Substitute Earliest date allowed I Missing Day Day 15 T Missing Month T Use keypad for ACASI Standard Components Format for year Allow Missing Day Substitute Missing Day Allow Missing Month Substitute Missing Month Use keypad for ACASI Earliest date allowed Latest date allowed mmm M Enforce range All Date Elements must include at least the year Optionally they may also include the
195. he questionnaire The sample screen below shows a gender type question QDS Computer Assisted Personal Interview C My Study First Questionnaire Report En CAPI hat is your gender Question text appears in the box at the top and response options are in the space below Special response buttons Don t Know Refuse to Answer and Not Applicable are located on the upper right of the screen Navigation buttons Previous and Next Question are located along the bottom right edge of the screen 112 QDS Questionnaire Development System CAPI Open Dialog Box Alternately it is possible to open your interview through the Open dialog box in versions prior to 2 4 it was necessary to use the Open dialog box to begin the CAPI Application Look in O My Study sl e EI e E Reports Ki First Questionnaire Report En CAPI GPI File name First Questionnaire Report En CAP Op Files of type Japs CAPI Control Files TP OI D Cancel Begin a new interview C Resume a prior interview 1 Go to StartlPrograms Questionnaire Development SystemlCAPI Program This launches CAPI and displays the Open dialog box 2 Ifnecessary navigate to the correct folder and select the QPI control file 3 Notice that the Begin a new interview radio button will be selected by default see Resuming a CAPI Interview on page 116 Select Open 5 The dialog box will close and the first screen of the questionnaire will be displayed CAPI M
196. hipment File Site 1 First Questionnaire Site 2 QTD Shipment File Site 2 After we transferred all cases in both shipment files to the local warehouse their status changed from Complete to Transferred All these cases were in the same version After we closed our warehouse file QDS automatically generated receipt files for each of our shipment files named First Questionnaire Site 1 QSR Shipment Receipt File Site 1 First Questionnaire Site 2 QSR Shipment Receipt File Site 2 We sent these to the data collection field site where the shipment files originated At Site 1 and Site 2 they posted both receipt files You can view the following files that show the data warehouses after receipts have been posted First Questionnaire Site 1 Receipts Posted QDW Data Warehouse at Site 1 with Receipts Posted First Questionnaire Site 2 Receipts Posted QDW Data Warehouse at Site 2 with Receipts Posted 186 QDS Questionnaire Development System Note that the status of all the cases in the above files has changed from Shipped to Transferred Again we have not included samples of the actual receipt files QSR since these cases are deleted following posting and the files become empty Exporting Data 187 EXPORTING DATA You may export data from your local warehouse to other software for data analysis at any time It is important to keep in mind Only standard version cases will be exported It is necessary to com
197. house Manager Files ccsseccsseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeseaesaseeeeaseeeeeeeaeeeaesaneenenees 286 Version 2 4 Sample Files ccsecccseccesseeeeseeeeeeeeesceeeeseeeenseeeessaesaseeesaseeeeeeeaesnaeseneeneeeaes 286 Using This Manual 1 USI NGTHI S MANUAL Welcome to QDS Since you are using QDS chances are that you conduct survey or clinical trials research and are looking for an easy way to take control of your data collection and data management QDS is a Windows based application that allows you to design your own data collection forms collect your data aggregate and manage your data and convert your data to use with analytical packages without the need for costly and time consuming programming assistance QDS features an easy to use menu based interface With QDS you can move quickly from questionnaire design to data collection easily make modifications to your forms and prepare data for analysis Throughout this guide we may refer to your data collection tool as a questionnaire form or survey QDS can be used to develop a wide array of data collection instruments for a vast range of interests System Requirements Operating System Desktop Windows 95 98 ME 2000 NT 4 0 XP or Tablet Pocket PC Pocket PC 2002 Windows Mobile 2003 Windows Mobile 2003 SE Windows Mobile 5 0 RAM 32MB minimum 64MB recommended Disk Space 12 MB for installation additional space required for questionnaires Au
198. iable must be a Numeric Data Element and if the shared sending variable is Automatic Text then the receiving variable must be a Text Data Element Resuming Your First Questionnaire To go back and resume the first questionnaire go to Start Programs QDS 2 4ICAPI HAPI or ACASI Enter your control file and select the Resume a prior interview radio button QDS will start on the last question answered before the interview was terminated with the Edit Launch function If you do not wish to have the identifiers and shared variable displayed again at the onset of the second survey you can add an unconditional skip at the beginning of the second interview i e Skip if 1 1 On the Skip Element tab uncheck the option box Replace Entered Values with Skip Code so that the shared values will not be overwritten when skipped over See the sample file Edit Example QDS Additional Edit Elements Options Other available options on the Edit Element tab include evaluates to maybe With QDS calculation of a logical condition may evaluate to TRUE FALSE or MAYBE An evaluation of MAYBE for this skip condition can be treated as TRUE or FALSE Check this box to treat a MAYBE evaluation as TRUE Leave the box unchecked to treat MAYBE as FALSE Audio File Name The file name without the directory or file extension for the audio WAYV file with the text for this message To suppress audio for this element enter No Audio
199. iable name suffix for check box elements You are adding an item to the list that duplicates an item already in the list If you want to change or delete the item already in the list assign a temporary unique value for this item correct the other item and return to this item Duplicate Marker Two Marker Elements in the questionnaire define the same marker name This is never permitted in QDS You must change the marker name for one of these elements Duplicate Question Number Prefix This Section Element resets the question number prefix to one that is also setin a different section Since this could lead to considerable duplication of question numbers and variable names it is prohibited Change the question number prefix in one of these sections to be unique Duplicate S uffix Each code in the list must have a unique variable name suffix You are adding an item to the list that duplicates an item already in the list If you want to change or delete the item already in the list assign a temporary unique value for this item correct the other item and return to this item Duplicate Table Category Each category in a table must have a distinct suffix The variables in each category will be assigned unique variable names by appending the category suffix For further information about how QDS works with tables see Tables on page 229 Duplicate Variable Name Two Data Elements in the questionnaire collect data
200. ially verified and that the identifier for the current record is 77 Interview 2 ot 3 Partially verified Ke At this point the verifier will begin entering the case in the same manner as the original data entry operator If any discrepancies are detected Oe the verifier does not key the same value as the original keyer the Data Entry Program will beep and depending on the Build Option settings display an error message oe eel At this point the verifier must reenter the value for the disputed item If the second entry by the verifier 102 QDS Questionnaire Development System Matches the original value keyed by data entry operator that value will be written out to the data file Matches the original value keyed by the verifier that value will be written out to the data file Does not match either original entry the verifier will be required to enter the value again This process will continue until the same value has been entered twice in a row For example Initial Value Keyed csecsssseees 1 Value Keyed by Verifier 1 Prompt ccncceceetececececccsscececceceasezceness No ACHON ccecesscccdcnssasteisssiscesessteradeasesccs Accept 1 as correct value Initial Value Keyed cscceseeeeee 1 Value Keyed by Verifier 2 PROM PU seccsseecssascescctessnccssarsecceseceres Yes ACU OM a ictscissccsiniessecsssnesnessancanscaneesess Require second input from verifier
201. ide value labels for SAS SPSS and Access Button Text Enter button text for automated interviews optional If this box is left blank the text entered for the Description will be used Button File Enter the name of the bitmap file to be used for automated interviews CAPI ACASI Leave this box blank to use a text button that displays the Button Text KO ieee teeters ett eee For an automated interview you may provide a key to be pressed to select the code button This is comparable to the Yes No Response Type option where pressing Y or N selects Yes or No for automated interviews This option is applicable only when Bitmap buttons are used Text buttons will automatically display shortcut letters A B C etc 42 QDS Questionnaire Development System Click OK when you have entered all information for the category Continue adding Nominal Pick One items until your list is complete You may revise and edit this list at any time Plus Special Codes You can use this section to disallow one or more of the QDS Special Codes using the checkbox on the left You can also modify the default values for these categories Display in Reverse Order Check this box if you would like the categories to be displayed in reverse numerical order If the box is unchecked the categories will be displayed in numerical order lowest to highest If Code Zero Branch To This item specifies the next element to be processed if the response
202. iessiesissrisesresrrssrinsrnssrnnsrnnttnnstnnssrnnsrnnsnnne 5 ROCA EE 5 GETING Starbogl eueuesrussekerektCAEKKEEEEEREEKKEEIAAEREAEEEEEEEEEEEEAEKEEEEEEKEREKEKEAEAEESARR 7 Designing a Questionnaire Creating Specifications File s ccessseeneesseeees 7 Opening the Design Studio Module 7 What Are Elements accede eege estegegie Seege geesde DESEN 8 Adding a Question Data Element 8 Adding Instructions Information Element 9 Adding a Yes No Question Data Element With Yes No Response Tvpei 10 Pick One Question Data Element With Nominal Pick One Response Type 12 Date Questions Data Element With Date Response Type ssssssssssssssressressrrssness 12 SHIPS THLI CUI ONS 3 fae css sess dee Soca Sau reg a bead staat deen Geese seats ees 13 Inserting Edit Elements 14 Moving and Copying Elements 15 Creating Interviewing INStruUMeNts cceeeeeeeee este ee seeeeneeeeeeneee sees eeneeeeeseesennaeenseeeeeees 16 Building an Interview Control File 16 Entering Responses sense saaaesseaaeseeeeeseaeessaeeeeneeee 17 Ending Your Interview 0 ccccccceeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeseeeeseeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeeseaeessaeeeeneeee 17 Starting New IntervieWS cccccecsceceeeeececeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeesaeeeseaeeseeeeescaeeeeaeseenees 18 Where S My Haagen EEN 18 Other Documentation ssasssnssenneenneennuennnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn unnn nnnn nnne nnnn annn nnnn nnmnnn nnna 19 elle CEET 19 Other
203. iew window in which one or two pages of the list will be displayed in the printed format The Print Preview toolbar offers options to view either one or two pages at a time move back and forth through the document zoom in and out of pages and initiate a print job Print Getup Use this command to select a printer and a printer connection This command presents a Print Setup dialog box in which you specify the printer and its connection Exit Goonies Use this command to leave the QDE program You can also use the Close command on the application Control menu Any changes you have made to the data will automatically be saved Shortcut keys ALT F4 Mouse Double click the application s Control menu button Interview Menu Next interview Ctrl PgDn Previous interview Ctrl PgUp Last interview Ctrl End First interview Ctrl Home Select interview Ctrl l Delete Interview WARE ete MenvTeyy Next Interview eee Move to the next interview in the same data file Shortcut keys Ctrl PgDn Previous Interview Move to the preceding interview in the current data file Shortcut keys Ctrl PgUp Last Interview Move to the final interview in the current data file Shortcut keys Ctrl End First Interview 008 Move to the first interview in the current data file Shortcut keys Ctrl Home Select Interview Select a specific interview from a list of all interviews in the curren
204. if a single element will be processed for all categories before moving to the next element If you plan to use a Skip Element in your Table you must use one of the following setups on the Table Element tab One element per Row Automated Interviews Column First default One element per Column Automated Interviews Row First 7 Enter table categories 8 Click OK on the Table Element tab Saar Defining Categories EEN the required substitution tokens Category amp C Suffix for variable name listed above is entered as part of g the table definition Each category definition includes a category suffix and label and two text substitutions descriptions Each time a new category is added the Table Category window appears allowing category definition information to be entered Category amp C Suffix Category Label amp LBL Text amp TXT Substitute Category Label for printed table and amp LBL text substitute Clothing Text 2 TXT substitute for question information text Clothing iterns Alternate ALT substitute for question information text coe _ The Category Suffix is a single letter that will be appended to the variable name for each element in a table This will associate the variable with the current category For instance in the example above any variable ending in B would correspond to the Clothing category By default the first category will start with A the seco
205. ill prevent study subjects from adding comments to the interview response data This option determines the length of time a Data Element will remain on screen after a response has been entered default 500 milliseconds If zero is entered the screen may be cleared before the interviewer has time to verify the value entered To prevent a respondent from exiting an ACASI interview and working with other applications on the computer enter a password in this option box that will be prompted for and required before the interview can be terminated available only for ACAS that you specify an Exit Password on ACASI Module Build Options This option will require a password to be entered for the ACASI program to terminate This prevents a respondent from gaining access to other applications on the computer upon completion of the interview This will also ensure that a staff member has the opportunity to ensure that each interview is saved 140 QDS Questionnaire Development System Appearance Tab The ACASI Appearance DELT x o co Operations Appearance Spin Controls Audio Summary Reports Appearance Build Font size questions Font size buttons Options fs z Space for Questions Shape of Standard Buttons The Appearance tab is used to refine settings k related to the appearance of the Eocus rectangle displacement screen IT Show Question Numbers e Key letter separator Directory for butto
206. in braces may only be used to test for membership or nonmembership For example X 1 3 5 is TRUE if the value of X is 1 3 or 5 and FALSE otherwise Your expression tests a greater or less than condition which has no meaning for lists See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Lists May Only Have Variable Names or Constants Lists one or more items enclosed in braces are used to test for membership or nonmembership in the list The items in the list may only be single variables or constants no expressions allowed For example X 1 3 Y 5 is invalid See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Lists Not Allowed on Left Side of List expressions may not be included on the left side of an 268 QDS Questionnaire Development System Comparison expression The expression 1 3 5 X is invalid See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Minimal Recovery QDS has attempted to recover a corrupted specifications file and was only partially successful More than 25 of the file has been permanently lost This was either a new specifications file to which no element had yet been added or the file was badly corrupted The file is unusable by QDS Carefully examine the state of the recovered file to determine whether you might be better off returning to a recent backup
207. in the Audio File Name box File names are limited to 8 characters and may not contain the characters lt gt or blanks Audio Interruptible 0 Check this box if you would like to allow the Subject Respondent to interrupt the Audio File in automated interviews by responding before it has finished playing 68 QDS Questionnaire Development System The following example can be found in Edit Example QDS and Edit Launch Exercise Survey QDS 1 SUBJECT ID __ ID Current Date Automatic 2 Please enter the date for the next visit EE If Q2 is not greater than 6 months from current date Skip back to Q2 3 Gender Male Female 4 During the past month did you participate in any physical activities or exercises Yes No If Q4 No skip to end 5 How many times per week did you take part in this activity during the past month If Q5 is greater than or equal to 3 launch the Exercise Survey CAPI control file 6 Do you plan to increase your level of exercise in the next 6 months Yes No Thank you for participating Custom Reports 69 CUSTOM REPORTS Custom reports as of v2 4 enable you to insert a specialized report almost anywhere within a CAPI ACASI or HAPI interview These reports can contain the data for any variables previously defined and are written to an RTF file that can be viewed immediately if desired You can also add formatting and descriptive text Lt Inserting Rep
208. in the New Integer box Notes 0200 EENS Enter information to be displayed in the Design Studio List view Validating Your Specifications 81 PREPARING TO BUILD VALU DATING YOUR SPECIFICATIONS Once you have completed entering the specifications for your questionnaire or any time you want to test review your specifications during development you will need to build the appropriate QDS product e g a paper questionnaire or a CAPI Control File However before you can build anything you must Validate your specifications Your specifications file will automatically be validated each time you try to build any QDS product other than the Change History However it is good practice to periodically check for errors during development This allows you to fix problems along the way and avoid the possibility of a large set of errors to fix at the end To validate your specifications 1 Select Tools Validate from the Design Studio menu 2 Correct any errors identified by QDS 3 Repeat steps one and two until all errors have been resolved This process will validate your specifications e it will identify any errors that would prevent building a data collection administration file If there are no errors QDS will report QDS x N A Specifications have been validated No errors were found If validation errors are found a new Errors window automatically opens Each error is identified on a separate line in the wind
209. ince beginning of interview NOTE JE you have multiple elapsed time elements each variable will record the number of seconds since the beginning of the interview not the number of seconds since the last elapsed time element Interview Language ccssseeeees Control file language Mode of Administration sx Control file type i e CAPI ACASI DE Data File Name cccssseeessseeeseeees Default data file name Character String cssecsseeeeees Fixed string entered in Character String box Numeric Calculation 0000 Numeric value result of expression entered in Numeric Calculation String Expression box String Expression sscseseeeees Character string result of expression entered in Numeric Calculation String Expression box To add an automatic variable element 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Select the Element Type Automatic Variable 3 Click OK 4 Enter a variable name in the Variable Name box Because automatic variables become part of the data set they are subject to the same restrictions as regular Data Element variable names 5 Enter a label in the Variable Label box 6 Select the Type of data to be stored eg Today s Date For the first six choices i e Today s Date through Data File Name you will only need to select the Type of data to be stored and enter the variable name and label For the remaining three Character Strings Numeric Calculations and String Expressions
210. ined If you delete the Resumed Later interview its status will change to Deleted resumed later and the final interview will be marked as Complete Status Version Recorded Deleted Resumed Later 10 24 0512 28PM 3 Complete 1 10 24 0512 28PM 3 Sorting Cases Warehouse cases are initially displayed in the order in which they are added To sort by status questionnaire version interview data or case identifier click on the column heading or go to ViewlSort By You can select only one Sort field Local Warehouse First Questionnaire Central QDW status Version Recorded Complete 1 07 12 01 02 16PM 1 2 Baseline Complete 1 07 12 01 02 17PM 13 Baseline oO Complete 1 07 12 01 03 23PM 15 Baseline Complete 1 07 12 01 03 24PM 1 6 Baseline oO Complete 1 07 12 01 03 29PM 1 Baseline Viewing and Printing Database Characteristics To view information about your source data or local warehouse 1 Select ViewlVersions 2 Select a version to view 3 Click Details 164 QDS Questionnaire Development System You will first see the Version tab KL which provides details on Next click on the Variables tab to see a listing of variable names question numbers variable labels and response types Version Details TODAY Calculated Interview Data Entry Date SUBJECT 01 Subject ID SITE Site VISIT Visit Code GENDER Respondent s Gender DOB Date of Birth RACE Respondent s Rac
211. ip or edit instructions Inserting Edit Elements Another interview tool is consistency checking which is added in QDS as an Edit Element The response to our new question How many of your pets receive Information to Interviewer In this interview will ask you questions about your opinio Information to Interviewer This ends your interview Thank you for your participation Getting Started 15 regular veterinary care should not be greater than the number response to How many pets do you own We will add in this check with an Edit Element To add our edit instruction 1 Highlight the Element directly below where you would like to insert your edit What is your favorite color 2 Go to EditlInsert 3 Select Element Type Edit Instruction 4 Click OK You will now see the Edit Element window where you will enter your instruction in the If box Edit Element Notes If ew gt PETNUM Display message The number of pets who recieve regular veterinary care cannot be greater than your total number of pets Please correct Audio File Name Audio Interruptible J e alata Reconciliation Number of Marker Loop back to prior element v 2 elements For our edit instruction displayed in the figure above we entered PETVET gt PETNUM so that if the number of pets receiving vet care PETVET is reported as greater gt than the number of pets owned PETNUM QDS displays an error mes
212. ire Development System same questionnaire If you do not wish to go to a new interview you can select No Go to InterviewlExit to end or to InterviewlNew Interview to begin a different interview You may interrupt an interview by selecting the menu option InterviewlEnd or InterviewlExit Starting New Interviews When you need to begin a new CAPI interview double click on the control file name in Explorer My Computer or from a desktop shortcut file e g Survey1 en CAPI QPI Your CAPI application will open to the first screen of the questionnaire Where s My Data After you complete and save your interview s you will need to know where QDS has saved your data file Your CAPI interview data ACASI data files are saved in the same way is saved into the same folder as your control file with an extension of QAD For example our control file is C Research Folder Survey1 En CAPI QPI so our saved data file will be C Research Folder Survey1 En CAPI QAD Every time you run a new interview QDS will automatically append the new data to the end of that file We recommend that you rename your QAD data file and back it up to another location on a regular basis After renaming your QAD file QDS generates a new QAD file and adds the next interview to the new file One possible renaming scheme is to use the date and location computer if applicable to indicate when and where the file was closed For example
213. irectory that includes the human voice recordings for this questionnaire in the currently selected interview language for example C Program Files QDS 2 4 Audios EN or click the Browse button and specify the directory by locating and selecting it This path must be followed on all machines that will be used to administer the ACASI application Use Textio Gpeech Check the Use Text to Speech box to substitute DECtalk Text to Speech audio when there is no audio file WAV specified for a given element or when the specified file cannot be found By default this option is checked Read choices A Check this option to have DECtalk Text to Speech audio read response options for Pick one and Check all questions By default this option is not checked Language eeeteeeeeeteeeees This option is not currently operational Summary Reports Tab The Summary Reports tab allows you to produce a Rich Text File RTF report that will list all responses for each ACASI interview The following options can be specified Enable Case Reports 0 Check this box to enable the production of a report listing all responses at the end of each interview Prompt to View Report Check this box if you would like the program to display a message box at the end of each interview asking whether or not you wish to view the report File Name Prett Enter a prefix for the report file name The complete file name for eac
214. is window has eight separate tabs starting with Data Element on the left and ending with Response Set on the far right Each tab allows you to set options for the current data element Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set You will need to set options on the Data Element and Response Set tabs for each new data element Although there are additional options available on the other six tabs you will find that you can often leave these options at their default settings Data Element Tab Select the Data Element tab to enter basic information including question text or field name variable name variable label and response type You will find that certain options are used more frequently for specific methods of form implementation For example question numbering options are more useful for printed questionnaires whereas audio options are used only for automated ACASI interviews You will also find that some Data Element tab options often remain unchanged 34 QDS Questionnaire Development System Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations if Skipped Notes Response Set Text of Question Question Suffix Question Number Response Type r ncrement Question Number Integer Yes No M Variable Name Variable Label Card vsa New Variable Audio File Name Branch to Marker T Audio Interruptible Next element Text of Question In the
215. itional branching instructions and internal consistency checks as well as settings for formatting your questionnaire Conditional Branching Instructions Rules for navigating through your CL questionnaire that are dependent on responses to previous questions eg you would not want to ask a male respondent if he is pregnant Internal Consistency Checks Rules for checking internal consistency of data e g if a respondent said that he had traveled outside of the country five times you would want to flag a later response indicating that he had been to Spain 10 times These specifications make up the specifications file used by the Design Studio to build a QDS control file which will be used by the Data Collection modules to administer your data collection application The Design Studio is also used to build instrument documentation including hard copy questionnaires self or interviewer administered an Analytical Codebook and a log of all changes made to your Specifications File Change History Data Collection Modules Each QDS Data Collection module supports a separate method of data collection The Data Collection modules use the QDS control file to administer your questionnaire based on the specifications entered into the Design Studio Data Entry l Used to key verify data collection from a paper form CAPI ee ee e Used to administer record data for Computer Assisted Personal Interviews interviewer administered computer
216. itution Tokens as Response Choices You can also use substitution tokens on response sets For example you have collected the names of five friends SP1 friend 1 SP2 friend 2 SP3 friend 3 SP4 friend A SP5 friend 5 where SP1 to SP5 are the variable names for Data Element text reponse items Now create a new Data Element pick one or pick all and on the Response Set tab enter Item Description of category 2 amp SP2 3 amp SP3 4 amp SP4 5 amp SP5 lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt On the ACASI or CAPI screen the names that were entered for SP1 to SP5 will appear on the five response buttons B Bart If you anticipate blank responses Carl you can add in Edit Elements following the Data Element to disallow the participant from selecting a blank response button see Edit Elements on page 63 D David In the sample file Displaying Values QDS we asked our respondents how long they had been friends with their best friend First we added the Data Element for the question Who is your best friend with a Response Type of Text and a variable name of FRIEND The question text for the next Data Substitution Tokens 227 Element is entered as follows How long have you been friends with amp FRIEND The substitution token amp FRIEND inserts the value of the Data Element FRIEND into the question during an automated interview For example if the respond
217. ity of the time the renaming can be described simply as m f the original name is less than 8 characters and ends with a number gt Add A to the end of the variable name m f the original name is less than 8 characters and ends with a letter gt Add 1 to the end of the variable name m f the original name is 8 characters gt Drop the last character and add A or 1 based on the new last character However sometimes these simplified rules result in duplication of a variable name already included in the data The scheme used by QDS to create a new unique variable name is described by the following rules You will notice that the basic rules above correspond to the first renaming attempts below If variable name is 8 characters maximum length for QDS variable name drop the last character before proceeding The truncated variable name will be considered the variable name for all subsequent steps If the variable name ends with a digit First attempt to add a letter to the end of the variable name Start with A and continue through the alphabet until a unique name is found If no unique name is found try adding a number to the end of the variable name Start with 1 and continue with 2 3 4 0 until a unique name is found If there is no unique name and The variable name is less than 7 characters add a zero to the end and continue until a unique name is found Add a letter to the end of the variable name A
218. ix for the current Data Element OG geg ge kei Inserts the Table Category Suffix for the current Data Element amp LBL eee eee Inserts the Table Category Label for the current Data Element COUT NE Inserts the Table Category Text for the current Data Element GALT E Inserts the Table Category Alternate Text for the current Data Element amp Variable Name Inserts the Value of a variable where the variable name is entered within square brackets for example to substitute the value for variable VAR you would enter amp VAR Using Substitution Tokens With CAPI ACASI You can use substitution tokens to customize your questions information items and responses for automated interviews Using Substitution Tokens in Questions and Information Items For example you may want to ask some questions about a particular person whom the respondent has already named e g best friend Sarah How long have you known this person Using substitution tokens you can insert the name In the Data Element Question Text include a substitution token for the variable used to collect the friend s name FRIEND How long have you known amp FRIEND 226 QDS Questionnaire Development System When the automated interview is run the question will appear as How long have you known Sarah You may also use this same method to simply display previously collected data to the interviewer or respondent on an Information Element Using Subst
219. k Edit Element Notes Ir NEXTYIS lt TODAY 180 a H Display message K enter a new date that is at least six months from today ae R Perform without Audio File Name P Audio Interruptible TI message Reconciliation Number of Marker Loop back to prior element DI fi element DI 64 QDS Questionnaire Development System 2 In the If text box enter the condition to be checked by the Edit Element In the example above we entered NEXTVIS lt TODAY 180 3 In the Display message box If you wish to have an edit message enter the text to be displayed when the IT condition is TRUE The message generally explains the nature of the inconsistency and requests a resolution If you do not wish to have a message displayed check the Perform without message option box 4 Inthe Reconciliation box select what you would like to happen when the If condition is true No further special processing Reconciliation Elements follow Loop back to prior element Launch another control file This option will display the message alerting the user to the inconsistency Perform without message checkbox is disabled for this reconciliation option For this second option you will need to include additional elements to clarify or restate one or more questions related to the identified inconsistency They must immediately follow this Edit Element and will be bypassed when the If condition
220. kip How many pets do you own 14 QDS Questionnaire Development System 2 Go to EditlInsert 3 Select Element Type Skip Instruction 4 Click OK You will now see the Skip Element window where you enter your instruction Skip Element Notes IR PETS 0 Branch to Filling with Skip 3 el t ll Standard Skip Code Marker Alternate Skip Code lt It L Element 4 of 10 For Help press F1 In the figure above we added an instruction to the If box PETS 0 and selected Skip 3 elements from the Branch to drop down box Now if the participant responded No oe 0 to Do you own any pets Variable Name PETS then the next three elements will be automatically skipped over in the interview In the element listing below you can see the skip instruction and count over the three items that will be skipped the last element skipped is an Edit instruction that we will talk about next Data collected for Subject number Data collected for Do you own any pets Skip next 3 elements if PETS 0 Data collected for How many pets do you own Data collected for How many of your pets receive regular veterinary care Edit Loop back if PETYET gt PETNUM Data collected for What is your favorite color Data collected for What is your date of birth End of Elements In longer surveys you can add Marker Elements which serve as long distance destination points for sk
221. l appear in the window title bar 9 Ifnecessary you can change the displayed language for a window through the LanguagelSelect menu option or by pressing the button e to the right of the Language box and selecting the appropriate language from the drop down list 10 Double click on the first Data Element in both windows 11 You will see that the Text of Question box is empty in the window for the new language 12 Enter appropriate translations in the Text of Question box and if applicable on the Response Set and Probes tabs Working With Multiple Languages 247 Similarly you will need to enter translations for other Design Studio elements message text for Edit Elements information text for Information Elements etc 13 As you navigate through the element list using the View menu or the Toolbar arrows you will see that both windows advance simultaneously i e you do not need to navigate forward one item in each window moving forward in one moves you forward in the other 14 Continue entering translations until you reach End of Elements Translating Response Cards If you have used any response cards in your survey you will also need to provide translations for the response card categories 1 Verify that the current window is associated with the language that needs to be translated 2 Select Tools Response Cards 3 Select the first response card and click Edit 4 Enter the appropriate trans
222. l allow you to convert nonstandard completed cases to the standard version which will then allow these cases to be included in an export operation 172 QDS Questionnaire Development System Warehouse Reconciliation Process 1 Define a standard version 2 Define rules for reconciliation 3 Convert cases to the standard version To view a list of the versions in your warehouse select ViewlVersions A window entitled Questionnaire Versions will show all the versions that have been added to the warehouse You will notice that one version will have a bull s eye next to it this is the current standard version The Dated field lists the Build date for that version Once a version has been added to the warehouse it will remain on the Questionnaire Version list even if all cases originally completed in that version have been deleted or converted Choosing a Standard Version Choosing a standard version is the first step in the process of reconciling converting all cases to a single version for export Moe eon yil want to designate the latest Version Dated Administration tail P __ Betis version as the standard Oe 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 2 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 Standard version E E Administration Details version click on the 1 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 version that vou wantto Gs 07 10 01 En CAPI Win 98 NT 2000 Standard y Se make the new standard ele a Late
223. l dark gray If you decide to use colored buttons make sure that the colors you choose are noticeably different from each other so they can easily be distinguished by the user Keep in mind that most people have preconceived color associations Try to avoid a conflict with those associations For example don t use green for a Quit Stop or No button All bitmaps cover a rectangular area To create a button with a different shape you need to clip the parts you don t want by painting them in a transparent color You can decrease a bitmap file size by reducing the number of colors used or reducing the size in pixels Consult your graphics program s manual on how to change the attributes of a bitmap Custom button packages containing hundreds of premade buttons can be purchased from a computer software store or catalog These button collections are often found under the heading Web Tools in software catalogs They come in a variety of file formats but you can use your graphics program to convert them to the bitmap BMP file format There are free button collections on the World Wide Web You can find them by searching with the term buttons If you find one you like save it to your hard disk using your browser software These files are usually in the GIF or JPG file format that the Web uses and must be converted to BMP by your graphics software Appendix D 279 Picture Button Variations If you
224. lation Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each response card in your survey Because the Response Card Edit window will not let you view multiple languages simultaneously you will need to reference a printout of the original response card text for translation Translating System Keywords Once you have completed translating elements and response cards you have one more step before building your questionnaire translating system keywords These are terms that QDS uses in both paper and automated interviews Yes No Refused Hour Minute etc To update System Keywords 1 Select LanguagelTranslations 2 Select the language for which you need to add translations 3 Click Edit 4 You will see a series of items to be translated These include response categories such as Yes No Don t Know Not Applicable Refused Male Female etc Enter appropriate keyword translations for all items in your questionnaire Click OK when complete 7 Select ToolslValidate to confirm that all necessary translations were made Error messages will be displayed for any missing translations Dn 248 QDS Questionnaire Development System translations For example if you wish to use Decline rather than Refuse to To use language other than the system default you may edit the English Answer Select Language Translations and edit the English translations The complete list of system keywords follows Responses Yes No Male Female Zer
225. ld Options on page 138 If the bitmap files were not installed in the default directory C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio Bitmap32 En you will need to change the Directory for button bitmap files on the Appearance tab after selecting Build CAPI Application or ACASI Application and clicking the Options button on the Automated Interview Control File dialog box This is the case even if only the drive letter is different e g D instead of C Appendix E 281 APPEND XE QUESTIONNAIRE DATA TOASCII UTILITY If your QDS system does not include the Warehouse Manager you can export your collected data to a text file with the free Questionnaire Data to ASCII utility QDA EXE Launch the Questionnaire Data Application by double clicking on the QDA EXE icon in the data folder located in your QDS directory typically C Program Files QDS 2 4 Data Select to what type of file QAD or QPD you would like to convert and the file name and click Open A dialog box will tell you how many interviews were copied to the ASCII file which will be given a TXT extension Appendix F 283 APPEND X F TESTING CHECKLIST The following lists include items that should be checked reviewed during a thorough and systematic testing process Review Codebook Variable Names Variable Labels Valid Ranges Length esp for text items Review Questionnaire Run spell check in word processing package Make corrections in specifications file
226. le Notes Tab Internal notes regarding the report can be added into the Notes text box SSS EEE ST Report Details and Options Substitution Tokens in Reports It is likely that you will want to use substitution tokens in your report to add details such as file names to headers page numbers to footers and variable responses to the content There are multiple substitution tokens that may be used in Report Elements Token amp var Response stored for specified variable var amp FLN File name of document amp FLP File name of document including full path name amp PGN Current page number amp PGT Total number of pages in document amp var Interviewer comments associated with variable var amp var Text of question associated with variable var amp var Text of probe associated with variable var Only the amp var token is also available outside of a custom report All tokens are allowed in the Report Element header or footer The tokens amp FLN amp FLP amp PGT and amp PGN tokens are only allowed in the header and footer fields they are not allowed in the Contents tab page If they are entered onto the contents page of a report QDS will generate an error message Report Names The report file name is composed of the file name prefix plus the identifier variables The report will be located in the same folder as the control file on the PC or on t
227. le Example Transportation en CAPI QAD contains sample interviews that have been transferred to the local warehouse file named Example Transportation Unreconciled QDW It contains cases with two versions that have not been reconciled The file Example Transportation Reconciled QDW contains the same cases following reconciliation and conversion to the standard version This example shows the steps to designate Version 2 as the standard and to reconcile Version 1 to Version 2 176 QDS Questionnaire Development System Designate Version 2 as new standard 1 2 3 Select ViewlVersions Select Version 2 Click Standard and OK Version 2 should now have the bull s eye Reconcile Version 1 to the standard version SC Ze St E Select ViewlVersions Select Version 1 Click Details You should now see a dialog box asking This version is not the current standard and has not yet been reconciled to the standard Reconcile now Click Yes You should now see a dialog box displaying Reconciling version 1 to version 2 the current standard The Warehouse Manager then goes through the following steps for reconciliation e The Variables SUBJECT and CARPOOL are identical and are merged automatically without prompts The variable name CAR in Version 1 was changed to OWNCAR in Version 2 Since this was the only change the name CAR is changed to OWNCAR without prompts In our example the variable LINE was used
228. le Name Branch to Marker T Audio Interruptible Next element Data collected for Bought in last 6 mo tee E Sample Table1 QDS contains the shopping example 234 QDS Questionnaire Development System Excluding Categories From Tables Eor elements in tables By default QDS will ask all questions for each C Al Tenis Cargories category If you would like to skip certain questions for one or more categories this can be specified on the Data Element Applicability tab You may specify that a given question be Categories applicable for all questions except the one s fa listed or that it be applicable only for the question s listed Exclude from categories C Include only in categories All Table Categories The element is applicable for all table categories default Exclude from categories The element is not included for all categories of the table and you prefer to list the categories for which this element is excluded In the box below this item list the categories to which this element does not apply Include only in categories The element is not included for all categories and you prefer to list the categories for which this element is included In the box below this item list the categories to which this element applies Variable Names in Tables Separate variables are created and output for each Data Element for each category The Cat
229. le showing the number of times each question was encountered and the total number of seconds spent on it for each automated interview A question may be encountered more than once through the use of the Previous Question button or via loop backs triggered by edit checks The default setting is checked Include empty value rows Check to include a row in each values comments and hits table for questions that were never reached during an interview If this box is not checked empty rows will be excluded The default setting is not checked Exporting Data 199 Ee The sample file First Questionnaire MDB contains the exported data for the ES example The default settings were used to create this file Exporting the Interviewer Comments Log To export interviewer comments 1 Go to FilelExport Interviews 2 Select Interviewer Comments Log TXT from the Save as type box 3 Click Save A dialog box will indicate how many records contained comments and were exported to the specified text file QDS Default Settings 201 QDS DEFAULT SETTINGS Most QDS users both beginner and advanced will find they can keep the QDS default settings However QDS does allow you to change default settings both for elements you have not yet entered and for preexisting elements Changing Data Defaults for New Elements To change preset data defaults for new elements i e elements that have not yet been inserted into your specifi
230. le will open with an empty screen To begin our new questionnaire 1 Go to FilelNew from the main menu 2 Enter the name for your questionnaire file in the File Name box 3 Select the folder where you would like your file saved from the Look In drop down box 4 Click Open Many QDS commands are available via drop down menus keyboard commands and toolbar buttons In this manual we will generally use the drop down menus You will now see a new window with the name of your questionnaire in the title bar and a single line reading End of Elements Your design file name is the name you entered with the QDS extension appended For example in the following figure our short questionnaire will be survey1 QDS 8 QDS Questionnaire Development System File Edit view Window Language Options Tools Build Help Dell Ex aaea For Help press F1 No questionnaire What Are Elements Elements in your questionnaire will be your questions information items skips edit instructions comments or formats These are all different types of QDS Elements each making up a separate line in your file The questions are called Data Elements and will generally represent the bulk of your file We will walk through adding the most basic types of elements to a short questionnaire Adding a Question Data Element To add our first question we will start by inserting an element 1 Go to EditlInsert from the main
231. le would have to say the more generic Since your last visit how many times have you e Utilizing TTS substantially reduces development time and file management Unless it is necessary to create a custom dictionary see Creating a Custom Dictionary on page 144 no audio specific work is needed to implement TTS audio On the other hand recorded audio files require the developer to ensure that each question and response is recorded and that the appropriate audio file name is entered into the specifications file Whenever a question or response category is revised the audio file will have to be re recorded TTS does not sound quite human Using default settings there is little or no inflection in the computer generated voice resulting in a robotic sound At times text to speech software may pronounce a word incorrectly This is especially true of homographs words that have different pronunciations for the same spelling You may find that a question about bass fishing sounds as if it is asking about bass guitars However it is possible to teach DECtalk how to pronounce new words see Creating a Custom Dictionary on page 144 For ease of development and maintenance we generally recommend using the TTS engine Remember even if you weary of listening to the computerized voice during development and testing most respondents will hear it only a few times Using DECtalk Text to Speech Text to speech is an automated
232. lements After testing and editing has been completed you are ready to add new languages and begin the translation process To add a new language to your questionnaire 1 Select LanguagelAdd 2 Select the language you would like to add from the New Interview Language box 3 Click OK 4 The title bar in your specifications file now includes the new language e g French 246 QDS Questionnaire Development System amp QDS Design Studio File Edit View Window Language Options Tools Build Help le H S x A BA oje EEs a z B l D French Standard z 5 Select WindowlNew Window 6 Another specifications window will open with your original language listed in the title bar e g English amp QDS Design Studio File Edit View Window Language Options Tools Build Help WEE jx seje ole i e 7 E English United States gt 7 Select WindowITile Horizontal to display both specifications windows horizontally I QDS Design Studio File Edit View Window Language Options Tools Build Help Kegel SCHEER ge st Demo QDS French Standard Data collected for subject Data collected for amp 3 Data collected for Q4 End of Elements Sg Demo QDS English United States Data collected for subject Data collected for Q3 Data collected for Q4 End of Elements For Help press F1 Element 1 of 3 NUM Ui 8 Verify that each window displays a different language the language wil
233. lete this language should now appear in the Interview Language box on the toolbar 3 Select LanguagelDelete 250 QDS Questionnaire Development System Once the language has been deleted it will not longer be displayed under LanguagelSelect Deleting a language does not delete existing translations for that language If the language is later restored those translations will be restored as well Why would I want to delete a language Your specifications will not validate if any languages are missing translations However you can cheat by temporarily deleting a language Deleting a language will not permanently purge this language or any translations entered to date but it will let you validate the other interview language s in the file You can then restore the deleted language to complete translations Building Control Files for Multiple Languages The ToolslValidate command will assist you in locating any places in which you may have missed entering translations for your specifications Now that you have corrected any errors you are ready to build your data collection control files As explained above you will have only one specifications file regardless of the number of languages associated with your specifications However you will need to create separate control files for each language Essentially each language s control file will be built following the same process as any other Build However there ar
234. ll Undo Information in your specifications file It is this feature that allows QDS to build the Change History and to undo changes However this default setting also increases the size of the specifications file every time a change is made Eventually retention of this information can cause the file size to grow quite large It is recommended that Undo Information be periodically discarded using one of the following File Save a Copy As options Discard Undo Information after saving copy Check this box to eliminate all Undo Information Prior to eliminating all Undo Information from the Specifications File QDS will create a copy of the file that includes all previously recorded Undo Information K Always discard Undo Information before saving Check this box to disable the Undo capability When this option is selected the Undo function will be limited to changes made since the last Save Setting Preliminary Information Although not required to administer your questionnaires it is recommended that you enter basic study and file properties for your questionnaire These options may be changed at any time Questionnaire Properties x Questionnaire Properties Questionnaire Title To enter File Properties Version 1 Select FilelProperties wem Cancel 2 Enter the title of your ssh questionnaire If the e Questionnaire Title box is left blank the Copyright Information specifications file name minus the QD
235. llected by a later Element in the questionnaire Thus it will have no value at the time this expression is evaluated You must 1 Change the expression to reference a different variable or 2 Move the element to a position earlier in the questionnaire Forward Reference Substitution You are attempting to substitute the value of a variable that is collected by a later element in the questionnaire Thus it will have no value at the time this substitution is needed You must 1 Change the substitution to reference a different variable or 2 Move the element to a position earlier in the questionnaire Gender Not Y et Determined Examine the Applicability tab for this element There are check boxes to restrict the element to either male or female respondents The gender of a respondent is determined by the first Data Element Appendix B 265 with a Response Type of Gender All elements appearing earlier in the questionnaire than the first Gender Element apply to all respondents and must therefore have both the Men and Women boxes checked To correct this error 1 Check both the Men and Women boxes for this element or 2 Move this element after the first Gender Element Hardware Error A hardware error occurred while trying to write to the disk Y our file may now be corrupt but it can be recovered when it is reloaded Improper Use of Special Constant Special constants may be used to tes
236. lly generated question number This prefix may be reset by a Section Header Element Enter a default variable name to be used for new Data Elements A variable name must begin with a letter be no longer than 8 characters and contain only letters digits underscore characters or substitution tokens The substitution tokens allowed in a variable name are AC Question Number cb EEE Question Number Prefix GN WEE Question Number Integer OS wines Question Number Suffix QO ieee Table Category Suffix Enter a File Name Prefix to be used by QDS to create file names for manually recorded audio WAV files The prefix must be a single letter A unique integer will be appended to this prefix by the audio files tool in the Design Studio Check this box to prevent QDS from automatically changing any question number integers For example this option allows you to delete a question without changing the question numbers for subsequent questions Note This feature will be implemented in a future release Select a Response Type to use as the default for new Data Elements Press the down arrow to display the possible choices Highlight the appropriate selection Check this box to allow the subject respondent to interrupt audio files by responding before the file has finished playing QDS Default Settings 203 Styles Data Elements Styles Standard Codes i Numbers Text i Dates Times Position response set fto right of questio
237. log box confirms that you are resuming an interview from the specified date and time 6 Tap OK to resume the interview at the point where the interview was interrupted HAPI Data Files Every time you conduct a HAPI interview QDS automatically creates a data file an RTF report file will also be created if the Summary Reports option was enabled under BuildIHAPI Options Summary Reports tab Both the data and report files are written to the Pocket PC folder where the HAPI control file resides There is also an optional QDS utility for HAPI that will automatically rename your HAPI data files See QAD File Filter on page 131 QDS File Names for HAPI HAPI Module ossia QPP EXE HAPI Control File ccce OPP RAPIiDatalRilemis ccc crease QAD HAPI Report File RTF Data files can be distinguished from report files by looking at the file extension HAPI data files end with the QAD extension HAPI report files end with the RTF extension Your HAPI interview data is always saved into the same folder as your control file with an extension of QAD On the Pocket PC this works as follows 1 You have a control file My Document QDSv2 First Questionnaire En HAPI QPP 2 Following the first interview your saved data file will be My Document QDSv2 First Questionnaire En HAPI QAD 3 The next time you conduct a HAPI interview with the First Questionnaire En HAPI QPP control file QDS will check to see if a data file wi
238. low you to enter comments available only within the Design Studio i e information that will not be included in any QDS output products Inserting a Comment Element To add a Comment Element 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Choose Comments and click OK 3 Enter comment text in the Text box and click OK Comment Elements are often used to document question origin or reason for inclusion Comment Elements can also be used to aid in the readability of your specifications file For instance a blank Comment Element inserts a blank line into your element list SN test QDS English United States Data collected for Subject ID SECTION A DEMOGRAPHICS Data collected for Gender Data collected for Race Ethnicity Data collected for Age SECTION B BASIC INFORMATION Data collected for Height Data collected for Weight Data collected for Blood Pressure Data collected for Cholesterol 78 QDS Questionnaire Development System Section Header Elements Section Header Elements are used to create section breaks in your instrument Information from Section Header Elements will appear in paper forms and Codebooks They do not appear in computer administered interviews CAPI ACASD Section Header Elements can also be used to control question numbering Inserting a Section Header To add a Section Header 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Select Section Header and click OK Section Header Element Applicability Notes
239. ls are displayed in the Pj Demo QDS English United States Design Studio Element List View to Data collected for Subject ID identify elements e g Data collected Data collected for Age for lt Variable Label gt Data collected for Gender Labels are included in SAS SPSS and Access export formats Response Type Response Type Use the Response Type drop down list to select the correct Yes No x Yes No response type for your question Gear The default response type is Yes No i e every data See element will initially be assigned a response type of Nominal Check Each Yes No Click on the button Te to view possible choices 2 dey and select the appropriate response type Time Span Local Currency Subject ID variables must be defined as Number or Text Number S e Numeric Rating Scale responses If Subject ID variables are assigned any other Text response type an error message will be generated at the time of validation see Validating Your Specifications on page 81 36 QDS Questionnaire Development System Question Numbering In order to properly utilize the question numbering options it is necessary to understand how QDS automatically generates question numbers as well as how you can override defaults Each data element s associated question number consists of three parts Prefix optional Integer required Suffix optional For example in a question numbered A1b A is the Prefix is the Integer
240. luded Note In earlier versions of QDS the SAS transport file had a file extension of STX Converting SAS Transport Files to SAS Data Files Since the exported data is a transport file you will next need to convert it toa SAS dataset To load data from the Transport File into SAS 1 Execute the XPT transport file by double clicking on the XPT file in Windows Explorer 2 SAS will start and read in the transport file 3 Run the appropriate code to write out the data set to your SAS Library The following example code uses the SAS Export engine to copy the SAS transport file FirstQ XPT to a Version 8 SAS data set FirstQ in the SAS library named library Convert from Transport File to SAS data file libname trans xport c QDS my data FirstQ xpt libname demolib v8 c QDS my data proc copy in trans out demolib run Ba The sample files FirstQ XPT and Transport XPT contain exported data for the RS examples in SAS format Default settings were used to create these files If the name specified in the File Name box for the SAS transport XPT file is longer than 8 characters the generated data set name is truncated to 8 characters For example the SAS transport file Transport XPT will create the SAS data set Transpor sas7bdat In general it is simpler to limit SAS data set names to 8 characters or fewer 192 QDS Questionnaire Development System E Exporting to SAS Format Library Program To export
241. lue displayed All components blank z You may choose to have All date or time components blank Minimum date or time span allowed Know Not Applicable etc These buttons will be the same size The program determines the height of the buttons based on screen height The button displayed on the Appearance tab indicates the approximate height to width ratio for the buttons Use your left mouse button to drag and resize the button It is standard practice to show that a button has the focus i e is currently active by drawing a dotted rectangle inside the button s border For picture buttons you must supply a separate bitmap for the focus state The focus rectangle may be included as part of the bitmap or can be drawn by QDS To have QDS draw the rectangle enter the number of pixels to offset the focus rectangle from the outside edge of the button Enter 0 zero if you do not want QDS to draw the focus rectangle default 5 For interviews with keyboard input text buttons may include a letter code that can be keyed to select the button This key letter precedes the normal text for the button You may indicate here any text you would like to insert between the key letter and the button text The default is a right parenthesis For an automated interview it is generally unnecessary to display the number associated with each question However if you prefer to show the question number on the screen check this box default i
242. m the Type of Data to be Stored drop down box Enter a calculation in the Numeric Calculation String Expression box Click OK A common application is to use an automatic variable to calculate dates prior to or after a given date For example you might want to ask In the last 60 days that 240 QDS Questionnaire Development System is since amp PAST60D how many times have you where PAST60D is the date 60 days prior to today First create an automatic variable named TODAY of the type Today s Date Next create an automatic variable named PAST60D and Select String Expression from the Type of Variable box In the Numeric Calculation String Expression box enter LONGDATE TODAY 60 When this variable PAST60D is used as a substitution token in the question Jn the last 60 days that is since amp PAST60D how many times have you QDS will display In the last 60 days that is since Saturday December 22 2001 how many times have you Alternately you could enter SHORTDATE TODAY 60 This would display In the last 60 days that is since 12 22 2001 how many times have you i You can view this example in the sample file String Calculation Dates Example QDS Additional examples are available in Automatic Variables QDS See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for a full listing of QDS functions and their syntax Creating an Automated Subject Variable To avoid the
243. me plus Codebook RTF Click Save 5 You will then be prompted Would you like to open the RTF document now e If you click Yes QDS will launch your default word processor e g Word WordPerfect and open the newly created Codebook File Ifyou respond No you will return to the Design Studio but the Codebook File will still be created View the sample file First Questionnaire Example Codebook RTF Note that the range for the SUBJECT Variable is 1 to 100 and for the RACE Variable we have decided to accept a Special Code of Refuse to Answer equal to 98 Building a Change History File The Change History file is a Rich Text Format RTF file document that lists any changes made to your specifications file 88 QDS Questionnaire Development System The Change History document is based on the Undo Information stored in your specifications file This information can be discarded periodically or every time the file is saved at your option The Change History document will not include any revisions prior to the most recent discard is this feature that allows QDS to build the Change History and allows you to undo changes However this default setting also increases the size of your specifications file every time you make a change If you make many changes your file can grow quite large By default QDS retains all the Undo Information in your specifications file It From time to time it is a good idea to discard
244. ment now If Yes QDS will launch your default word processor e g Word WordPerfect and open the newly created questionnaire file If No you will return to the Design Studio but the questionnaire file will still be created Building a paper questionnaire can be a good way to proof and spell check items in your specification file However be sure to make any corrections to the specification file rather than the RTF file otherwise your corrections will not be registered in QDS and subsequently will be overwritten the next time you build your paper questionnaire Questionnaire Build Options Although you may find that the default settings meet your needs QDS does allow you to customize settings for the layout and formatting of your paper questionnaire To access Questionnaire Build Options 1 Select BuildlQuestionnaire Interviewer or Build Questionnaire Self Administered 2 Click on Options 90 QDS Questionnaire Development System You will now see the Build Options box that has Layout and Fonts tabs Layout Fonts Orientation m Margins Portrait Top Left 172 X H C Landscape Bottom Right bo fara r Separation between Questions Responses v 16 pt e I Hide numeric code values Word Processor Layout Tab The following options are available on the Layout tab Orientation Sets page orientation default is portrait Word Processor
245. month or month and day Select Full Date if date elements usually include the year month and day The year component of the date may be a 2 digit 4 digit current year or other fixed year Two digit years must all fall within the same century 19xx or 20xx If the years for most dates are likely to span more than one century select 4 digits for the format Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with an incomplete date that is missing the day of the month Enter the default value to be substituted for the day component of the date when the day is not provided e g 15 This should be an allowable value 1 28 for all months so that the full date will be valid for analysis Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with an incomplete date that is missing the month Enter the default value to be substituted for the month component of the date when the month is not provided eg 6 This should be an allowable value 1 12 so that the full date will be valid for analysis For ACASI interviews date components may be presented as spin controls where the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease each component to the correct value or with a numeric keypad where the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Select Use keypad for ACASI to provide keypad rather than spin controls as the default for date elements Enter the earliest allowable date to be used
246. mpletion Empty An empty case Duplicate A case that shares the same Identifier Variable s with another case gt PO Unverified A case that has been keyed but not verified with the Data Entry Module Shipped A case that has been transferred to a QDS shipment file QTD Transferred A case that has been copied to another QDS warehouse file Changed A case in a source data file that were changed after being transferred or shipped Deleted A case that has been deleted but not removed from a warehouse file ex DY Resumed For ACASI or CAPI data collection that was interrupted and then resumed the Resumed case represents the final complete data Adding Data The first thing you need to do is to open the warehouse to which you would like to add new data Open the warehouse 156 QDS Questionnaire Development System 1 Open the Warehouse Manager select Filel Open Warehouse and select the appropriate warehouse file QWM Open the data file 2 Go to FilelOpen 3 Select the correct file type from the Files of Type drop down box For data collected on paper and then data entered select Paper Interview Data Files QPD For data collected with an automated interview CAPI HAPI ACASD select Automated Interview Data Files QAD For data already warehoused separately select Data Warehouse Files QDW Although you need a separate warehouse for each data collection instrument i e eac
247. mponent of the time may be entered using a 12 hour clock with an a m p m indicator or a 24 hour clock With a 24 hour clock 1 00 p m is represented by 13 00 MR Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with incomplete times that are missing the minute PR Enter the value to be substituted for the minutes component of the time when the minute is not provided e g 30 This should be an allowable value 0 59 so that the full time will be valid for analysis guek Check this box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with incomplete times that are missing the second 208 QDS Questionnaire Development System Substitute Missing Seconds Use keypad for ACASI Earliest time allowed Latest time all owed anannnaaaaan Enforce range Time Spans Time Spans M i M Months IT Weeks l Days I Hours IT Minutes l Seconds Units of Time Enter the value to be substituted for the seconds component of the time when the second is not provided e g 30 This should be an allowable value 0 59 so that the full time will be valid for analysis For ACASI interviews the time of day components are generally presented as spin controls where the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease each component to the correct value An alternate entry method uses a separate keypad field for each component where the respondent pre
248. n Record a response by circling avalue bd M Display list of values Data Seiterter vertically r Hide numeric code values if play y seladministered Position value labels fto right of values v Position branch instruction fto right of response set v For writen values use Position response sei Record a response by Display value list 0 0 ee Position value labels Position branch instruction Indicate whether response items should be placed below the text of the question or to the right of the question for paper questionnaires Indicate whether code responses should be recorded by circling one of a list of possible codes or by writing the code value in a space provided for paper questionnaires Indicate whether code lists should be presented vertically or horizontally for paper questionnaires Indicate whether the labels should be displayed to the left of right of or above the corresponding values Applicable only when Display value list is checked Indicate whether branching instructions should be placed to the left or right of the code or in a footnote below the question Applicable only when a response code has a branching instruction associated with it e g branch if Yes For written values use When a response is recorded by writing the value indicate whether the space for recording digits should be display
249. n bitmap files C Program Files ODS 2 4 Studio Bitmap32 En Browse Cancel Apply It is important to note that these settings apply to every item in the questionnaire When necessary font size settings may be overridden by QDS in order to fit the entire set of Response Set buttons on the screen Font size questions Sets font size for Question and Information items default 14 Font size buttons aaeae Selects font size for Button Text default 14 Space for Questions Use this box to set the portion of the screen that will be used to display Question Text During the interview each question will be displayed in a box at the top of the screen The size of the box remains fixed throughout the interview The white box on the Appearance tab shows the portion of the screen that will be devoted to the question box Use the left mouse button to drag and resize this box Shape of Standard Buttons Throughout an automated interview navigation and special code buttons are permanently displayed along the right edge of the screen These include buttons for responses Don t Know Not Applicable etc These buttons will be the same size The program determines the height of the buttons based on screen height The button displayed on the Appearance tab indicates the approximate height to width ratio for the buttons Use your left mouse button to drag and resize this button
250. n the Warehouse Manager cssseeccssseeneesesseenees 168 Data Corrections Log Using Modify PaSSwords ccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneees 169 Working With Multiple Versions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 Choosing a Standard Version secccseccsecceseeeeeeeeeesceesesneeeneeeesseeseseeeeeneeeeseeeseseenenseeeees 172 Understanding How QDS Defines Reconciliation Rules ccssseecesseeeenees 172 eine lee UE 173 FROCOMICII I EE 175 Reconciliation Example A 175 Reviewing Reconciliation Rules ccccccccsccecessnceeessneeeeeecsneeeessseeeessseeeeesseeeenees 177 Changing Reconciliation Rules cccssseceeesesseeeenseeeeeeeseseeeenseeeeeenseseeenenseeeenes 178 DGFECONCIIIM EE 178 Converting Cases to the Standard Version cccsccssseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeeseeeeseeeeenseeeees 178 Converting Multiple Versions to the Standard ccssccseeceseseeseeeeneeeeesseeesseeseneeeeees 179 Exporting Reconciliation Rules ccccssscccessssecceeeseeeeeensneeeenseeeeensneeeeenseseeeennes 179 Applying Reconciliation Rules cccceececeseeeeesesceeeeseseceeeenesceesesesceneeseseeneeeseeenens 180 Working With Multiple Sites win ccticeiinnseseserevenriinenesineecierinniieaneeninwinnin 181 SHIPPING DEU a E E a 182 Receiving Data EE 182 Generating Receipt Fleeg 183 Posting Receipts TEE 183 Multiple Sites Example cccccce
251. named to Demo En HAPI Pocket PC 4_27_2004 16_33_03 QAD if the device name is Pocket PC and the file was last modified on April 27 2004 at 4 33 03 pm In addition to the renamed file the original QAD data file is also copied without a name change to the normal ActiveSync synchronization folder Changing the File Filter Folder To change the folder to which the filter copies the renamed files perform the following steps 1 Select StartlSettings Control Panel 2 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon 3 Highlight QDS QAD File Filter from the installed programs list and select the Change Remove button 4 From the Maintenance setup dialog box select Modify and then Next 5 From the Modify Path for QAD Files dialog box select Browse to enter a new path for the QAD files 6 Select Next to complete the maintenance operation Disabling the QAD File Filter To disable the filter so that the rename process does not occur open ActiveSync and perform the following steps 1 Select ToolslOptions from the menu bar 2 Select Rules from the Options property sheet 3 Select the Conversion Settings button 132 QDS Questionnaire Development System 7 8 Select Device to Desktop from the File Conversion Properties property sheet Highlight either QAD File or QDS Automated Interview Data File from the file types list and select Edit Click on the drop down list highlight the No co
252. nc you will install the HAPI program on your Pocket PC s and move HAPI control and data files back and forth between the desktop and your handheld devices Building a HAPI Control File As with the CAPI Module you need to first build a HAPI Control File QPP to administer your HAPI interview To create a HAPI Control File 1 Select Build A DI Application from the Design Studio menu 2 In the Save In drop down box the default folder will be Pocket PC My Documents QDSv2 The file should be saved in this location for synching with the Pocket PC The default file name is the name of the specification file plus En HAPI QPP 3 Click on the Options button to refine settings for your application See HAPI Build Options below 4 Click on the Save button 5 You will then be prompted with a message box ops e 1 The HAPI control file has been built Use Microsoft ActiveSync to copy the control file to your Pocket PC device HAPI Build Options HAPI Build Options allow you to modify settings for input and enable summary reports To access the HAPI Build options 1 Select BuildIHAPI Application 122 QDS Questionnaire Development System 2 Click on Options You will now see the Build Options box which includes four tabs Operations Appearance Date Time and Summary Reports Appearance Date Time Summary Reports El geg KEYLGaTG IAput BT SEUSS OASEN M E E U
253. nd B etc You may accept the default suffix or type in a different letter For example a variable name entered as EVER amp C would be written out as EVERA for the first category EVERB for the second etc Enter a description of the category This information will be used for the table on paper questionnaires This text may also be inserted into the wording of questions or information presented for this category in an automated interview or into variable labels for this category To insert this text use the amp LBL substitution token For example a label entered as amp LBL purchased on the Internet would be written out as Clothing purchase on the Internet Toys purchased on the Internet etc ve aside Enter a description of the category This text may also be inserted into the wording of questions or information presented for this category in an automated interview or into variable 232 QDS Questionnaire Development System labels for this category To insert this text use the amp TXT substitution token For example a question entered as Have you purchased any amp TXT in the last 6 months would be written out as Have you purchased any clothing in the last 6 months Have you purchased any toys in the last 6 months etc Alternate amp ALT substitute Enter an alternate description of the category optional This text may also be inserted into the wording of questions or information presented for this categor
254. necessity of tracking and entering unique identifiers you can create a Calculated Subject ID To do this create an automatic variable named SUBJECT that is calculated through the concatenation linking together of Today s Date and Today s Time 1 Create an automatic variable called TODAY of type Today s Date 2 Create an automatic variable called TIME of type Current Time 3 Create an automatic variable called SUBJECT of type String Expression 4 Enter the following text into the Numeric Calculation String Expression box CONCAT TODAY TIME To see these specifications you can view the sample file Automated Subject ID QDS This technique can also be used to concatenate other variables e g month of birth last 4 digits of SSN gender Response Cards 241 RESPONSE CARDS What Is a Response Card Often a single scale or Response Set is used for many questions in an instrument For example you might use the rating scale Very Likely Likely Not Likely Very Unlikely for each question in an entire section It would be tedious to have to enter your Response Set Very Likely Likely Not Likely Very Unlikely for each question that will use this set of responses You can use response cards to create your own Response Types For the example listed above you might create a response card called LIKELY Then for any questions that will use Very Likely Likely Not Likely Very Unlikely as their Response Set the Respons
255. need to enter the modify password and then enter a user name for the data correction log After clicking OK data can be modified for that version Working With Password Protected Data 169 Data Corrections Log Using Modify Passwords If a user name was entered along with the modify password the data corrections log now reflects that user name and also indicates where interviews were deleted or undeleted Sample log file where Laura is the user name Changes made 09 30 04 to C QDS Test1 QDW by Laura ID Variable s Changed 15559 B SITE B 1112 B Interview deleted B 1112 B Interview undeleted 0 6261 A Interview deleted B 6667 B SUBJ ECT Working With Multiple Versions 171 WORKI NG WTH MULTIPLE VERSIONS While developing your form you will likely go through many different versions before finalizing the product This process often continues even after data collection has been started QDS produces a new version of your data collection application every time you rebuild your control files This occurs whether or not you have made any changes since the last build Note Control files built for the same instrument for multiple languages or data collection modes will always have separate version identifiers Multiple versions of a single data collection instrument may be warehoused together i e in a single warehouse The version is displayed in the second column of the warehouse file Local Warehou
256. neme code that DECtalk does not recognize you will receive an error message If no errors are found the Custom Dictionary will be saved in a file named USER_US DIC This file should be copied to the QDS Admin folder for any computers using your ACASI application See the QDS Design Studio online help under the topic DECtalk Commands for information on how to correct pronunciation errors select different types of voices and use DECtalk Commands See the Fonix Web site at http www fonixspeech com pages dectalk_5 php for general information about DECtalk The error code DECtalk dictionary not found sometimes occurs when ACASI cannot locate the custom dictionary file One solution is often to copy the custom dictionary to the same location as your control file Using Audio If you decide to use human voice recordings you will need to create recorded WAV files for all Data Element question text response category text Information Element text and Edit Element messages Although the actual creation of WAV files will be done outside of QDS QDS includes a number of features to help track and manage audio files If you elect to use human voice recordings each text item e g question text information text must be recorded in a separate audio file with a unique file name The file name of each audio file minus the WAN extension must be entered into the Audio File box for each element in the Design Studio One of the fi
257. nneer nenene nnne 31 Data TE CN 33 Data Element T b aaaea anes seeds dectey cdugnschadeeecet ca aaa aaa a daaa aaa 33 TOXEOT QUESTION iriri aa cevgeces dane dee E dE tege 34 Variable Name EE 34 Vanagble Label cisarina a i a EE 35 Response Type aricei eieiei ainainen NEEN anada atini Aaii AER 35 Duestion Nummbertng see EEN aaa 36 QUESTION SUTIK E 36 Increment Question Number Integer c cccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeessaeeneeeeee 36 QUESTION NUmMDET seriesas detaan aaia EAA EAE AEE 36 Audio UM In 37 Audio We Eelere EE 37 Branch TO NEE 37 Response Set Tab E 37 Response Set Tab vesiho 38 Response Set Tab Gender 39 Response Set Tab Nominal Pick One 40 Response Set Tab Nominal Check Each 42 Response Set Tab Date iniciran riinan SEENEN iideieliichaces 44 Response Set Tab Time of Day 00 ecceeeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaaeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeee 46 Response Set Tab Time Span ccccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeseeeeeaeeseeeseeeees 47 Response Set Local Currency ttnet 49 Response Set Number 50 Response Set Tab Numeric Rating Scale seeeseeseeeeeeeee netee erne eee rererere nrrrnerne e 51 Response Set Tab Text cc cccccsecseccencecdseceseesccenceneasdesessseebaceecucnndesesddbaeceaseadesasvevsaaeess 52 Response Set Tab Pattern c ccccccceseseeceeececeeeeesaeeeeaeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeeesnees 53 Probes ebe EE 53 Apple Tabu eege EE ee 54 Ap
258. not permit branching to an earlier element in the questionnaire This rule was added to preclude the possibility of an infinite loop and because no clear need for backward branching was anticipated If you believe you have such a case please notify the QDS vendor and let the design team know Select About QDS under the Help menu for instructions on how to contact the vendor Bad block found at offset for element x HAPI only Operating system error Cannot Build Products There are two possible causes for this error The specifications for the element noted in the message may have been updated by a newer version of the Design Studio which would have been noted in an error message immediately prior to this one If no such message appeared the element specifications have been corrupted and must be restored Cannot Create Data Entry Control File QDS is unable to write to the data entry control file you selected There may be a network or application sharing violation the drive may have gone off line or there may be a hardware error If you cannot determine the cause of the problem try creating the file on a different drive Cannot Create DE Control File QDS is unable to create a NOVA DE control file because the specifications are too complex for NOVA DE You may try simplifying the specifications or request the QDE product instead See NOVA DE Limitations for a discussion of features that NOVA DE cannot support
259. ntaining unencrypted data Interviews that have been reconciled and converted to an encrypted version will then also be encrypted Data Security 217 Using Read Passwords in the Data Collection Modules When a read password has been defined in the Design Studio it will be necessary to supply it before any data collection is allowed The procedure for supplying the password is similar across modules Adding Passwords When you first open your interview module you will need to supply the password the password process is parallel across all interview modules DE CAPI HAPI ACASD 1 Go to Toolsl Add Passwords in your interview module 2 Select your control file and click Add ben 3 Enter your password 4 Select OK to save If a user attempts to enter data in a read password protected file before supplying the password the following message appears 218 QDS Questionnaire Development System Note You will need to re enter your password in CAPI HAPI and ACASI every time a control file is rebuilt even if the password was not changed in the Design Studio Removing Passwords When data collection is complete the password information can be removed 1 Go to ToolsIRemove Passwords in your interview module 2 Select your control file and click Remove 3 QDS will ask if you are sure you want to delete password information for your control file 4 Ifyou select Yes you will be prompted to ent
260. ntity of a respondent can be compromised if a data file falls into the wrong hands Default With the Default selection QDS encrypts data until it is opened in the Warehouse Manager or exported using the QDA utility A password is not needed to write or read data A modify password may be optionally added if added the Delete modify password button will be enabled 214 QDS Questionnaire Development System Default encryption automatically converts embedded text in the data file to an unreadable format that ensures the privacy of each response The text remains encrypted until opened in the Warehouse Manager You can copy both encrypted and unencrypted data into the same warehouse file so you will be able to add encrypted data to any existing warehouse file that you have already started with a previous version of QDS Read password Data collected using read password encryption requires the password to read export data in the Warehouse Manager or to export data using the QDA utility The password is also necessary for all data collection CAPI HAPI ACASI DE Again a modify password may be optionally added Read password encryption provides the greatest level of privacy since other QDS users will not be able to view or export your data from the Warehouse Manager without supplying the correct password The password must be supplied before conducting automated interviews with a read password protected questionnaire Modify
261. nts LOG ccseecceseeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeseeeseseaeenseeeseeees 199 ODS De fa lt Settings isis neissnninwrinetinandieninnidnaninatisaninsadienianniseaiwetiannimadin 201 Changing Data Defaults for New Elements csseccsseceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeseeseseeeeeeeeess 201 Data Elements iser ege swethciees cadets ccnskcepandeesbertceanetseestidvanedenced ote tetallecistnanedhidieyebans 202 YES io eessen ci ged pace cn ees Ee ict one Eelere ee 203 Standard Codes Abu 204 INU EE 204 RRE 205 BEIEN 206 Lu 207 Lu 208 Special COMSS EE 209 BANGIN DEE 210 le Ee NEE 210 Changing Data Defaults for Preexisting Element cccssccseeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeteees 211 Data SOOUPINY acisre eaaa areae iarasi 213 SE DOEN eege eege ee eege 213 ler en oeeetzesgrieegbeeegbt ageet ee kdegekEdegSeeeed eeE AAESEee E deeE EE EERgEEEE EES 213 NET 213 Read DASSWOIKL ccicssssscaessanecadesdadeaisuadecadvabediacssaaetensavadccadssasdeuastasecaassdeicalauasecacuaastcaesd 214 Modify passwords EE 214 USING PaSSWOMS uosc2 cccsicccetetcceteeeetecdenntecnceceeseede sttcesneceeuseedestiedaceceteneeeaunecesenreduecesttcdede 215 Changing PasswordSi i EE 215 Deleting SEET E 216 More About Password Protection cccccccesscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesceeseseeeeneeeeeseeeseseaeenseeeeeeneess 216 Important Notes on PASSWOMS ccsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseceeeesaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 216 Using Read Passwords in the Data Collection Modules
262. nversion item and select OK lt Edit Conversion Settings GAD File Select OK on the File Conversion Properties property sheet Select OK on the Options property sheet The filter can be re enabled by resetting the conversion type to QAD file Program Synching HAPI Data Files You will use the Microsoft ActiveSync software to synchronize QDS HAPI data files to your laptop desktop Installing the HAPI Module ActiveSync Before you can install the HAPI Module on your computer you first need to have ActiveSync installed and a standard partnership set up 1 Install Microsoft ActiveSync on your system according to the instructions provided with your device Place the Pocket PC in its cradle and respond to the ActiveSync prompts to define a standard partnership Select the Options button from the ActiveSync menu From the Options dialog box check the Files checkbox and select OK HAPI 133 Note The QDS setup program also installs Microsoft s Enhanced RSA Encryption pack on devices running Pocket PC 2002 This file is not installed on newer devices To set up ActiveSync to automatically synchronize files when the device is cradled 1 From the Options dialog box select the Settings button to see the full path name of the synchronization folder on your PC and click OK 2 Go to the Schedule tab on the Options dialog box 3 Click the first combo box When connected to my PC syn
263. o Don t Know Refuse to Answer Not Applicable Missing Skipped Dates Date Components Year Month Day Date Span Components Years Months Weeks Days Times Time of Day Components Hour Minutes Seconds Time Span Components Hours Minutes Seconds Automated interviews Clear Back Alt A response is required Number is too big Number is too small Previous Question Next Question Repeat the Question Try Again Use Anyway Paper Interviews Read Hand Card Response to Ask of Men only Ask of Women only Skip to Instruction before end of questionnaire Choose one Check all that apply Conditionals If is equal to is greater than is less than then is not equal to is not greater than is not less than and or not Keyboard Specify the characters that should appear on the standard keypad Default is Working With Multiple Languages 249 E a E gt E WW Ka o o E E a E D Ri 9 a E E i E WW Alt Keyboard Specify the characters that should appear on the alternate keypad Default is Once errors are corrected you have completed the translation process same file In your file listing you will see only one copy of your specifications A language does not represent a separate file only a different portion of the file Deleting a Language To remove a language from your specifications file 1 Select LanguagelSelect 2 Select the language you would like to de
264. o a maximum of 8 characters and containing no blank spaces The characters lt gt and are also prohibited Invalid Form of Constant The numeric constant is not valid for QDS Note that scientific notation is not permitted For example X 1 2E5 is invalid See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Invalid Marker ID Markers names must be 8 characters or less Invalid Question Number Prefix Question number prefixes are limited to three characters and may not end with a digit Invalid Question Number Suffix Question number suffixes may not end with a digit Invalid Specifications QDS has found one or more errors in the specifications for this questionnaire that preclude building any interview products A list of errors is displayed in a window directly below the list of elements Double click on an error message to open the element for correction Right click on the error message for a more detailed Appendix B 267 explanation of the error Invalid Specifications File The file selected does not appear to be a QDS specifications file It may be a different file type with the QDS file extension improperly added to the file name or it may be corrupted The file is unusable by QDS and cannot be recovered Invalid Substitution Form The amp character is reserved to indicate special tokens for which text Substitutions will be made The valid s
265. o switch to CAPI Computer Assisted Personal Interview for respondents who have difficulty either working with computers or reading During a power failure or in a remote location you may want to use a paper and pencil version of your form If you are undecided about which method s to employ for your study try each to see what works best A control file translates your design specifications into commands that the E Data Entry CAPI ACASI program uses to administer or collect data during interviews or data entry Types of Interview Data Collection Products QDS allows you to generate several types of interview data collection products from the same set of specifications file including Questionnaire Interviewer Builds an RTF Rich Text Format file for a paper form survey that will be completed by an interviewer data collection clerk Questionnaire Self Administer Builds an RTF file for a paper form survey that will be self administered Data Entry Application Builds a QDS control file for entering data from a paper form into an electronic data file CAPI Applicatton Builds a QDS control file for administering a CAPI Computer Assisted Personal Interview interview In a CAPI interview an interviewer reads the questions from the computer t and enters the respondent s answers into the computer 86 QDS Questionnaire Development System ACASI Application 00 0000a0aeeee Buil
266. of interviews through the View Sort menu option see Sorting Cases on page 163 Add the cases to the warehouse by selecting EditlCopy Note that the status code for each case in the data file is changed as it is copied You can also transfer selected interviews by dragging and dropping them from the data file to the warehouse file To drag and drop use the mouse to select the cases The Warehouse Manager 157 to be copied to the warehouse hold the left mouse button down and drag the group to the Warehouse window The message Discarding N bytes from end of interview file sometimes occurs when opening an interview file in the Warehouse Manager however this does not mean that there is a problem Sometimes QDS pads the end of the file with bytes that are not needed When the file is reopened QDS informs you that it is removing the excess bytes For the First Questionnaire example we have collected data at Site 1 some with CAPI and some with DE Because we eventually plan to conduct interviews at more than one site and at more than one visit we have included variables for site SITE and visit VISIT in the specifications file VISIT has been specified as a part of the Unique Identifier You may view the following sample specifications interview local warehouse and data files First Questionnaire v2 QDS Specifications File First Questionnaire QDW Local Warehouse First Questionnaire Site 1 1 QAD CAPI Data
267. ole word only Direction Cancel C Up Down T Match case Restrict Search To I Question and Information Text I Section Header M Variable Name IT Response Card IT Variable Label To access the Find function select EditIFind from the menu bar Select EditlFind Next to repeat the last find operation To use the Find feature enter your search text in the Find What box The following options are available for the Find function Match Whole Word Onlly Finds only whole words that match the text in the Find What string Match Case Finds only text that matches the case of the characters in the Find What string exactly Direction EEN Specifies which direction to search If Up is selected the search starts at the current element and moves to the top of the file If Down is selected the search starts at the current element and moves to the bottom of the file Question and Information Text Check this box to restrict the Find function to the question text field of a Data Element or the information text field of an Information element Variable Name 00000aiaiaeeeanaeen Check this box to restrict the Find function to the variable name field of a Data Element or Automatic variable Variable Label Check this box to restrict the Find function to the variable label field of a Data Element or Automatic variable Section Header Check this box to restrict the Find function to Section Header
268. ollected normally and then copied to a warehouse data file using the Warehouse Manager If after reviewing the data Laura decides to change a response she will highlight the interview that needs revision and select Edit Details After Edit Details is selected QDS will prompt for a user name and modify password f Laura forgets the password she will not be able to modify a response Laura will also need to supply the modify password in order to delete an interview Laura may continue to make changes without re entering the password until she highlights an interview that is associated with a different version of her questionnaire When Stacy receives warehouse shipment files from Laura she will also be required to provide the correct modify password before making any revisions to the file Special Codes 221 SPECI AL CODES Usinc Dov r KNOW REFUSED AND NOT APPLICABLE Often you will wish to include Don t Know Refused to Answer or Not Applicable as possible response choices You have the option to include these responses for any Data Element on the corresponding Response Set Tab Special Code Values The QDS default values for special codes are e Don t Know 9 7 e Refused to Answer 9 8 Not Applicable 9 9 Skipped 9 9 You will notice that the default codes are the same for Not Applicable and Skipped In general elements are skipped because they are already known based on responses to earlier
269. on 76 QDS Questionnaire Development System 5 Enter text to be displayed in the Text box Information Element Tabs In addition to the settings described above there are other Information Element options Info Element Other options on the Info Element tab are Audio File Name Enter name of Audio File corresponding to this element only applicable for ACASI interviews using recorded files for audio Audio Interruptible 2 00 00 0 Check this box to allow the respondent to proceed to the next element before the entire text has been read Applicability You can use the settings on the Applicability tab to restrict the inclusion of this information By default this Information Element will be applicable for both men and women and for all interview methods M M Alene Wetegores E ExXcueae iran Cateqores Scots egbaig To restrict applicability uncheck the box next to one or more categories Remember to use gender applicability you must have a gender Data Element designated as Determines Gender Applicability Information Comment Section Header and Format Elements 77 Notes Enter notes to the developer you This information will not appear on paper forms or in computer administered interviews and is available in the Design Studio only Info Element Applicability Notes Text Information Element a Cancel Anp Help Comment Elements Comment Elements al
270. on a weekly basis you could rename your C Research Folder Survey1 En CAPI QAD data file to Survey1 En CAPI 100105 A 1 QAD to indicate that it was closed on October 1 2005 at Site A on computer 1 Getting Started 19 Other Documentation You can create documentation directly from your QDS Design Studio file Build menu gt Paper version Go to BuildlQuestionnaire Interviewer or Self admin Even if you never plan to use a paper questionnaire this is useful for documentation and review gt Codebook Go to BuildlICodebook The codebook includes variable names variable labels value labels question text and item lengths We can build and save these with the default names surveyl EN Qx RTF and survey 1 Codebook RTF for our short questionnaire Reports Summary reports can be optionally produced at the completion of every interview these are saved into an RTF file and contain all the questions and responses of the interview For our questionnaire we can add the Summary Report option by selecting the Options button on the BuildICAPI Application Control File box Next we go to the Summary Reports tab and check the Enable production of summary reports box Operations Appearance Spin Controls Summary Reports Options Iw Prompt to view report File name prefix surveyt En CAFI By default our summary report files will be named survey 1 En CAPI Unique Identifier RTF They will be s
271. on and version being reconciled l y 5 E d i 8 User Prompt Conversion label No prompt Marked as Identical S 6 S S o ge Automatically mapped to standard No prompt arked as Name Change i g p i Automatically mapped to standard 6 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes Marked as Identical No Renamed and appended to standard 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes arked as Name Change No Variable appended to standard 6 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes Marked as Equivalent No Renamed and appended to standard 6 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes Marked as Equivalent No Renamed and appended to standard 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes Marked as Equivalent No Renamed and appended to standard 6 6 6 Equivalent Yes Marked as Equivalent No Variable appended to standard 6 6 6 6 No prompt arked as Recode Needed Renamed and appended to standard 6 6 6 No prompt arked as Recode Needed Appended to standard 6 6 No prompt arked as Recode Needed Appended to standard 6 Variable not in standard version Yes Notincluded in standard Discard No Marked as Recode Needed and appended to standard Variable notin standard version Yes Not included in standard Discard No Marked as Recode Needed and appended to standard 174 QDS Questionnaire Development System QDS Renaming Conventions Sometimes QDS has to assign a new variable name during the reconciliation process The overwhelming major
272. ons one for Yes and one for No QDS provides standard versions of these buttons which appear at right You may select buttons by Pressing the appropriate button using the mouse or touchscreen Using the Tab key on the keyboard to navigate through each button on the screen and pressing Enter when the appropriate button is highlighted Using the keyboard shortcut indicated on the Response Set tab in the specification file Gender Response Gender responses work in the same manner as Yes No questions see above Nominal Pick One Response Cards Each choice will have a separate button The buttons may contain plain text or pictures A button may be selected by clicking on it with the mouse or pressing it on a touchscreen If a button has an associated letter key see Response Set tab settings that key may be pressed to select the button You may also use the Tab key to navigate through buttons until the desired one is in focus and then press Enter Nominal Check Each Response Cards A Check List Response allows you to select one or more of the displayed choices Each choice is a separate text button Picture buttons are not permitted for Check Lists When you press a choice button or key its corresponding letter a checkmark appears inside the button to indicate that it has been selected Press the button again and the checkmark will disappear Checked Unchecked Va Sunday A Sunday 114 QDS Questionnaire
273. ontally Position value labels Indicate whether the value labels will be displayed to right default or to left of values Position branch instruction Indicate whether the branch instruction will be displayed to right default to left or below Response Set For written values use Specify the format of the response field underscores _ three sided box _ or four sided box O Underscores is the default Indent this Data Element Specify the level of indentation for Response Sets Select default indentation to let QDS control the indentation Select None to indicate that there should be no indentation or specify a specific indentation level 1 3 Format settings may be overridden if the program is unable to lay out the information as requested For instance even if Display Value List has been set to horizontally categories may be displayed vertically if there is not enough room to display all categories in a single line Calculations Tab Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations i Skipped Notes l Response Set In calculations treat special codes as m Don t know From kek C Zero Limited range Refused C Zero CG Allowable range C Limited range m Not applicable Fram CG Zero C Allowable range C Limited range i 99999999 Except tests of equality or inequality The Calculations ta
274. or ACASI interviews Response Set Tab Gender Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations if Skipped Notes Response Set Allow Value Button Key Audio File M Male ft ae IM male V Female a Fem F keck Jh Don t Know g z 8 M Refused a Determines Gender Applicabili M Not Applicable DR j S Allow Checkboxes indicate whether or not each response is allowed for this element Both Male and Female are required responses for Gender Elements To disallow a response uncheck the corresponding box Value Enter the value to be assigned to each response The assigned values for Special Codes may be changed to integers between 0 and 9 but should not match codes assigned to the Male or Female response Default values are Male 1 Don t Know 7 Female 2 Refused Not Applicable 9 Branching Option Use this option to specify the path to be followed depending on the response selected Default branching is set on the Data Element tab You may indicate 40 QDS Questionnaire Development System that a skip over a specific number of elements or to a specified marker should be triggered for certain responses Button As with Yes No response types QDS supplies default buttons for Gender responses Names of these bitmap file sets Male Fem will be entered automatically in the Button text boxes If you prefer you can create your own buttons to replace the QDS defaults See Creating Bitmap
275. orrect folder and file Once you have confirmed that all information is correct select Open to launch your ACASI application After clicking Open on the ACASI Application dialog box your application will open in a separate window You will see only the ACASI Interviewing Screen on which the first question will appear you will not see any menus or status bars ACASI displays only one item at a time on a screen Question text appears in a box at the top and special response and navigation buttons are located along the right edge of the screen Entering ACASI Responses ACASI Responses are entered in the same manner as those for CAPI See Entering Interview Responses in CAPI on page 113 There is an additional button on the bottom right hand corner of the ACASI screen Repeat the Question When this button is selected either the DECtalk computer generated voice or the WAV file recorded voice will read the question again Saving ACASI Interviews At the end of the interview the ACASI module will ask if you would like to save the data from your interview If you click Yes the record will be written out to the data file QAD If you respond No the program will require confirmation prior to discarding the data ACASI 151 If an interview is interrupted improperly or the computer or program shuts down unexpectedly all data recorded to that point will be written out to the data file however the interview file will be lef
276. ort Elements Custom reports are added as Report Elements and all the options are set on the Report Element tabs We will first briefly go through how to add a report and then detail all the options To add and customize a report 1 Select EditlInsert and choose Report 2 Define your report structure including file name prefix headers and footers and alignment see Report Element Tab below 3 Go to the Contents tab and enter in your report content which may include variable data and accompanying text see Contents Tab on page 70 4 Add font options applicability or notes on the final three tabs 5 Select OK to save your report specifications Report Element Tab The Report Element Main tab is used to define overall structure of the report including the report name where the report should be saved orientation alignment and header footer information 70 QDS Questionnaire Development System Report Element Contents Fonts Applicability Notes File name prefix Folder name First Q Report Reports MV Prompt to view report Header and Footer Orientation Header text Header alignment Portrait First Report amp FLP Left k C Landscape Footer text Footer alignment Page amp PGN of amp PGT Let DI The following options can be specified File name prefix The interview s identifier variable s will append to this field to create the complete file n
277. ote You may also use the Copy eh Cut Wp and Paste El buttons from the toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts Ctrl c to copy Ctrl x to cut and Ctrl v to paste Editing Elements At any time while building specifications in the Design Studio you can go back and view or edit any of your element specifications Double click on the element you wish to view or edit from the Specifications File element list and make your modifications When you are finished click OK Note that you can also use the Element View button from the toolbar In addition the Next Element and Previous Element Ce buttons on the toolbar enable you to move quickly between different element specifications Deleting Elements To delete an element or group of elements 1 Select the element s you would like to delete To select more than one element click on the first element in the group and while holding down the Shift Key click on the last element in the group 2 Select EditlIDelete or the Delete Element s X button from the toolbar The deleted element s will be removed from the element list Locating Elements Find and Go To The Find function allows the user to search for words or phrases located in questionnaire elements and response cards The Go To function allows the user to jump to a new location in the file by specifying an element number 30 QDS Questionnaire Development System Find ax Find what subjecl I Match wh
278. ough the default settings will often meet your interviewing requirements CAPI Build Options provide the opportunity to refine settings for input and formatting To access the CAPI Build Options 1 Select BuildICAPI Application 2 Click on Options You will now see the Build Options box shown below which includes four tabs Operations Appearance Spin Controls and Summary Reports Operations Appearance Spin Controls Summary Reports Function keys Don t Know a E Iw Replace entered values with skip code Refused Es CO d F Disallow resumption of completed interviews T Not Applicable Fg D Pause between screens Eat password 500 milliseconds Operations Tab The Operations tab allows you to refine input settings The following options can be modified for CAPI applications the grayed out options are only applicable to ACASI Support keyboard inpult By default CAPI interviews will accept keyboard touchscreen and mouse input Uncheck this box to disable keyboard input This option can be overridden by settings on the Response Set tab for Text Response Data Elements Replace entered values Replaces previously entered values with a skip code if a response is changed and triggers a new skip pattern When a response is changed it can affect subsequent branching paths and may cause previously answered items to be skipped Leave this box checked if you would lik
279. ous Question Next Question Repeat the Question Error Messages Paper Interviews If Then Skip to etc Conditionals Equal Less than Greater than etc Not Enough Arguments The function being used does not contain the required number of arguments See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Numeric Variable Required You have specified an expression that references a possibly nonnumeric variable where only numeric variables are permitted Numeric variables are required in numeric operations e g addition multiplication or function arguments If you are referencing the correct variable you must change the Response Type for its Data Element to a numeric type All Response Types are considered numeric except Text and Pattern Options Restored to System Defaults The options settings for this questionnaire have been set to the standard QDS defaults provided as Factory Settings distributed with the QDS software Specifications for current elements of this questionnaire are not affected To apply the new options settings to the current specifications use the Global Changes command in the Tools menu Options Restored to User Defaults The options settings for this questionnaire have been set to the Standard defaults contained in the local installation options file UserOpts QDO Specifications for current elements of this questionnaire are not affected To apply the new o
280. out correct password gt Unable to modify values gt Unable to reconcile versions gt Unable to import reconciliations gt Unable to export reconcilations Unable to display next screen HAPI only Operating system error Unable to open control file x Operating system error Unable to provide data encryption for this questionnaire CAPI ACASI HAPI or Data Entry will not be able to encrypt your data and will store each response in unencrypted format Unable to read control file x due to invalid format HAPI only Operating system error Unable to read element x HAP I only Operating system error Unable to read encrypted data in questionnaire version The Warehouse Manager is unable to read copy or export an encrypted interview because the appropriate password has not been Supplied or Microsoft s Hight Encryption Pack has not been installed Unable to read interview Specifications HAPI only Operating system error Unable to resume pending interview HAP only Operating system error Unable to save interview due to i o error HAPI only Operating system error Unable to verify password because Microsoft s High You must install Microsoft s High Encryption Pack before you are able to encrypt your data or define any study passwords 274 QDS Questionnaire Development System Encryption Pack has not been installed on this system Un
281. ow E Errors found in Demo QDS Element 2 defines variable GENDER which is duplicated in Element 3 Element 3 defines variable GENDER which is duplicated in Element 2 This error message would be displayed if both the second and third element in the specifications file had been assigned the same name GENDER 82 QDS Questionnaire Development System Explain Right clicking on each error message produces an option window with pi two choices Explain or Fix Select Explain to request an explanation of the error message Select Fix to go to the item that requires correction Double clicking on the error accomplishes the same purpose as selecting Fix i e it will also take you to the item that requires correction You will need to correct all validation errors before you will be able to build most QDS products The only product that can be built from specifications containing validation errors is the Change History After correcting any problems run the validation step again to confirm that all errors have been resolved and that no new errors have been introduced Validation Error Messages While the QDS validation step cannot ensure that all Skip and Edit Elements have been implemented appropriately it can catch a number of errors that would cause problems during data collection See below for a complete listing of validation error messages Identifier Variables Element defines the ID Variable lt Variable N
282. owable range The QDS default selection is Not Applicable If both the Calculations see above and If Skipped tab options are left at their default settings the skipped Data Element will be evaluated as zero for internal calculations and tests You may also specify conditions for a choice with an If logical statement in the text box to the right of the selection In this case you could select more than 58 QDS Questionnaire Development System one choice The condition for one choice may be omitted to indicate that that choice should be selected if all other conditions evaluate FALSE If more than one specified condition evaluates TRUE the first higher in the list will be selected If you check more than one box you must enter a logical condition Keep in mind that the If Skipped tab instructions affect only the value used in performing internal calculations and tests they do not alter the Skip Code value stored in the raw data for this interview Notes Tab Enter any information into the text box that you want to keep on file to assist other researchers or yourself concerning the use of this element This is a good place to record notes about how this element should be handled during analysis Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations f Skipped Notes Response Set Tex Skips and Markers 59 CONTROLLING THE FLOW SKIPS AND MARKERS Typically a questionnaire follows a sequ
283. parentheses Unrecoverable Specifications File QDS has attempted to recover a corrupted specifications file but has not found a single valid element This is either a new specifications file to which no element has yet been added or the file is badly corrupted The file is unusable by QDS User Options Have Been Updated The local installation options file UserO pts QDO has been updated to match the current options settings for this questionnaire Variable Name Too Long A variable name must begin with a letter must be no longer than 7 characters and may contain only letters or digits You may elect to allow QDS to determine some or all of those characters for you by using substitution tokens Remember that a substitution token may represent multiple characters Write Error An error occurred while trying to write to the disk Y our specifications file may now be corrupt but it can be recovered when itis reloaded Appendix C 275 Appendix C QDS File Extensions QDS Files Extension Produced by Description QAD CAPI QPI EXE ACASI Automated Interview Data File contains data for all QSILEXE HAPI QPP EXE computer administered interviews QDE Design Studio QDS EXE Data Entry Application Control File translates design specifications into commands the Data Entry module uses to run the data entry collection module QDO Design Studio QDS EXE QDS User Options File contains user defined data default
284. pendix B 273 Translation Needed Code Text You have not yet provided a translation in the noted language for all codes used by this element If you are not currently using this language you can temporarily remove it by selecting the Language Delete command Translation Needed Edit Message You have not yet provided a translation for this element s message text in the noted language If you are not currently using this language you can temporarily remove it by selecting the Language Delete command Translation Needed Information You have not yet provided a translation for this element s information text in the noted language If you are not currently using this language you can temporarily remove it by selecting the Language Delete command Translation Needed Question Text You have not yet provided a translation for this element s question text in the noted language If you are not currently using this language you can temporarily remove it by selecting the Language Delete command Translation Needed Response Card You have not yet provided a translation for all codes used by this element s response card If you are not currently using this language you can temporarily remove it by selecting the Language Delete command Unable to without correct password You cannot perform the following Warehouse Manager functions before providing the correct password gt Unable to save document with
285. ping between the Shipment File and Local Warehouse windows will also transfer selected interviews Generating Receipt Files After you have closed your warehouse file QDS will automatically generate a receipt file for each shipment file that you added to that warehouse file Each file will have the shipment name plus the extension QSR and will reside in the same folder as your warehouse file Now you can send the receipt files QSR to the data collection site at which the shipment files originated Posting Receipts At the data collection field site you will receive one or more receipt files QSR To process these Select FilelOpen Warehouse to open the local data warehouse Select FilelOpen to open the receipt file Select Shipment Receipt Files from the Files of type box Select the receipt file QSR to post Click Open Select WindowlTile Horizontally to view Local Warehouse and Receipt windows at the same time ee ee 7 From the Receipt File window select the interview s to post receipts for or select EditlSelect All to select all interviews in receipt file 8 Select EditlIPost Receipts Note The status of each corresponding interview in the local warehouse changes from Shipped to Transferred The status of each posted interview in the shipment receipt file is now Deleted X Since all the cases in the shipment receipt file are deleted after posting the cases are removed and the file becomes emp
286. plete any reconciliation conversion prior to export See Working With Multiple Versions on page 171 All standard version cases will be exported It is not possible to select a subset for export The exported file will completely replace a previously exported file of the same name To see how many cases you have ready for export select ViewlVersions highlight the standard version and click on Details To export data go to FilelExport Interviews note that this menu item is enabled only in a local warehouse not in a source data file Next choose the type of file you would like to export from the Save as type box SPSS System File SAV SAS Format Library Program XPT which includes SAS format syntax statement file SAS Available as of QDS v2 1 SAS Transport File XPT for SAS 6 12 or SAS 8 MS Access Relational Database MDB MS Access Flat Database MDB Interviewer Comments Log TXT Type a valid Windows file name into the File Name box and click Save QDS will open a dialog box that reads X interview s have been exported to C lt filename gt where X is the number of cases exported There are additional export options for each file type To change the default export options click the Options button on the Save As box see SPSS Save As Options on page 188 SAS Save As Options on page 190 and Save As Options MS Access Flat Database on page 196 188 QDS Questionnaire Development System
287. plicability Respondent s Gender 54 Applicability Table Categories cccccecsceceeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeneeeeeaas 55 Applicability Interview Method 55 SVIES Laboen 55 Table of Contents iii Calculations Tebtz tee ee ee EE 56 Eo ol hil o Heine ee EE 57 Not s Tab 58 Controlling the Flow Skips and Markers cccccsssssssseeeeeeteeeeeeeees 59 Marker Eleme nts iq cesicsoec fi cn ceccce tated ee EN 59 SKip Eeer 60 Edit Elemen S inition ene neal 63 CONSISTENCY CHECKS E 63 Launching Another Interview cccsccsseceeseeeeeceeeesneeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeneeeeessaeseseeeenseeeeeees 65 WEIEREN EE 66 Resuming Your First Questionnaire 0 0 cece eet eeeeeeeeeeee teen ee ceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeetaeeetaeeeeeeeee 67 Additional Edit Elements Options ccsccsseeeeeeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeeesceseseeeeeeseeeseeseneenenseaeees 67 RTR Sianna a ES 69 Inserting Report Elements ssssssussuunsuunnnuunnuunnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnnunnunnnuunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn annen 69 Report Element Tab 69 Contents Tabs EE 70 lu CEET 71 Applicability Tab EE 72 KR EE 72 Report Details and Options cccccssccesseeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeneeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeeeees 72 Substitution Tokens in Heporte 72 eeler EE 72 Report Element Erors 73 Viewing Reports in ACASI CAPI and HAD 73 Other Report Notes A 74 Information Comment Section Header and Format Elements 75 Information Elements
288. process through which text is rendered as audio at run time i e at the time of interview administration This process involves translating text into phonemes that are converted into audible sound The software that provides text to speech functionality in QDS ACASI is called DECtalk Speech Engine The DECtalk text to speech engine supports US English default Latin American Spanish Castilian Spanish German UK English and French Because the DECtalk Speech Engine is included as part of the QDS ACASI software no additional software is necessary to fully implement TTS audio for your application By default QDS will assume that TTS should be used if no audio files are specified 144 QDS Questionnaire Development System Several options exist that may be used to refine audio settings For example by default QDS does not read response categories and does not allow a response to be entered until the entire question has been read However both of these settings can be changed using options described in Audio Options a Creating a Custom Dictionary There will be times when you need to add a word to the DECtalk dictionary or change the way DECtalk pronounces a word For example you may want to have the word ID pronounced eye dee rather than ihd To do this you must create a custom DECtalk User Dictionary This can be done using the WinDic utility program that was installed with QDS To create a custom diction
289. ptions settings to the current specifications use the Global Changes command in the Tools menu Passwords must be between 7 and 127 characters in length Define a password with the correct length between 7 and 127 characters Please add appropriate password before running this control file For CAPI A CASI QDE HAPI you must enter the correct password before running the control file for the first time Product Has Been Built QDS has finished building the requested Rich Text Format RTF file No problems were encountered The file can be opened with your word processing software Select Yes to open the file now Switching to your word processor and return to the Design Studio later Select No to continue working in the Design Studio Question Number Reset Error Section Header Elements can be used to reestablish the next question umber prefix or question number integer to be assigned This feature may not be used to duplicate a question number already assigned to a prior Data Element To correct the problem change the Section Header Element to either a Notreset the question number 270 QDS Questionnaire Development System b Reset the question number prefix to a unique value c Resetthe question number to a larger integer Question Number Sequence Error Normally QDS determines the integer portion of all question numbers when the specifications are validated The integers are pres
290. r Clipboard Paste Error While trying to copy the selected elements from the clipboard QDS encountered an unusable element The most likely cause of this error is a cut copy paste operation between two different versions of the QDS software Cut copy paste operations should be performed within a single execution of the Design Studio If this is not the case try repeating the cut use Undo or copy operation then repeating the paste operation If the problem persists contact the QDS vendor Select About QDS under the Help menu for instructions on how to contact the vendor Appendix B 261 Code Conflict Standard responses e g Yes and No must have mutually exclusive codes If Yes has a code value of 1 No cannot also have a code value of 1 This applies to Male Female and Checked Not Checked as well Special codes Don t Know Refused Not Applicable do not need to be mutually exclusive Condition Ends Prematurely The expression is incomplete For example A B C would produce this message See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Confirming Always Discard You are changing the Undo Information option for this specifications file This message is asking you to confirm that you no longer want to retain Undo Information on the file If you select OK QDS will discard all Undo Information every time you save this file Since that information is used to generat
291. r registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation WordPerfect is a registered trademark of Corel Corporation SAS is a registered trademark of SAS Institute Inc SPSS is a registered trademark of SPSS Inc Sound Blaster and Creative Wave Studio are registered trademarks of Creative Technology Ltd DECTalk is a registered trademark of Fonix Corporation Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Last Revised May 2006 Table of Contents i Using this ANU ON scisssiisiiiisasienineisiiniasiicandiaiitndinhiiinideiniasbtddndiniceeninintints 1 Welcome t QDS iis eseu eerste ENEE NENNEN 1 System Requirements a si2ccccc6 icc aaae aaa aa a aa aaa aa aa Aaa E Aaaa aa aa aaan aa aa 1 Conventions Used in This Manual csssccsseeeeeseceeseeeenseeeeeeeeescaesesneeenseeeseaeseseeeenseeees 1 Menu Commande 2 Mouse Commande cece eeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeecaaaeseeeeeseeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeees 2 Sample NOS eet 2 Getting e le WE 2 E Oe e E 2 QDS enables VOU TOi speia oean a aa Aa aai eaaa EAE 2 QDS provides VOU WINS genni iaasa aaiae tested anaia aiaa aaaea 3 Modular Structure ccccececeseeeseneeenseeeeeneeesaeeensneeeneeeesaaesaseeeeneeeeesaesaseeeenseeessaesaseeeenseaeees 3 Design Studio Module 3 Data Collection Modules eee eeeeaeeseaaeseceeeseaaeeesaaeseneeeeeaeeesaeeneneeseaes 4 Warehouse Manager Module seseeeeesee
292. r answer choices Under Description of Category double click the first line in the list box that says lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt and you will see the Code Item box Code Item Code Value Audio File Description and Yalue Label Red Button Text optional Button File Key e Cancel In the Description box figure above we entered Red for our first choice and set the Code Value to 1 The text Red will be the Value Label and the Code Value of 1 will be the numeric value in the collected data if that choice is selected Select OK to save that code and continue to add choices in the same fashion until complete Our choices are complete with six colors from Red 1 Blue 2 to Purple 6 Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set ltem Description of category If Code Zero branch to Marker Se Oe Default for element v 3 Yellow KE If Don t Know branch same as 5 Ber Default C Code Zero Double click here to add a new code gt gt an an If Refused branch same as For Help press F1 Element 4 of 4 Date Questions Data Element With Date Response Type We next enter our Date of Birth question InsertlElement Data and select Date under Response Type On the Response Set tab we select the option to have a Getting Started 13 full date with a four digit year required The
293. r will change a value without realizing that an error has occurred If this option is not selected the program will beep but will proceed as soon as the same value has been keyed twice in succession A log file is kept to document any changes made during verification By examining the log you can learn where data entry staff may be having problems and confirm that the correct choices were made during verification The log file has the same name as the data file but with an extension of LOG Verifying an Interview Batch Once a batch of data entry is completed it is ready for verification It is recommended that the original keyer and verifier be different individuals To verify a batch 1 Locate the Data Entry Control File QDE icon using Windows Explorer Double click on the icon You will now see the Data Entry Open dialog box Select the correct folder from the Look in drop down box Select QDS Paper Interview Data Files QPD from the Files of type drop down box 6 Select the appropriate QPD file from the list box 7 Select the Verify Prior Interviews radio button 8 Click Open You will now see what appears to be a blank data entry screen However if you look at the status bar at the bottom of the data entry screen you can see details of the current record For instance the example below shows that we are currently verifying the second of three cases in the current batch that the record is currently part
294. rable the program will jump to the last question answered If this is the very last screen of the interview select Next Question to get the Save message prompt If it is not the end select Alt F4 to terminate the interview and save when prompted If the file is properly saved you should be able to then open the QAD file in the Warehouse Manager CAPI Data Files After you complete and save your interview s you will need to know how and where QDS has saved your data file Every time you conduct a CAPI interview QDS automatically creates a data file an RTF report file will also be created if the Summary Reports option was enabled under BuildICAPI Options Summary Report tab Each CAPI interview complete or partial is written to an Automated Interview Data File QAD These files can then be brought into the QDS Warehouse Manager Module for further processing and export see Working With Collected Data on page 153 Your CAPI data files and optionally an RTF summary report file are saved into the same folder as your control file with an extension of QAD Data collection will work as follows 1 You have a control file C Research Folder First Questionnaire En CAPI QPI 2 Following the first interview your saved data file will be C Research Folden First Questionnaire En CAPI QAD 118 QDS Questionnaire Development System 3 The next time you conduct a CAPI interview with the First Questionnaire En CAPI QPI
295. rd for each interview Es The sample file Transport MDB contains the exported data for the example in MS Access format Default settings were used to create this file Exporting to an MS Access Relational Database To export data to a relational database 1 Select FilelExport Interviews 2 Select MS Access Relational Database MDB from the Save as type box 3 Click Options and make desired changes See Save As Options Relational Database on page 198 4 Click Save A pop up dialog box will indicate how many interviews were exported The relational database export format may include the following six Access tables Ouestlon The number text and response type of each question Vartable The name label and value type of each variable Interview eee Identifying characteristics for each collected interview Start Time End Time Subject ID Language etc ValUC isere The value of each variable for each interview optional Comments aaaaaeaan Interviewer comments optional Seege geseet geeg The number of times each question was encountered and the total amount of time in seconds spent on each item optional 198 QDS Questionnaire Development System The tables are linked by identifiers created by the Warehouse Manager QuestionID VariableID and InterviewID The identifier values are arbitrary and may change with each export They serve only to link related information within
296. re used to create these files Exporting to a SAS Transport File To export your data to SAS 6 12 or SAS 8 1 Select FilelExport Interviews 2 Select SAS Transport File XPT from the Save as type drop down box 3 Click Options and make any desired changes See SAS Save As Options on page 190 4 Click Save A dialog box will tell you how many interviews were exported to the specified SAS transport file 190 QDS Questionnaire Development System SAS Save As Options Special Value Recodes Specified Values Recode to CG Special Codes Don t Know C Missing Refused C Range Bottom Not Applicable l BEE Leer C Range Top Skipped C Range Middle C Specified Values Missing After clicking the Options button from the Save As box the SAS Options box will open The following Label Special Value and Missing Data options may be set on the SAS Options window Include Question Number with Variable Label Check this box to include the question number with the variable label The question number will be added at the beginning of the label The default setting is not checked Special Value Recodes To change how QDS special values are exported select an option from the Special Value Recodes Recode to box Special Codes Select to have all special responses converted to their special codes as defined in the Design Studio Special respons
297. reconciliation rule you can do this from the Version Details property sheet This must be done prior to converting cases to the standard To modify your reconciliation rules go to ViewlVersions select the version whose rules you wish to modify click Details and select the Variables tab From the Variables tab double click on the variable whose reconciliation Version Variables rule you would like to modify You may change the variable in the VERSIE SES Ee t ag ll as th SUBJECT SUBJECT Identical standard it is mapped to as well as the METRO SUBWAY Name Change conversion type Identical Name LINE LINE Recode Needed CAR OWNCAR Name Change Change Equivalent Meaning Recode Gemeen Geen Gend Needed el Dereconciling If you decide to undo your reconciliation rules select ViewlVersions to open the Questionnaire Versions dialog box Then select a version that has been reconciled marked with a blue arrow to the left of the version in the list box Click on the Dereconcile button QDS will pop up a window stating This version has been reconciled to the current standard Are you sure you want to undo that reconciliation Click Yes and OK Note The dereconcilation process does not undo changes to the standard version made as a result of reconciliation For example the LINE variable in our example will remain a part of our standard 2 after Version 1 has been dereconciled Dereconciliation does not revert cases th
298. rized interviewing without programming Support for multiple language interviews Codebook and questionnaire change history gt Data security for both transmission and storage that meets Food and Drug Administration FDA clinical trial requirements EH Modular Structure The QDS system consists of several components or modules A module is one of the components or executable programs EXE that make up the Questionnaire Development System In order to create your own QDS forms and data collection applications your system should include the Design Studio and one or more of the Data Collection modules It may or may not include the Warehouse Manager Your system also includes the free Questionnaire Data to ASCII utility QDA EXE which can be used to convert your QDS data files to text files See Appendix E Questionnaire Data to ASCII Utility on page 281 for more information Function Module s Development Design Studio Module QDS EXE Data Collection Data Entry Module QDE EXE ACASI Module QSI EXE CAPI Module QPI EXE HAPI Module QPP EXE Data Management Warehouse Manager Module QWM EXE Design Studio Module The first step in creating a QDS application is to define questionnaire specifications in the Design Studio Your questionnaire specifications include all content and settings for your questionnaire including question text instructions A QDS Questionnaire Development System cond
299. rn to your most recent backup of this file The options have been restored to the system defaults provided as Factory Settings distributed with the QDS software Corrupted Specifications File The file that you selected to open appears to be a QDS specifications file that has been damaged Damage can occur if QDS shuts down abnormally perhaps due to a power failure In most cases QDS is able to recover the entire file up to the point of the last change made prior to shutdown Press OK to allow QDS to begin the recovery process Press Cancel to exitQDS without attempting to recover the file Corrupted Translations The standard translations for your questionnaire have been corrupted There may be physical damage to a portion of the 262 QDS Questionnaire Development System specifications file Try validating the file to learn the extent of the damage Running a disk checking utility may help You may want to return to your most recent backup of this file In any case all translations are being restored to their default values Corrupted Variable Dictionary QDS maintains a Variable Dictionary with information about each data variable for your questionnaire This dictionary is reconstructed whenever the specifications are validated Try revalidating your Specifications Current Time This message displays the format that should be used to enter time of day information This format should also be used when
300. rst things to decide is how to name your WAV files You may assign file names manually or you can have QDS automatically assign names 146 QDS Questionnaire Development System Audio File Renaming x File Name Prefix Naming Audio Files To have QDS automatically assign file names and enter appropriate references in the Audio File Name box prior to recording 1 Select ToolslAudio Files 2 Inthe resulting Audio File Renaming dialog box enter a File Name Prefix Cancel i Audio files to rename C Rename only if necessary C Rename if necessary or if text changed Rename all audios Ee The File Name Prefix must be a single letter that will be used to create unique names for each WAV file to be associated with your specification file WAV file names will consist of the File Name Prefix followed by sequential numbers generated by QDS 3 Select the Rename all audios radio button This process will assign or reassign file names for Data Element Question Text items The new file name will automatically be entered in the Audio File Name box on the Data Element tab for Data Elements On the screen in Data Element Probes Text of Question this example QDS added the audio file name R2 in the file name box A complete list of the new file names can be viewed by building a new script file BuildIACASI Application QDS does not automatically assign file names for all i item
301. rview is not resumed and completed see Resuming a CAPI Interview below it will be stored as an incomplete interview Resuming a CAPI Interview To resume an interrupted interview 1 Go to StartlAll ProgramsIQDS GE na QPILEXE Ended T esktop shortcut 65 Incomplete 10 03 02 09 10 04 10 03 02 09 10 1 2 You will see the CAPI Open dialog box 3 Navigate to the appropriate folder and select your control file 4 Select the Resume a prior interview radio button 5 Click Open lt a i Cancel Show Al CAPI 117 6 The Pending Interviews dialog box will display a list of any incomplete cases in the current data file Clicking the Show All button will display all cases in the current data file regardless of their status Use the mouse to select the interview to resume and click OK 8 A dialog box will confirm the interview that is being opened i Resuming interrupted interview from 10 03 02 09 09 17 9 The CAPI program will take you to the screen at the point at which the interview was interrupted so that the interview may be continued Note You may also open a previously completed interview using this method Damaged Interview Files If the CAPI program is not properly shut down the interview file can become damaged To attempt interview recovery select your control file from the Open dialog box and select the Resume a prior interview radio button If the last interview is at all recove
302. ry to add new items The process for adding Pick one and Check all that apply cards is the same as for standard Nominal Pick One and Nominal Check Each Data Elements For numeric scales you may specify a description and scale text for each code point 8 Click OK and Close from the Response Cards box Editing Response Cards To edit a previously entered response card go to Tools Response Card Select the card you would like to modify view and then click Edit Double click the item you would like to edit make your changes and click OK and Close in the Response Cards box Removing Response Cards To remove a previously entered response card go to Tools Response Card Select the card you would like to remove and click on Remove and Close in the Response Cards box Copying Response Cards Response cards can be copied from one QDS specifications file to cant pasion another This is very useful when you f wos are using similar questions for Selection type different forms Pick one C Check all that apply C Numeric scale ltem Description of category To copy a response card across specifications files Copy Card lt lt Double click here to add a new code gt gt Paste Card Cancel Response Cards 243 Open the specifications file containing the response card s to be copied Select Tools Response Cards Select the response card you wish to copy and click Copy and Close eS eS Open
303. s Changes to Report Elements are reflected in the Change History report You will be required to supply a translation for each interview language found in the questionnaire The output reports are not compatible with WordPerfect Information Comment Section Header and Format Elements 75 NFORMATION COMMENT SECTION HEADER AND FORMAT ELEMENTS The remaining Element types Information Comment Section Header and Format are used to display information to the developer interviewer or respondent or to control the numbering or style for paper questionnaires These elements do not output information to the data file nor do they control the flow or sequencing of the instrument Information Elements Information Elements allow you to display information to an interviewer or respondent Information Elements can be used to display instructions definitions of terms and other pertinent information Inserting an Information Element To add an Information Element 1 Select EditlInsert 2 Choose Information and click OK 3 You will now see the Information Element specifications box Info Element Applicability Notes Information to the Interviewer C Respondent g Lee aj Audio File Name F Audio Interruptible Inf i nt nformation Eleme Ee Apply Help 4 Indicate whether this information will be displayed to an interviewer or a respondent by clicking the appropriate radio butt
304. s Response Set Text of probe s M Print on questionnaire following text of question The QDS default specifies that this text will be printed on a paper questionnaire following the question text Applicability Tab Use the items on this tab to restrict applicability of the element based on the respondent s gender interview method or specific categories in a table Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Notes Response Set Respondents Interview Method KE Men M Interviewer Administered Questionnaire M Women MV SeltAdministered Questionnaire Eor elements in tables e M ComputerAssisted Personal Interview CAPI CG All Table Categories M Computer Administered Self Interview ACASI Exclude from categories Include only in categories Categories On Applicability Respondent s Gender By QDS default all elements are applicable for all respondents To restrict a Data Element based on respondent s gender uncheck the Men or Women option box For example if the Men box is unchecked the Data Element will be asked only for female respondents In order to use Gender Applicability you must have at least one Data Element with Response Type set to Gender Additionally the Determines Gender Applicability option box must be checked on the Response Set tab on the Gender element Since there may be multiple gender variables in a single Specifications File it is the Determines G
305. s e g preferences for default values and styles QDS Design Studio QDS EXE Questionnaire Specifications File contains all of the Specifications for your data collection instrument i e questions Response Types consistency checks skips QPD Data Entry QDE EXE Data Entry Data File contains data entered from paper questionnaires QPI Design Studio QDS EXE CAPI Application Control File translates design specifications into commands that the CAP module uses to administer and collect data during a Computer Assisted Personal Interview QPP Design Studio QDS EXE HAPI Application Control File translates design specifications into commands that the HAP module uses to administer and collect data during a Handheld Assisted Personal Interview US Design Studio QDS EXE ACAS Application Control File translates design Specifications into commands that the AC AGT module uses to administer and collect data during an Audio Computer Administered S elf Interview QSR Warehouse Manager QWM EXE Data Receipt File used to confirm receipt of data Leg confirmation that a central coordinating location has received data from a field site QTD Warehouse Manager QWM EXE Data Shipment File used to transport data from one warehouse to another e g a field site submitting its data to a central coordinating location QVR Warehouse Manager QWM EXE Reconciliation File used to export reconciliation rules from one warehouse to another e
306. s Options on page 190 and Save As Options MS Access Flat Database on page 196 You may change the label of any special response button for automated interviews Go to Language Translations and select the Edit button On the Responses tab enter any alternate wording under Don t Know Refused or Not Applicable This wording will be substituted for the entire questionnaire For example you might prefer Decline to Respond as an alternate wording for Refused in an ACASI interview Missing Values for Paper Questionnaire Data Only For data collected with the Data Entry Module there is an additional special code option of Missing This could be used if one or more answer s on a form were simply left blank and it was impossible to tell whether they were refused or simply missed If you choose to allow missing values in your data entry control file you can enter a Missing code that will be displayed and recorded as See Entering Missing Values on page 98 Whether or not your QDE program allows missing values is determined on Data Entry Module Build Options See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Note that by default missing values are not allowed If missing values are allowed any item that is not an identifier variable may be recorded as missing Using Special Codes in QDS Expressions When you need to refer to a special code in a QDS expression such as in a Skip Element Edit Element or Automatic V
307. s 245 Entering Translations cccssccccessecceeeeseeceenseaeeeenseaeeeenseaeeeenseaeeeenseaaeeeenseeeeenseeeeeenees 245 Translating EE 245 Translating RESPONSE Cade nester tnnttnnsst tn nnnttnnnnt nn nnnnn nnan ne nnmnnn 247 Translating System Kevworcde 247 Deleting a Language wiicceiicciiccccticceeenicsesueteseevarecsenvesecsenuvseedeevadecsssuausdsvavawensesuudeneesnies 249 Building Control Files for Multiple Languages cssseccessseceeeseeeeeeensseeeenees 250 Special Considerations for Building ACASI Control Files ccsecsessssseeeeeeees 251 Text to Speech Engines 00 2 ceeccccecccececceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeecaaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaesseneeee 251 elt H TEEN 251 x QDS Questionnaire Development System Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions cccsssee 253 LO Gicall OperatiOns is sees ee EEN 253 Mathematical and Relational Operators c ccseeceeseeesseeseseeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeenseeeeeeeeess 254 QDS TI EN 254 Date Time Functions cccccccessscecesseecececseeeeeeseceeeeeesseeeesseeseeeeseneaeesseeeeaeesssesaeess 255 Range FUNCTIONS cccccccecssceeeseneeeeessneeeeeseeeeeesseceeeeesssesaesesseseeeeseesaeessenaeesseeaeenss 256 String Functons cece ee caeeeeaaeeeeeeeeceaeeseaaeseeeeesaeeeseaeseeaeeseaeesscaeeeseneeees 256 Database Lookup FUNCTIONS cceeccesseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeee sae seneeeeseaesesaaeenseaeseeeeessaesenseaenes 257 Appendix
308. s situation two formats will be output LENGTH Don t Know 7 Not Applicable 8 Refuse to Answer 9 Z0Z Refuse to Answer 99 If the response card name contains one or more dashes the corresponding format name will include an underscore character in place of each dash in the original response card name If the first character of the response card name is a dash it will be changed to the character W for the format name If the response card name had more than 8 characters it will be truncated to 8 characters If truncating causes a duplicate response card format name the format name will be changed to Z Z where is a sequential number Bee Exporting to MS Access Flat Database To export to a flat database 1 Select FilelExport Interviews 2 Select MS Access Flat Database MDB from the Save as type box 3 Click Options and make desired changes See Save As Options Flat Database on page 196 4 Click Save 196 QDS Questionnaire Development System A pop up dialog box will tell you how many interviews were exported to the specified MS Access file The flat database file will include a single table with one field for each variable and one record for each interview Limitations Limitations regarding data export to MS Access include The maximum field size in Access is 255 characters If you attempt to export a data set that contains entries longer than 255 characters you will receive an error message You
309. s unchecked Enter the directory path for the location of button bitmap files to be used as picture buttons for automated interviews QDS provides standard bitmaps for Yes No Male and Female buttons If you want to use only the standard QDS buttons you can leave this at the default path All bitmaps for an instrument must reside in a single directory Click this button to select a directory for button bitmap files by browsing the directory structure of your computer Operations Appearance Spin Controls Initial Displayed Value Time Spans all components blank Midpoint of each component Note These settings apply to all date time and time span elements in the questionnaire and cannot be set on an item by item basis CAPI 109 Summary Reports Tab The Summary Reports tab allows you to produce a Rich Text File RTF report that will list all responses for each CAPI interview The following options can be specified Enable Case Reports Check this box to enable the production of a report listing all responses at the end of each interview Prompt to View Report Check this box if you would like the program to display a message box at the end of each interview asking whether or not you wish to view the report File Name breit Enter a prefix for the report file name The complete file name for each report will contain this prefix text plus the interview identifiers
310. s with which an audio file can be associated You will need to manually assign and enter file names for Edit ee do you Question Suffix Variable Name Fre vo Audio File Name R2 Element text however the text will be written out to the script file For Data Element responses you will need to manually enter the WAV file names on the Response Set tab and create a separate responses script if you wish to have a human voice read responses For example WAV FILE Text to be Recorded NAME YES Yes NO No OTHER Other RACE1 African American Black RACE2 White RELIG1 Baptist RELIG2 Catholic ACASI 147 Despite these limitations having QDS assign file names will ensure that they are unique and saves the time and trouble of entering file names for Data Element Question Text items There are options available for renaming only some of your WAV files From ToolslAudio Files open the Audio File Renaming dialog box Use the Audio files to rename setting to specify how and when audio file names should be changed Rename only if necessary a Select this option to assign a new audio file name if the current name is empty or duplicates a file name assigned to another item in your specifications Rename if necessary or if text changed Select this option to assign a new audio file name if the current name is blank or a duplicate or if the question information text has changed since
311. sage The message is entered in the Display message box Next we select the option for what will happen after the message is displayed We chose the Reconciliation option Loop back to prior element and selected going back 2 elements The CAPI interview will go back and re ask both of the previous questions two Data Elements to correct the data Other reconciliation options are also available No message No further action Reconciliation elements follow Launch a new interview file Moving and Copying Elements At this point we may need to move or copy elements so that they are in the correct order This can be done through copying cutting and pasting as in other software 16 QDS Questionnaire Development System programs Select the element s you would like to move or copy and go to EditlCopy Ctrl C or Dh EditlCut Ctrl X or Then select the element just below the point at which you would like the copied items inserted and choose EditlPaste Ctrl V or Bi We have completed adding our first set of questions At the end we added a final Information Element to thank the participant Creating Interviewing Instruments Since the design for our survey is now complete we are ready to build our interview instrument Building an Interview Control File In QDS we refer to the interviewing instruments as control files You can create a Data Entry instrument DE an interviewer administered instrument CAPI on a PC
312. se trample Transportation Unreconciled QDW Subject ID Complete 07 10 01 04 56PM 1 07 26 01 Complete s 07 10 01 04 57PM 2 07 26 01 Complete 1 07 10 01 04 57PM 3 07 26 01 Complete 2 07 10 01 04 58PM 4 07 26 01 Complete 2 07 10 01 04 58PM 5 07 26 01 Complete 2 07 10 01 04 58PM 6 07 26 01 When you have multiple versions in your warehouse one version is considered the standard version By default QDS will designate the first version e the version added to the warehouse first as the standard version Note When exporting data only data collected from the standard version of your specifications will be exported This restriction is necessary so that QDS has a single database structure for exported data files In order to be able to export all of the cases in your warehouse you will need to determine which version is the standard version and help QDS determine how the other versions map to the standard As QDS compares the two versions any instances in which there appears to have been a change between the two versions will result in a prompt from QDS asking how you would like to resolve the discrepancy You can tell QDS to treat the two variables as the same or as two separate variables You can also tell QDS to delete variables from one version that do not appear in the standard version This process is called reconciliation or defining the reconciliation rules Once the reconciliation rules have been set QDS wil
313. se file the Warehouse Manager will prompt Laura for the read password when she examines the first interview in the data file Once entered the Warehouse Data Security 219 Manager will be able to decrypt all other interviews that correspond to the same version If Laura attempts to open a second version she will be prompted for the password for that version as well This occurs for any operation that Laura attempts whether it s File Export interviews or View Version Details Note that the Warehouse Manager will always prompt for the password when an interview is transferred between files such as an Edit Copy to Warehouse operation or an Edit Ship from Warehouse operation This is because the warehouse needs the password to both decrypt the data coming from the source file and re encrypt it in the destination data file At completion of the study Laura will be able to select another function in HAPI Tools Remove Passwords to free up password related storage on the Pocket PC The scenario continues with the same study adding a modify password in QDS a 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Stacy will enter a modify password into the Design Studio and then rebuild the HAPI application control file Next she will email the control file to Laura and let her know the modify password associated with the file Next Laura will copy the control file to each Pocket PC running HAPI At this point data will be c
314. sion of QAD QDS File Names for ACASI ACASI Module QSI EXE ACASI Control File OS ACASI Datatie QAD ACASI Summary Report File RTF Renaming A CASI Output Data Files QAD See Renaming CAPI Output Data Files QAD on page 118 The Warehouse Manager 153 WORKING WITH COLLECTED DATA THE WAREHOUSE MANAGER Warehouse Manager Overview The Warehouse Manager s major functions include Adding collected data to a single storage warehouse Tracking data shipments between field sites and a data coordinating center Deleting data gt gt Viewing and editing data Identifying cases with duplicate identifiers Reconciling multiple form versions into a single standard version Exporting data to SPSS SAS or MS Access file formats Using the Warehouse Manager as your data management tool creates the following data flow Multiple data collection sites Multiple versions Analysis and reporting Create a Warehouse for data collection instrument Copy case s from Data File s to Warehouse At Field Site Create Shipment File new cases to be sent to Coordinating Center At Data Coordinating Center Receive Shipment File Copy Shipment File to Local Warehouse Generate Receipt File At Field Site Post Receipt File Reconcile and convert multiple versions Export data 154 QDS Questionnaire Development System Warehouse Manager Files Extension
315. splayed with a lock to indicate encryption For example ajam vax a Slo k4 Source Data test En ACASI QAD Biel pi aan es ns Deleted 1 09 13 04 0 PM Complete 1 0713 04 UZ HMPM erer Tei Incomplete 1 09 13 04 02 34PM on 02001100020 Complete 2 SF AA04 O2 SFRME SE arreire amp amp Incomplete 2 09 13 04 02 37PM owe In the encrypted file the Subject ID is hidden When a user selects ViewlDetails Edit Details or attempts to export data the following message is displayed Read Authorization 168 QDS Questionnaire Development System After entering the appropriate read password the data for version 1 is displayed ajala vilel a ale T4 Source Data test En ACASI QAD Versi Recor Deleted Complete 1 09 13 04 02 33PM B 6666 09 13 20 Complete HI 09 13 04 02 34PM B 6666 09 1 A Incomplete 1 09 13 04 02 34PM B 5555 09 13 20 Te Complete 2 09 13 04 02 37PM fei Incomplete 2 09 13 04 02 37PM Note The information for version 2 is still hidden You must supply a password for each version in the warehouse Adding Modify Passwords in the Warehouse Manager If a modify password has been defined in the Design Studio it will be necessary to supply it before data can be modified or deleted from the Warehouse Manager When a user selects Edit Details or attempts to un delete an interview the following dialog box is displayed Data Update Authorization The user will first
316. ss through the table Oe for category A the test will be evaluated using the variable NETA For the second pass i e for category B the condition will be evaluated based on the value of the variable NETB Tables that include skips to destinations within the table must use a row column or column row setup Skip Elements within tables may only skip to a marker outside the table if the marker is the first element outside the table i e the element immediately following the last Table Element in the Design Studio list view NEXTCAT QDS contains one special system defined marker called NEXTCAT This marker is reserved for use within tables and is used to generate an instruction to skip all remaining elements for the current category and go directly to the next category This is useful when your table includes a lead in question e g Have you ever x and follow up questions where the follow up questions are relevant only if the respondent answered Yes to the lead in question In this type of situation you will 236 QDS Questionnaire Development System want to skip all of the follow up questions if the response to the lead in question is No Because it is a system defined element you do not need to add a Marker Element named NEXTCAT NEXTCAT can be used only with Skip Elements it cannot be used as a part of branching instructions on the Response Set tab of a Data Element To add a Skip Instruction using the NEXTCAT Marker
317. sses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Select Use keypad for ACASI to provide keypad rather than spin controls for time elements Enter the default minimum value for time elements You may leave this field blank for no minimum time or enter CURRENT to make the earliest allowable time the time of day at that point in the interview Enter the default maximum value for time elements You may leave this field blank for no maximum time or enter CURRENT to make the latest allowable time the time of day at that point in the interview Check this box to prevent a time outside the allowable range 0 59 for a Data Element to be entered If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range times but they will be allowed Special Codes Branching Calculations m Value units Allow Value G Years Allowable range fo Miesing tants 6 Months C Months Minimum f nl Missing Weeks Weeks 7 Weeks E wissing Bays 15 Days C Days Maximum fo Jo Miesing Aaure 12 Hours C Hours M Enforce Range fo Missing inutes aU Minutes C Minutes jo Missing Seconds 30 Seconds C Seconds Check one to three units of time to be used in expressing time spans The respondent will be asked to express the length of time using one or more of the selected units e g 3 years and 6 months QDS Default Settings 209 Allow Missing lt unit gt Value for Missing lt unit gt Check this box if the respondent will be allow
318. st be mutually exclusive When a condition the If box is left blank the corresponding rule is the default to be applied when no other condition is satisfied There cannot be more than one default rule Thus no more than one condition may be left blank Must Check a Category QDS must have at least one rule for handling skipped Data Elements when performing calculations The default rule is to treat the Data Element as if it were Not Applicable If this element could never be skipped a rule is still needed even though it will never be applied No Response Card The response card you selected is no longer part of this questionnaire There are two possible explanations 1 The response card was deleted 2 The specifications file was damaged and the response card was lost In either case if you have a backup copy of the specifications file available you may be able to copy the needed response card from the backup No Translations Available You have asked to copy standard translations for a language that Appendix B 269 does not yet have any defined To provide these translations select Translations from the Language menu There are six required categories Code Responses Yes No Male Female Don t Know Refuse to Answer Not Applicable Date Components Y ear Month Day singular and plural Time Components Hour Minutes Seconds time of day and time Span Automated Interviews OK Clear Previ
319. stem Additional Notes To change the file type description for QDS data files from QAD File to QDS Automated Interview Data File and the file type icon to a QDS icon 1 2 3 Open Windows Explorer From the Tools menu click Folder Options and then click File Types Highlight the QAD Extension and associated File Type and select Restore Select OK to close the Folder Options property sheet ACASI 137 AUDIO COMPUTER ADMI NI STRED SE F NTERVI EW A AC In this data collection mode the respondent records answers directly into the system using a mouse touchscreen or keyboard Optionally a computer voice or recorded human voice can be used to read questions aloud as they are displayed on the screen For computer security it is possible to add a password and or lock the keyboard to restrict participant access to the rest of the computer Building an ACASI Control File Building an ACASI Module produces an ACASI Application Control File with the extension QSI that is used as a stand alone application for administering interviews Your staff will not need access to the specification file see Conducting an ACASI Interview on page 149 in order to conduct interviews To create your ACASI Module 1 Select BuildIACASI Application In the Save In drop down box select the folder where you want the Control File saved In the File Name box enter the file name The default is the specification fil
320. sword protect questionnaires so that unauthorized users are unable to view export or modify collected data From Optionsl Interviews select the Security tab and click on the appropriate radio button choice No encryption Default Read password Design Studio 27 x Interview Options Study Configuration Identifier Variables Applicability Security Data encryption Read password Modify password Add aa C Default C Read password Cancel Data encryption is available in three modes No encrvptton Data are written out to an unencrypted binary file same file format as used in version 2 1 and earlier Default mode AA Data are automatically encrypted during interview administration and unencrypted when viewed in the Warehouse Manager Read password mode The encryption scheme is based on a password supplied by the questionnaire designer Using this mode only users with the correct password can view and export data in the Warehouse Manager In addition you may optionally add a modify password feature which prevents unauthorized modification of data in the Warehouse Manager See Data Security on page 213 for more detailed information SSS TY Understanding Elements As mentioned earlier your specifications file can include data collection items special instructions to the interviewer or interviewee instructions for changing question sequence branching or skip patterns
321. t data file Shortcut Keys Ctrl I as in Interview Delete Interview 000000 nn000000annn Delete the current interview from the data file 96 QDS Questionnaire Development System Code Menu Don t Know FS Refused F9 Hot Applicable F10 Missing Show List F Creek Wart FG Clear Shift F6 Comments Don t KNOW aaaianannnenoaanannnnnneennnne Refused ME Not Applicable 000 ee Show List Check Mark Help Menu Help Topics About QDE Help Toptcs About ODE Enter the code for Don t Know in the current field Shortcut keys Function key if any assigned to this menu item See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Toolbar D Enter the code for Refused to Answer in the current field Shortcut keys Function key if any assigned to this menu item See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Toolbar R Enter the code for Not Applicable in the current field Shortcut Keys Function key if any assigned to this menu item See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Toolbar N Display a list of codes for the current field Shortcut keys Function key if any assigned to this menu item See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Toolbar mm Enter the code for a checkmark in the current checkbox field Shortcut keys Function key if any assigned to this menu item See Data Entry Build Options on page 91 Toolbar kel Clear the current field Shortcut keys Shift F6
322. t if a variable has been assigned a special code DK for Don t Know REF for Refused or NA for Not Applicable They may only be used to testa single variable for equality or inequality These special constants may not be used in any other context For example the following two expressions are valid VAR DK VAR NA The following three expressions are invalid VAR1 VAR2 DK VAR gt DK VAR DK 1 Inappropriate Subject ID This variable specified as the Subject ID on the Study Configuration tab of the Interview Options has a Response Type other than number or text These are the only types allowed for a Subject ID variable Change the Response Type to number or text If this Data Elementis not the Subject ID either change the variable name for this Data Element or the named Subject ID variable on the Study Configuration tab Inappropriate Time Span Units You have 1 The set of time span components conflict with the specfied range a The shortest unit of time that you selected cannot be represented within the range using the chosen value units Either deselect the shortest unit of time change the value units selection or change the minimum allowable value to zero b You have selected a set of time span components that conflict with the range you specified The longest unit of time component even with a value of one would exceed the range using the chosen value units Either deselect the longest unit of
323. t in a damaged state See tip on Damaged interview files on page 117 Do not exit your ACASI interview by using Ctrl Alt Delete or other improper shut down method Interrupting an ACASI Interview There are two ways to safely interrupt an ACASI interview prior to completion If keyboard input is allowed specified on ACASI Build Options interview staff can press Alt F4 to exit If keyboard input is not allowed a staff member can move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the screen and then simultaneously click the left and right mouse buttons If an exit password has been specified see ACASI Build Options on page 138 the Password dialog box will open and the password will need to be entered to exit the program SSS SSS ei Resuming Prior ACASI Interviews ACASI interviews can be resumed following the same procedures as those used for CAPI See Resuming a CAPI Interview on page 116 ACASI Data Files QDS saves each complete or incomplete ACASI interview in the same way that CAPI interviews are saved see CAPI Data Files on page 117 Each ACASI interview complete or partial is written to an Automated Interview Data File QAD These files can then be brought into the QDS Warehouse Manager Module for further processing and export see Working With Collected Data on page 153 Your ACASI data files and optionally an RTF summary report file are saved into the same folder as your control file with an exten
324. t include text on your buttons you can use the same bitmaps for any interview language Picture Button Folders The bitmap files delivered with QDS are stored by default under C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio Bitmap32 En and are constructed for use on a 32 bit Win95 98 2000 WinXP or Windows ME platform Within this folder you can create separate folders for multiple interview languages The language folders are named using the same two letter language indicators e g EN for English FR for French shown in the task bar at the bottom of your screen if you have more than one input locale installed Within each language folder there is folder Keyed for buttons with an underlined letter for keyboard use and a folder Plain with no underlines for use without a keyboard Thus the complete hierarchy of bitmap folders as originally constructed when QDS is installed is as follows Studio Bitmap32 EN Keyed Studio Bitmap32 EN Plain If you decide to change this organization or the folder names you will need to tell QDS where to locate the new button files When you create an automated interview CAPI or ACASI from BuildICAPI Application or ACASI Application click the Options button on the Automated Interview Control File dialog box On the Appearance tab you can specify the appropriate folder under 280 QDS Questionnaire Development System Directory for button bitmap files See CAPI Build Options on page 106 and ACAST Bui
325. t path All bitmaps for an instrument must reside in a single directory Browse button Click this button to select a directory for button bitmap files by browsing the directory structure of your computer Spin Controls Tab i e i Spin Control i ACASI Spin Control Build Options are the Operations Appearance Spin Controls Audio same as CAPI Spin Control Build Options r Initial Displayed Value Spin Controls are used in automated interviews Dates to input responses for date time and time span AI components blank E elements without using the keyboard By Times of day default these items will be blank However you Al components blank zl can choose to have an initial value displayed Time Spans You may choose to have Ly conpoierts blank All date or time components blank Minimum date or time span allowed Midpoint of each component Note These settings apply to all date time and time span elements in the questionnaire and cannot be set on an item by item basis Audio Tab The Audio tab options enable you Operations Appearance Spin Controls Audio to further customize your Directory for audio files computer generated or recorded CADocuments Audios en Browse human voice settings IV Use Text to Speech if no audio file Language I Read choices text buttons 142 QDS Questionnaire Development System Directory for audio files Enter the full path for the d
326. t whose birthday is J une 5 1971 will have a calculated age of 30 when the reference date is J une 5 2002 but will have an age of 31 when the reference date is J une 6 2002 DATEYMD Year Month Day Numeric Expression Creates a date value from numeric arguments for year month and day QDS date values are numeric values equal to the number of days since December 31 1899 dates before December 31 1899 have negative values Example DATEYMD 1965 8 10 returns 23964 Notes You must use a four digit year There is a typo in the QDS Online Help that lists this function as DATEMYD LONGDATE Date String Expression Converts a numeric date value to a long string form that can be used to display in question text Edit Elements or Information Elements Example LONGDATE TODAY returns Monday J une 10 2002 Example LONGDATE DATEYMD 1965 8 10 returns Tuesday August 10 1965 SHORTDATE Date String Expression Converts the numeric date value to a short string form that can be used to display in question text Edit Elements or Information Elements Valid arguments include a QDS date variable numeric value or QDS function that returns a date value e g DATEYMD Example SHORTDATE DATEYMD 1965 8 10 returns 08 10 1965 TIMEHMS Hour Minute Second Numeric Expression Returns the number of seconds after midnight Note Uses 24 hour clock Example TIMEHMS 12 10 2 returns 43802 256 QDS
327. tab will be removed in future releases Opening a Data Entry Application Although you can start the Data Entry Program through the Windows Start menu from the Windows Start menu select ProgramsIQDS 2 4 Data Entry Program it is recommended that you launch your data entry application via My Computer or Windows Explorer 1 Locate the Data Entry Control File QDE icon using Windows Explorer The location for your QDE Control File was set by your selection in the Save In drop down box during the Data Entry Build step 2 Double click on the icon 3 You will now see the Data Entry Open dialog box You can also create a Windows shortcut to launch the data entry control file Launching from the control file QDE will automatically launch the QDS Data Entry Module and display the correct data entry control file in the File Name box If you choose to open from the Start menu you will need to locate the correct control file from the Data Entry Open dialog box Using a desktop shortcut is often the simplest method for data entry staff to launch the data entry application and begin data entry Data Entry Open Dialog Box p GIS On the Data Entry Open kkn del A dialog box you will see the TENE following Look Im Displays control file location File name Displays control file name File name PemoDEQDE Files of type Displays QDS DE Control Files Files of type ans DE Control Files QDE x Cancel
328. termines the code assigned to the first category in Nominal Pick One Response Sets Decimal places Allowable range S Enter the number of decimal places digits after the decimal point to be used as the default for each numeric Data Element If most numeric Data Elements will be integers enter zero Enter the value to be used as the default minimum value for each numeric Data Element Special code values e g the code for Don t Know should lie outside the allowable range QDS Default Settings 205 Enforce range Use keypad for ACASI Text Data Elements Styles This box is to set the default range checking of numeric values to disallow any value outside the allowable range If the range is not enforced a warning will be issued for out of range values but they will be allowed For Audio CASI interviews numeric responses may be entered using a spin control or keypad With a spin control the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease the displayed value until it is correct With a keypad the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Standard Codes l Numbers Text Maximum number of characters to allow pan Maximum number of characters to display approx 20 T Allow blank response IT Convert all letters to upper cas M Remove leading spaces of characters to allow e Enter the size in number of characters of t
329. terview by selecting Interviewl Comment and entering text into the Notes dialog box Your comments may be exported to a text file from the QDS Warehouse Manager Module See Exporting the Interviewer Comments Log on page 199 116 QDS Questionnaire Development System sf Probes While on any CAPI screen you may retrieve additional information specified on the Data Element Probes tab in the Design Studio This menu option is enabled only if Probe text exists for the current element Saving CAPI Interviews At the end of the interview the CAPI module will ask if you would like to save the data from your interview If you click Yes the record will be written out to the data file QAD If you respond No the program will require confirmation prior to discarding the data down unexpectedly all data recorded to that point will be written out to the data file however the interview file will be left in a damaged state See tip on Damaged Interview Files on page 117 Do not exit your CAPI interview by using Ctrl Alt Delete or other improper shut down method If an interview is interrupted improperly or the computer or program shuts Interrupting a CAPI Interview You may safely interrupt an interview before it is complete by selecting the menu option InterviewlEnd or InterviewlExit You may also use the the keyboard shortcut Alt F4 You will be asked if you wish to save that portion of the interview If the saved inte
330. terviews time components may be selected by using Spin Controls where the respondent presses buttons to increase or decrease each component to the correct value or with numeric keypads where the respondent presses digit buttons on a keypad display to enter the value Select Use keypad for ACASI to provide keypad rather than Spin Controls as the default for Time Elements Note If you choose to use a keypad separate screens will be displayed for each component Spin Controls allow all components to be entered on a single screen Response Set Tab Time Span Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations f Skipped Notes Response Set M Years M Months IT Weeks M Days T Hours T Minutes IT Seconds ua m Value units Minimi Allow alue C Years f M Missing Months 6 Months C Months Maximum E item Weeks g Weeks Weeks ba M Missing Days l5 Days Days M Don t Know Pai wiesing Haure 12 Hours C Hours ni E Wissing Minutes 30 Minutes C Minutes M Refused oo fo fdiesing Seconds 3U Seconds C Seconds __ Not Applicable Fractional units 999 Enforce EsEamgeet Bound Range INGEE wU Use the Time Span Response Type when you want to record a length of time Units of Time Allow Missing Value units Select up to three units of time to be used in expressing the time span The respondent will be asked to express the length of time using one or more of the selected uni
331. th the corresponding file name already exists Ifthe file already exists My Documents QDSv2 First Questionnaire En HAPI QAD the new interview will be appended to the end of the existing data file Ifthe file does not reside on the Pocket PC a new data file named My Documents ODSv2 First Questionnaire En HAPI QAD will be started Until you move or rename the data file interviews will continue to be appended to the end of the current QAD file As soon as the current QAD file is moved or renamed the next HAPI interview will create a new QAD file HAPI 131 4 At the end of your data collection cycle you will be ready to synch your HAPI data to your laptop desktop QAD File Filter The QDS HAPI module includes an optional feature for automatic renaming of QAD data files and back up to a specified PC directory This feature is only available for the HAPI module When you install QDS HAPI the setup program automatically installs the QDS QAD File Filter program The file filter automatically runs when Microsoft ActiveSync detects a new or modified QAD data file on your Pocket PC device QAD File Filter Naming The filter renames and copies all the device s QAD files to the folder specified during QDS installation The new QAD file name is a combination of the original name the device name and the date the file was last modified in local 24 hour time For example a QAD file named Demo En HAPI QAD would be re
332. that the Subject Identifier has changed and is now unique the Status field will change from Duplicate to Complete Setting Replacing Duplicates Options When adding duplicate interviews C Always replace C Keep both GG Prompt If you would like to change how QDS treats duplicate cases as they are brought into a local warehouse go to ViewlOptions You have three choices Always Replace 0aaeeeeeeeeeee Always replace the old interview in the warehouse with the new one without prompting Keep Both Always keep both interviews marking them as duplicates Prompt ccccscseeessseeessstsseneses Prompt for each duplicate default Resumed Cases When you have a data file containing an interrupted resumed interview you will notice that there are two cases Status Version Recorded Subject ID x Resumed Later 1 09 18 04 09 56PM 12 D Duplicate Complete 1 09 18 04 09 56PM 12 Resumed Later represents the interview as it was at the time of the interruption This will be marked with an X Duplicate Complete represents the final completed interview Only the second complete case needs to be added to the warehouse from the source data file The Warehouse Manager 163 If you choose to add both records you will see the Replace Interview message If both cases are added both cases will appear as Duplicates in the warehouse However the Complete and Resumed Later labels will be reta
333. the destination file i e the specifications file to which you want to copy the response card al Select Tools Response Cards Click Add 7 When the Response Card dialog box opens click Paste Card to copy the existing card to the current specifications file 8 Click OK and Close in the Response Cards box 9 Repeat this process for any other cards you want to copy D Note You can copy only one card at a time cards from one specifications file to another the response cards are automatically copied In previous versions it was necessary to manually copy the response cards to the new specifications file As of version 2 1 when you copy and paste elements containing response Response Card Response Tab Settings Once you define a Data Element as a Response Card Data Element the response card categories and corresponding numeric values are listed on the Response Set tab These values can be edited only by editing the response card itself However you may adjust the Special Code Branching and Display options Don t know eects Uncheck to disallow a response of Don t Know PROTUSCO TE Uncheck to disallow a response of Refused Not Appltcable Uncheck to disallow a response of Not Applicable Display in Reverse Order Check to display categories in reverse numerical order Branching Specify a branching option Working With Multiple Languages 245 WORKI NG WITH MULTI PLE LANGUAGES There m
334. the questions Data Elements to be asked for each category Note Table Elements may also include Skip Elements In other words instead of having to create separate Data Elements for Have you bought any clothing in the past 6 months and Have you bought any books in the past 6 months you can create a single Data Element Have you bought any lt category gt in the past 6 months QDS automatically generates the appropriate questions and separate variables for the list of categories As of version 2 1 QDS tables are limited to 26 categories and 100 elements previous versions had a limit of 25 categories and 32 elements The first step in defining a QDS table is to insert a Table Element By specifying the list of categories and number of elements the Table Element defines the table structure 230 QDS Questionnaire Development System Table Element Applicability Notes Categories Furniture B Clothing Cc Toys D Books E Electronics lt lt Double click here to add a new table category gt gt Number of One element per Automated Interviews elements in E Row Rowlirst table f C Column Column first In the shopping example the categories are Furniture Clothing Toys Books Electronics The second step is to insert the Table Elements These may include Data Elements Edit Elements and Skip Elements In the shopping example the elements are Have you
335. this Change History using one of the following File Save a Copy As options x Discard Undo Information after saving copy Check this box to eliminate all prior Undo Information After making a copy of your current specifications file including all previously recorded Undo Information QDS will eliminate prior Undo Information compressing your working copy of the file K Always discard Undo Information before saving Check this box to restrict the Undo capability to changes made since the last Save command The Change History lists Element Type Data Element Skip Element Information Element etc Element Number Sequential number of element in List View Action eee eee eee Action taken to element such as Inserted Updated Deleted Tits site etait Text of variable label or skip edit instruction Question i 2c hslneideeind a Question text if applicable Changed Items cee Attributes question text variable name response type changed if applicable Dateifmme eneee Date and time of changes To create a Change History 1 Select Buildl Change History from the Design Studio menu 2 In the Save In drop down box select the folder in which you would like your file saved The default location is the folder where the specifications file resides 3 In the File Name box specify a name for the Change History File Default file name is the name of your specifications file plus History RTF 4 Cli
336. this element 2 Move this element to a position inside the table or 3 Remove the category substitution token from the text of this element Table Variable Needs amp C The Data Elementis within a table and does not include the amp C category token in the variable name If this Data Element is intended to be inside the table you must add the amp C token to the variable name If this Data Elementis not part of the Ttable modify the table settings or move the Data Element The options for this questionnaire have been corrupted and cannot be read You are attempting to open a file created in a later version of QDS To avoid losing information you should exit QDS and install the latest version This item was created with a later version of this program and cannot be processed by this version You are using an older version of QDS than the program that last updated this element To avoid losing information you should cancel all changes exit QDS and install the latest QDS version Time Span Component Required You must specify at least one time unit for a Time Span Element You may include up to three contiguous components Too many arguments The function being used does not contain the required number of arguments See Appendix A QDS Functions and Expressions on page 253 for more information Too Many Components You may specify a maximum of three time units fora Time Span Element Ap
337. time change the value units selection or expand the range 2 You have selected one or more time span components that cannot be represented with the value units you have selected The value units must be one of the selected units of time Input format is invalid HAP I only For date and time responses you must enter the correct format F or example 01 01 2005 and 10 30 01 Invalid Audio File Name Prefix QDS can provide suggested file names for all audio files needed for an ACASI or ACATI interview File names provided by QDS always begin with a single letter the prefix followed by a unique number for the file 266 QDS Questionnaire Development System Invalid Category List Enter a list of category suffixes to be included excluded The Suffixes may be separated by commas but need not be A category Suffix is a single letter or digit identifying the table category Invalid Category Suffix To specify the table categories for which an elementis applicable enter the list of category suffixes separated by commas A category suffix must be a single letter or digit Invalid Code List This message is merely a warning that you have not yet described any items for this list You may temporarily leave the list empty but you must complete the list before building any QDS products for this questionnaire To add an item press the Ins key on your keyboard or double click your mouse on the message display
338. tion number suffix of this element Table Category Variable Not In a Table The variable name for this Data Element includes a table category substitution token amp C implying that this element is part of a table Yetit is not within the scope of any table The scope of a table is specified by the elements per category value associated with the Table Element You must either 1 Adjust the scope of the table to include this element 2 Move this element to a position inside the table or 3 Remove the category substitution token from the variable name of this element Table Has no Data Elements All tables must contain at least one Data Element You must either increase the number of elements in the table or insert a Data Element Table Question Needs Text Substitution You must include the amp TXT AALT or amp LBL tokens in the question text for all interview languages for each Data Element inside a table If this element is not intended to be inside a table change the table settings or move the Data Element Table Substitution Outside a Table The Text of Question for this Data Element includes a category Substitution token amp TXT amp ALT amp LBL implying that this element is part of a table Yetitis not within the scope of any table The scope of a table is specified by the elements per category value associated with the Table Element You must either 1 Adjust the scope of the table to include
339. tionnaire Development System Another option to consider is to make a separate directory for each questionnaire with subdirectories for each language For example C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio My First Questionnaire Audios En C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio My First Questionnaire Audios Fr C Program Files QDS 2 4 Studio My First Questionnaire Audios Sp The three file paths above would represent English En French Fr and Spanish Sp language folders You are free to change this organization or the folder names as you like To verify that the correct path is associated with the audio files for a specific language check the Build Options 1 Verify that the correct language is displayed in the Language box on the Toolbar Select BuildlA CASI Application Click Options Select the Audio tab Verify that the correct path is entered St en ees Operations Appearance Spin Controls Audio Directory for audio files CAProgram Files QDSv2 Studio Audios Fr Browse In Embed audi tiles Lanquage MV Use Textto Speech if no audio file IT Read choices text buttons Appendix A 253 APPENDIX A QDS FUNCTIONS AND EXPRESSIONS Logical Operations Logical operations can be applied to the results of relational tests The outcomes are the same as for relational operations i e YES NO and MAYBE There are three logical operators AND amp OR and NOT They work as follows AND amp
340. tionnaire Development System t9 Microsoft ActiveSync lol Sl File View Tools Help 9 g Synce Stop Details Explore Options NOVA_O1 g Connected Synchronized Information Type Status Files Synchronized You can also see synchronization status by e Clicking on the ActiveSync icon in the system tray usually located in the bottom right corner of the screen next to the clock or e Clicking Startl Programs Microsoft ActiveSync Managing HAPI Data Using the QAD File Filter If you are using the QAD File Filter for renaming you may wish to follow these suggested steps for better managing HAPI data collection After synching you will want to remove the current QAD file from your Pocket PC device since your HAPI data file has been renamed With this process a new QAD file will be started for each new round of data collection following synchronization After the synching process is complete remove the device from the cradle Next you will remove the data file from the device 1 Open Windows Explorer on your PC 2 Go to the Qdsv2 synchronization folder that corresponds to the current partnership Delete the QAD file Replace the device in its cradle This will remove the QAD file from the device The renamed QAD file in the HAPI folder is now ready to be moved into your Data Warehouse 3 4 5 Allow synchronization step to complete 6 7 We recommend that you synchroniz
341. ton senate cae eeeeaaeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeneeeeaes 128 Moving to the Previous QUESTION eeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeesee tennessee eeeaaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeeaes 128 Correcting RESPONSES rsin apaia aE 129 Displaying Blo 129 Adding Comments 129 vi QDS Questionnaire Development System Saving HAPI Interviews ccseceseessseeeeseeeeeeeeessaeseseeeenseeeeesaeseseeeeaseeeeeseeesnaeseseenensees 129 Interrupting a HAPI Interview ccceecceseceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaesaseeeenseeeesseeseseaeenseeeeeeneess 129 Resuming a HAPI Interview ccsssecceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseaeeeenseeeeeenseaeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenas 129 HAPI D ta Files eege 130 QAD Ee Elter geiergert deed 131 QAD File Filter Naming 131 Changing the File Filter Folder ccccececeeseeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeesiaeeeseaeeee 131 Disabling the QAD File Elter 131 Synching HAPI Data Files cccsecssseeeeseeeeeeeeesneeseneeeenseeeeseaesaseeesnseaeeeseeeseaeeeseeeesaes 132 Installing the HAPI ModuleiActhve vncp 132 Removing Me TWEET 133 Uploading HAPI Data Synching Handheld to Laptop Desktop ssseeeeesresrenneen 133 Managing HAPI Data Using the QAD File Filter 134 Warnings Regarding Synchronization seeeseseeeseeeseeseresrssirssirssrrssrrnsrnnsrnnssrnnsnns 135 Additional Notes 136 Audio Computer Administered Self Interview ACAL eessen 137 Building an ACASI Control File cccceeeeseeeeesee
342. tructure of your computer Date Time Tab On the HAPI screen the date time and time span fields will be blank by default You can choose to display one of the following initial values All date or time components blank Minimum date or time span allowed Midpoint of each component Note These settings apply to all date time and time span elements in the questionnaire and cannot be set on an item by item basis Summary Reports Tab The Summary Reports tab allows you to produce a Rich Text File RTF report that will list all responses for each HAPI interview The RTF file will be saved on the Pocket PC for synching back to the desktop See Summary Reports Tab on page 109 for options Conducting HAPI Interviews Before you can conduct an interview you will need to sync with your desktop so that your HAPI control file QPP resides on your Pocket PC device See Synching HAPI Data Files on page 132 To start an interview you will begin by opening the HAPI software on your Pocket PC Tap Start Programs and select the QDS HAPI icon The next sequence is dependent upon whether or not HAPI is already running in the background see Pocket PC Running Progams on page 124 1 If HAPI was not already running the first screen displayed is a list of all control files QPP present on your Pocket PC This screen displays 124 QDS Questionnaire Development System the name of each control file its folder location t
343. ts e g 3 years and 6 months You may include up to three contiguous components For example a combination of Years Months and Days or a combination of Days Hours and Minutes is permitted Months Weeks Days Hours Minutes or Seconds Check the appropriate box if the respondent will be allowed to answer with an incomplete time span missing that component In the box to the right enter the value to be substituted Select the unit to be used to express the combined components of the time span This must be one of the units of time that are allowed for this element lf the selected value units are not the shortest of the allowed units of time there may be a fractional value to be truncated or rounded For example if Months and Years are selected as the units of time a response of 1 year and 2 months would be recorded as 14 if the value unit is months or 1 if the value unit is years 48 QDS Questionnaire Development System Fractional units 000 If the selected value units above for the combined time span are not the shortest of the allowed units of time there may be a fractional value to be truncated or rounded Select Truncate to ignore any fractional units Select Round to set the combined time span to the closest value to the combined response Special Codes eee Indicate if Don t Know Refused and Not Applicable are allowable responses by checking these boxes default setting is not checked The
344. ts that reference this button or use the Global Changes command H the named bitmap file is invalid it was not written in standard BMP format Try opening the file with a graphics program such as MS Paint and resaving itas BMP System Error Resources This message indicates that a major system failure has occurred It may be due to a shortage of memory or a hardware error Exit the Design Studio restart the computer then try again If the problem persists contact the QDS vendor Select About QDS under the Help menu for instructions on how to contact the vendor Table Applicability Outside a Table Table applicability settings have been entered for a Data Element that is not part of a table To correct this problem 1 Adjust the scope of the table to include this element 2 Reset the applicability for this element to All Table Categories Table Category Question Not In a Table The question number suffix for this Data Element includes a table category substitution token amp C implying that this element is part of a table Yetitis not within the scope of any table The scope of a table is specified by the elements per category value associated with the Table Element Y ou must either 272 QDS Questionnaire Development System 1 Adjust the scope of the table to include this element 2 Move this element to a position inside the table or 3 Remove the category substitution token from the ques
345. tudy Reports First Q Report 66 RTF has been generated Would you like to open the document now If you select Yes the report will open in the default word processor after reviewing the report you can return to the interview If you select No the interview will continue and you can view the report at a later time 74 QDS Questionnaire Development System The specifications we entered on the Report Element and Contents tabs resulted in the following report output Page 1 First Report C My Study Reports First Q Report 21 RTF Demographics Gender Female Date of Buth 01 04 1941 Race Black or African American Page 2 First Report C My Study Reports Furst Q Report 21 RTF Health Results I like to get up early in the morning Somewhat Disagree I try and exercise at least twice a week Strongly Agree I try to stick to a healthy diet Somewhat Agree The file name is listed in the header page numbers are listed in the footer see sample file question text for the health variables is listed as well as variable responses for the demographics and health variables You can view the sample file First Q Report 21 RTF for the full report file You can also test produce reports with the sample design file First Questionnaire Report QDS and the CAPI control file First Questionnaire Report En CAPI QPI Other Report Notes The Find command will locate text in Report Element
346. tus of the audio file the File column shows the file name and the Text column shows the text to be recorded The Text column serves as a script while recording the audio files 148 QDS Questionnaire Development System Status Codes There are three WAV file status codes No Name No File and New Text NoName Indicates that no file name has been entered in the Design Studio No Fil iieis A file name has been entered but no file exists in the path designated for audio files New Text File name has been entered and the file exists in the appropriate path but the question text has been modified New Name A file exists and file name has been modified since the last build Files requiring no action will have a blank status code indicating that a file name has been entered and that a file with that name exists in the designated path Be First Questionnaire Example En Script RTF is a sample script file Location of Audio Files By default QDS expects audio files to be stored in c program files QDS 2 4 Studio Audios EN A sample hierarchy of folders for your questionnaires might look like this QDS 2 4 Studio My Questionnaire 1 Audios EN QDS 2 4 Studio My Questionnaire 1 Audios SP You are free to change this organization or the folder names as you like To change the default location 1 Create your ACASI application from BuildIACASI Application See Audio Computer Administered Self Interview
347. ty For this reason we have not included any sample QSR files Multiple Sites Example For the First Questionnaire example we initially collected baseline data at Site 1 with some automated CAPI interviews and some paper interview forms Next we collected baseline data at Site 2 with some automated CAPI interviews Finally we collected some follow up data at Site 1 At this point in our data collection we have decided to send our Site 1 and Site 2 baseline and follow up data to our data coordinating center for processing and some preliminary data analysis 184 QDS Questionnaire Development System Local Warehouses KZ First Questionnaire Site 1 QDW First Questionnaire Site 2 QDW Central Data Warehouse First Questionnaire Central QDW Site Data First Questionnaire Site 2 1 QAD First Questionnaire Site 2 2 QAD First Questionnaire Site 1 3 QAD Shipment Files First Questionnaire Site 1 QTD First Questionnaire Site 2 QTD Warehouses after Posting Receipts First Questionnaire Site 1 Receipts Posted QDW First Questionnaire Site 2 Receipts Posted QDW Site 1 At Site 1 we first created a new local data warehouse called First Questionnaire Site 1 QDW Next we added the following data files to this one warehouse First Questionnaire Site 1 1 QAD Data collected with CAPI at Site 1 visit 1 First Questionnaire Site 1 2 QAD Data collected with CAPI at Site 1 visit 2 First Questionnaire v2 DE 101 QPD
348. u can start collecting data using the CAPI Module you need to build a CAPI control file QPI This file is used by the CAPI Data Collection Module to administer a CAPI interview or form Interviewing staff do not need access to the specification file of the Design Studio to conduct interviews To create a CAPI Control File 1 Select BuildICAPI Application from the Design Studio menu Any validation errors identified during the Build process must be resolved before proceeding See Preparing to Build Validating Your Specifications on page 81 In the Save In drop down box select the folder in which you would like your file saved The default is the folder where the specification file resides The default file name is the name of the specification file plus En CAPI QPI Click on the Options button to refine settings for your application See CAPI Build Options on page 106 4 Click on the Save button QDS You will then be prompted The requested product has been built Would you like to try out the control file now 7 The requested product has been built Would you like to try out the control file now Click Yes to test your CAPI application Click No to return to the Design Studio the control file will still be created If you click Yes QDS will launch the QDS CAPI Module and open to the first screen of the newly created control file 106 QDS Questionnaire Development System CAPI Build Options Alth
349. ubstitution forms are amp TXT Table Category Text SALT Table Category Alternate Text amp LBL Table Category Label amp Q Question Number amp P Question Number P refix AN Question Number Integer amp S Question Number Suffix amp C Table Category Suffix amp var Value of Variable Named var To include an amp character itself in the text use amp amp Invalid Table All tables must have at least one category Invalid Time QDS expects times to be entered in a form appropriate to your locale The form for your locale is determined by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel Press the Current Time button to see the required form for your locale Invalid Time Range You have specified an impossible range of times Make sure that the Latest time allowed is a later time than the Earliest time allowed Invalid Variable Name A variable name must begin with a letter must be no longer than 7 characters and may contain only letters or digits You may elect to allow QDS to determine some or all of those characters for you by using substitution tokens A substitution token will be replaced by the indicated character s The substitution tokens allowed ina variable name are amp Q Question Number amp P Question Number Bref AN Question Number Integer amp S Question Number Suffix amp C Table Category Suffix Lists May Only Be Used for Testing or Lists one or more items enclosed
350. uld first try validating the specifications to learn the extent of the damage To exit QDS without losing the changes you have made during this session save a copy of the file without discarding the Undo Information Select File Save As remove checkmarks from both options at the bottom of the dialog box To repair the damage try running a disk checking utility Or you may want to return to your most recent backup of this file Discontinuous Time Span Components QDS time span elements can have up to three contiguous components For example a combination of Years Months and Days is permitted as is a combination of Days Hours and Minutes A discontinuous combination such as Years Months and Hours is not allowed Disk Full The file cannot be completely saved because there is not sufficient room on the disk The file is now corrupted but it can be recovered when reloaded Appendix B 263 Duplicate Card Names Each response card must have a unique name Y ou are attempting to add or rename a card with the same name as another card already defined for this questionnaire If you are attempting to swap the names of two cards use a temporary name while swapping For example to rename Card A to B and Card B to A do the following 1 Rename Card A to X 2 Rename Card B to A 3 Rename Card X to B Duplicate Code Each code in the list must have a unique code value for pick one code elements or var
351. variable names will be the Variable Name from the Data Element tab plus the Variable Name Suffix In addition a single variable indicating how many items were chosen will be written out to the data file This variable name will match the Variable Name entered on the Data Element tab For example if you had the following question and responses for the Data Element FRUIT Of the fruits listed please select those you have eaten during the past week v Ai Apples B Bananas v C Grapes D Pears vB Strawberries F Oranges In this example the respondent has selected apples grapes and strawberries This will result in the following variables values being written to the data file FRUITA 1 FRUITB 0 FRUITC 1 FRUITD 0 FRUITE 1 FRUITF 0 FRUIT 3 three items were selected Notice that we have six new variables for the one question one for each category of fruit The Variable Name Suffix letters A through F were added to FRUIT to make the six new variable names Aaiqiiti me Pik One Resne Type you will need to define the response set SEET Sud File to be used Double click where indicated to open the Check Item box to enter Description and Variable Label categories for the current Data Element Button Text optional cen Variable Name Suffix The letter that will be appended to the Data Element Variable Name For example if the Variable Name for the Data Element is FRUIT and the Variable
352. very item in the questionnaire When necessary font size an entire set of Response Set buttons on the screen Font size questions Font size buttons Space for Questions Shape of Standard Buitons Sets font size for Question and Information text items default 14 Selects font size for Button Text default 14 Use this box to set the portion of the screen that will be used to display Question Text During the interview each question will be displayed in a box at the top of the screen The size of the box remains fixed throughout the interview The white box on the Appearance tab shows the portion of the screen that will be devoted to the question box Use the left mouse button to drag and resize the box Throughout an automated interview Navigation and Special Code buttons are permanently displayed along the right edge of the screen These include buttons for responses Don t 108 QDS Questionnaire Development System Focus rectangle displacement Key letter separator 00 0000nn Show Question Numbers Bitmap Directory AA Browse button Spin Controls Tab Spin Controls are used in automated interviews to input responses for date time and time span elements without Dabs using the keyboard By default these Minimum allowed date S items will be blank However you can Times of day choose to have an initial va
353. w window showing the empty warehouse The status bar across the top displays the following fields for each data record or case A record case or interview is a single instance of data collection for one CL subject In QDS every case is uniquely identified by the SUBJECT Variable plus any other variables specified as Identifier Variables The Warehouse Manager 155 Status egenen sind Complete Incomplete Duplicate Deleted Resumed Transferred Shipped etc Version eeen reren Version number for form Recorded Date and time of automated interview or data entry Subject ID Based on variables specified in Interview Options in the Design Studio MICHT WEE Date case was transferred into the warehouse Date Outi oien Date case was deleted Changed viii secunalienieh Date case was modified Opening a Warehouse Once you have created a warehouse you may open it by going to FilelOpen Warehouse and selecting your warehouse file QDW You may view the sample local warehouse file called First Questionnaire QDW which contains collected data Note You must open a warehouse file QDW before opening any other type of file that can be read by the Warehouse Manger Warehouse Status Codes The first column of each record in a warehouse file indicates the record s status Possible status codes are Complete A completed case where none of the following conditions apply C Incomplete A case that was terminated before co
354. was FALSE The Number of box indicates how many reconciliation elements follow The third approach loops back to the prior element The Number of box indicates how far back to go This option has the potential disadvantage of introducing an infinite loop into the questionnaire if the inconsistency is not resolved in an earlier element The fourth approach launches a second questionnaire file This process automatically completes the current interview and starts a new interview using the specified file See the next section Launching Another Interview for more information 5 If Loop back to prior element or Reconciliation Elements follow was selected the Number of drop down box will be enabled Specify the number of elements to loop back follow or enter a destination marker In the example below we selected to Loop back 1 element Number of aaaaaannnnaaaaaan Marker Reconciliation Select n elements 1 5 or Marker When deciding how many elements to loop back remember that all elements including Skips Section Headers etc must be counted If Marker was selected the Marker box will be enabled Enter the name of the destination marker This box is enabled only when Marker is selected for the Number of box Number of Marker Loop back to prior element DI fi element DI 6 Select OK to save your Edit Element Edit Elements 65 The Marker box is only enabled if Marker is selected in the Number of box
355. will be the first one of the group In the example below JOB and FULLTIME are both assigned the format named JOB JOB Exporting Data 195 FULLTIME JOB Text variables are listed last in the FORMAT statement In keeping with SAS syntax requirements text format names are preceded with a dollar sign If you have defined a variable in the QDS Design Studio with a name that ends in a numeric character it will be replaced with a letter in the SAS format name as follows 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 I 9 J If the designated rename would result in a duplicate format name a new format name is created using the format X X where is a sequential number Format names for response card items will correspond to response card names with the following exceptions If the same response card is used for multiple variables with different combinations of allowed special codes each unique occurrence of the response card and corresponding special codes will have a separate format The first occurrence will use the response card name for the format name for each subsequent occurrence the format name is changed to Z Z where is a sequential number For example for the response card LENGTH The first occurrence of LENGTH is used with Don t Know set to 7 Not Applicable set to 8 and Refused set to 9 The second occurrence of LENGTH is used with Don t Know and Not Applicable disallowed and Refused set to 99 In thi
356. will need to truncate those fields in the QDS warehouse file before the data set can be exported to Access This also applies to relational data base export e There is a limit of 150 variables for export to an MS Access flat database If you attempt to export a dataset containing more than 150 variables only the first 150 will be exported This is an MS Access limitation for flat database only Save As Options Flat Database Flat Database Options x Bi Special Value Recodes Specified Numeric Values Specified Text Values m Recode to 1 1 D Special Codes Don t Know Don t Know C Null Refused E Refused P Cae RENEM Not Applicable E Not Applicable N C Range Top Skipped F Skipped k C Range Middle E PP C Specified Values Missing E Missing cancel After clicking on the Options button from the Save As box the MS Access Flat Database Options box will open You may set the following options regarding labels and special values including handling missing data Use text fields for all variables To create an MS Access table with all text fields check Use text fields for all variables All coded items will be represented by their code labels rather than numeric values The default setting is not checked Special Value Recodes To change the way QDS special values are exported select an option from the Special Value Recodes Recode to box Special Codes Select to hav
357. window Note that the status of the transferred interviews changes to Shipped as they are copied Dragging and dropping between the Local Warehouse and Interviews to Ship windows will also transfer the selected interviews for shipment When you have finished adding cases to your interview shipment file send the shipment file QTD to your data coordinating center using your preferred method e mail FTP USPS etc Receiving Data The data coordinating center will receive data collected at field sites To receive data 1 Create a new warehouse FilelNew Warehouse or open a preexisting warehouse FilelOpen Warehouse Select FilelOpen Select the folder from the Look in box containing the shipment file s Select Interview Shipment Files from the Files of type box Select the shipment file name you would like to add Click Open Select WindowlITile Horizontally to view the Warehouse and Shipment windows at the same time Se Si ae 8 From the Shipment File window select the interview s to transfer to the warehouse or select EditlSelect All to select all interviews 9 Select EditliCopy to Warehouse 10 Repeat steps 2 9 for additional shipment files Working With Multiple Sites 183 11 Once all shipment files have been copied save FilelSave and close FilelClose your shipment and warehouse files Note that the status of the copied interviews changes to Transferred as they are copied Dragging and drop
358. x es Indicate the value to be used for each Special Code in the box to the right Enter the smallest value allowed for this Data Element The Special Code values should lie outside this range Enter the largest value allowed for this Data Element The Special Code values should lie outside this range Check this box to prevent an entry outside the allowable range for a Data Element If this box is not checked a warning will be issued for out of range numbers but they will be allowed Specify a branching option if a response of zero is entered Data Elements 51 Response Set Tab Numeric Rating Scale Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations f Skipped Notes Response Set Low Anchor Low Value gt For automated interviews Low f m Place anchors Vertical e Above right of Number of scale scale High Anchor scale paints High f IT Require OK Outside scale Allow Value Show tick marks r Show numeric values M Don t Know i For all points For all points C Coded paints only C Coded pointe only M Refused f E eet i C None C None M Not Applicable H l Use a Numeric Rating Scale when responses will be selected from a numeric continuum for example 1 Not at All to 10 Completely In an automated survey respondents may answer anywhere in the range without necessarily specifying an exact number For rating scale elements use the Response Set tab to specify low
359. y in an automated interview or into variable labels for this category To insert this text use the amp ALT substitution token The amp ALT token is used in the same manner as the amp TXT token It is useful when you want to refer to a single category in multiple ways e g Marijuana and Pot If the category description is too long to fit in the amp TXT box you can split the category text between the amp TXT and amp ALT fields Enter the first portion of the category description into the amp TXT field and the remainder in the amp ALT field Include appropriate spaces within and or between fields so that the two fields form a continuous string In the question text enter amp TXT amp ALT with no spaces in between as the category substitution Omitting the space between amp TXT and amp ALT avoids having an extra space for categories that do not include amp ALT text Inserting Data Elements Within a Table Substitution Tokens in Tables As mentioned in the section on substitution tokens several substitution tokens are reserved for use within tables SC Table Category Suffix amp C amp LBL Table Category Label amp LBL amp TXT Table Category Text amp TXT amp ALT Table Category Alternate Text amp ALT These substitution tokens are reserved for use within tables and are in some cases required Every Data Element within a table is subject to the following requirements Question Text must includ
360. y verification ee Check this box to bypass this variable during key verification This option is applicable for Data Entry only and allows the verifier to skip reentry of open ended text elements The default is checked Enable keyboard for ACASI 00aeeeeeeeeeeeea Check this box to allow respondents to use the keyboard to enter text responses Response Set Tab Pattern On the Response Set tab you can choose a ZIP Code S digits response pattern for printed and automated interviews No other options are available at this time Data Element Probes Applicability Styles Calculations if Skipped Notes Response Set p Pattern In many cases the Data Element and Response Set tabs may be the only ones that require input However the remaining Data Element tabs provide more specialized control for your QDS form and are often useful as you begin to use more advanced QDS features Probes Tab On the Probes tab you may enter any text into the Text of probe s box and use character formatting Bold Italic Underline options from the Edit menu This text information will be made available upon request to assist the interviewer 54 QDS Questionnaire Development System during an automated CAPT interview The interviewer can select Help For this Question or Ctrl Q and a dialog box will be displayed showing the Probe text DataElement Probes Applicability Styles Calculations If Skipped Note
361. you may shut down all ODS HAPI running programs by tapping the Stop All button Memory Running Program List Main storage Card Card Running Programs Remove programs to free storage memory Known Problem Because of a bug in the Windows Mobile 2003 operating system there is an intermittent problem when restarting the HAPI program after it s been minimized If the user is in the middle of an interview and taps the Minimize X button on the top right of the screen the HAPI program disappears into the background Normally if the user then taps Start Programs QDS HAPI the program is maximized and comes to the foreground However occasionally this does not work and the screen flickers but nothing gets redrawn The navigation bar or title bar at the top of the screen displays the text Default Ime To resolve this situation the user should stop HAPI via the Running Programs function and restart it again it Entering Interview Responses in HAPI Entering responses in an HAPI interview is similar to that for both CAPI and ACASI interviews however there are some key differences resulting from the Pocket PC operating environment Before administering an interview using QDS HAPI we recommend that you familiarize yourself with the Pocket PC system particularly with the various input options e Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer and Transcriber See the User s Guide for your handheld device

QDS(TM) User`s Manual - NOVA Research Company

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents